SATO | CL4NX Plus | manual | Sato CL4NX Plus Manual

Sato CL4NX Plus Manual
CL4NX-J/CL6NX-J
Table of Contents
Before You Start......................................................................................................... 8
About This Manual............................................................................................................................. 8
Features of the Product..................................................................................................................... 9
Safety Precautions........................................................................................................................... 10
Precautions for Installation and Handling........................................................................................ 16
Select a Safe Location................................................................................................................16
Power Supply.............................................................................................................................. 17
Printing.........................................................................................................................................18
Regulatory Approval......................................................................................................................... 19
Environmentally Hazardous Materials..............................................................................................22
Copyrights/Limitation of Liability/Trademarks...................................................................................23
Copyrights....................................................................................................................................23
Limitation of Liability....................................................................................................................24
Trademarks.................................................................................................................................. 25
Basic Information..................................................................................................... 26
Bundled Accessories........................................................................................................................ 26
Optional Devices.............................................................................................................................. 27
Parts Identification............................................................................................................................ 28
Parts Identification for the Product............................................................................................. 28
Front View.............................................................................................................................. 28
Rear View............................................................................................................................... 29
Internal View...........................................................................................................................30
Parts Identification for the Operator Panel................................................................................. 31
Using the Operator Panel................................................................................................................ 33
Display and Operation of the Operator Panel............................................................................ 33
LED Indicator..........................................................................................................................33
Operations in Online/Offline Mode.........................................................................................33
Status Icon............................................................................................................................. 35
Operations When Errors Occur............................................................................................. 40
Guidance Videos.................................................................................................................... 44
Adjusting the Print Settings During Printing.......................................................................... 48
Canceling the Print Job..........................................................................................................49
Settings Mode..............................................................................................................................51
Settings Mode Menus............................................................................................................ 51
Changing to the Settings Mode............................................................................................. 51
Logging In to/Logging Out of the Settings Mode...................................................................53
Item Selection.........................................................................................................................53
Setting Value Input or Selection............................................................................................ 55
Product Memory and USB Memory................................................................................................. 60
Getting Started......................................................................................................... 61
Installation.........................................................................................................................................61
Installation Precautions............................................................................................................... 61
Installation Space........................................................................................................................ 63
Front View.............................................................................................................................. 63
Side View............................................................................................................................... 63
Bottom View........................................................................................................................... 64
Powering On/Off the Product........................................................................................................... 65
2
Connecting the Power Cord........................................................................................................65
Powering On the Product............................................................................................................67
Powering Off the Product............................................................................................................68
Initial Setup (Startup Guide).............................................................................................................70
Overview of the Startup Guide................................................................................................... 71
Startup Screen.............................................................................................................................75
Language Selection.....................................................................................................................76
Region Setting with Optional RTC Kit........................................................................................ 77
City Setting with Optional RTC Kit..............................................................................................78
Date Setting with Optional RTC Kit............................................................................................ 79
Time Setting with Optional RTC Kit............................................................................................ 80
Print Method Setting....................................................................................................................81
Ribbon Setting............................................................................................................................. 82
Media Sensor Type Setting.........................................................................................................83
Media Setting...............................................................................................................................84
Completion of Initial Setup Screen............................................................................................. 86
Startup Guide Cancelation.......................................................................................................... 87
Configuring the Product According to Media and Options...............................................................88
Print Method................................................................................................................................ 89
Media Sensor Type..................................................................................................................... 92
Print Mode................................................................................................................................... 96
Connecting the Product to a Computer......................................................................................... 100
Procedure for Connecting the Product to a Computer............................................................. 101
Connecting Interfaces................................................................................................................102
Available Interfaces.............................................................................................................. 102
USB Interface Connection (Standard)................................................................................. 103
LAN Interface Connection (Standard)..................................................................................103
Bluetooth Interface Connection (Standard)..........................................................................104
NFC Interface Connection (Standard)................................................................................. 104
RS-232C Interface Connection (Standard).......................................................................... 105
IEEE1284 Interface Connection (Standard).........................................................................106
Wireless LAN Interface Connection (Optional).................................................................... 107
Configuring the Interface Settings.............................................................................................109
Interface Setting Methods.................................................................................................... 109
Configuring the Interface Settings from the Interface Menu of the Product.........................109
Configuring the Interface Settings Using the All-In-One Tool.............................................. 112
Installing the Printer Driver....................................................................................................... 113
Basic Information about the Printer Driver.......................................................................... 113
Installing the Printer Driver (USB)....................................................................................... 113
Installing the Printer Driver (LAN/Wireless LAN)................................................................. 117
Installing the Printer Driver (Bluetooth)................................................................................124
Installing the Printer Driver (RS-232C)................................................................................ 135
Installing the Printer Driver (IEEE1284)...............................................................................140
Uninstalling the Printer Driver.............................................................................................. 147
Printer Driver Features..............................................................................................................150
Configuring the Printer Driver Settings as an Administrator................................................ 150
Configuring the Driver Settings............................................................................................155
Configuring the Printer Settings...........................................................................................157
Outputting a Label from an Application Software................................................................ 159
Printer Driver Sharing Function........................................................................................... 161
All-In-One Tool Features........................................................................................................... 163
Loading Media and Ribbon................................................................................... 164
Media, Ribbon and Print Methods................................................................................................. 164
Loading Media................................................................................................................................ 165
Usable Media.............................................................................................................................166
Adjusting the Position of the Media Sensor..............................................................................167
3
Loading the Media.....................................................................................................................168
Precautions for Loading the Media......................................................................................168
Loading the Media Roll........................................................................................................ 168
Loading the Fan-fold Media................................................................................................. 172
Loading the Media with the Optional Cutter Unit.................................................................173
Loading the Media with the Optional Dispenser Unit and Liner Discharge Outlet............... 179
Loading the Media with the Optional Dispenser Unit and Liner Discharge Rewinder.......... 183
Removing the Liner from the Rewinder...............................................................................188
Loading Ribbon.............................................................................................................................. 189
Checking the Ink Side of the Ribbon........................................................................................190
Loading the Ribbon................................................................................................................... 191
Replacing the Ribbon................................................................................................................195
When to Replace Media and Ribbon.............................................................................................199
Checking the Remaining Amount of Media and Ribbon...........................................................199
Conditions That Trigger Paper End, Label Near End, Ribbon End and Ribbon Near End........200
Conditions That Trigger Paper End..................................................................................... 200
Conditions That Trigger Label Near End............................................................................. 203
Conditions That Trigger Ribbon End................................................................................... 203
Conditions That Trigger Ribbon Near End.......................................................................... 203
Various Settings of the Product........................................................................... 204
The Product's [Settings] Menu....................................................................................................... 204
[Shortcut] Menu......................................................................................................................... 204
[Printing] Menu.......................................................................................................................... 205
[Label Length].......................................................................................................................206
[Label Width]........................................................................................................................ 207
[Auto Measure]..................................................................................................................... 208
[Printing Mode]..................................................................................................................... 209
[Ribbon Near End]............................................................................................................... 209
[Speed]................................................................................................................................. 210
[Sensor Type]....................................................................................................................... 211
[Micro Label Print Mode]......................................................................................................211
[Auto-mode].......................................................................................................................... 215
[Print Mode].......................................................................................................................... 216
[Backfeed].............................................................................................................................217
[Eject Cut].............................................................................................................................218
[Darkness Range].................................................................................................................218
[Darkness].............................................................................................................................219
[Imaging]............................................................................................................................... 219
[Advanced]............................................................................................................................222
[Interface] Menu.........................................................................................................................243
[Network]...............................................................................................................................244
[IEEE1284]............................................................................................................................354
[RS-232C]............................................................................................................................. 356
[USB].................................................................................................................................... 360
[Bluetooth].............................................................................................................................362
[NFC].................................................................................................................................... 369
[Ignore CR/LF]......................................................................................................................370
[Ignore CAN/DLE].................................................................................................................370
[External I/O]........................................................................................................................ 371
[Applications] Menu................................................................................................................... 378
[Protocol]...............................................................................................................................379
[SBPL]...................................................................................................................................380
[SZPL]...................................................................................................................................393
[SIPL].................................................................................................................................... 398
[STCL]...................................................................................................................................402
[SDPL].................................................................................................................................. 409
[SEPL]...................................................................................................................................431
4
[AEP].....................................................................................................................................436
[System] Menu...........................................................................................................................439
[Regional]..............................................................................................................................440
[Notifications]........................................................................................................................ 446
[Sound]................................................................................................................................. 453
[Energy Saving].................................................................................................................... 455
[LCD Brightness].................................................................................................................. 456
[Show Total Count]...............................................................................................................456
[Password]............................................................................................................................ 457
[Start on AC]........................................................................................................................ 461
[Tools] Menu.............................................................................................................................. 462
[Test Print]............................................................................................................................ 463
[HEX-Dump]..........................................................................................................................474
[Reset].................................................................................................................................. 482
[Profiles]................................................................................................................................486
[Certificates]..........................................................................................................................489
[Barcode Checker]................................................................................................................491
[Clone].................................................................................................................................. 503
[Support Info]........................................................................................................................504
[Logging Function]................................................................................................................505
[Startup Guide]..................................................................................................................... 508
[Information] Menu.....................................................................................................................509
[Help].................................................................................................................................... 510
[Build Version]...................................................................................................................... 515
[Applications]........................................................................................................................ 516
[Installation Log]................................................................................................................... 517
[Print Module]....................................................................................................................... 518
[Counters]............................................................................................................................. 520
[IPv4 Address]...................................................................................................................... 521
[IPv6 Address]...................................................................................................................... 521
[LAN MAC]........................................................................................................................... 522
[Wi-Fi MAC].......................................................................................................................... 522
[Wi-Fi Region].......................................................................................................................523
[Wi-Fi Status]........................................................................................................................523
[Wi-Fi Direct].........................................................................................................................524
[Wi-Fi Versions].................................................................................................................... 524
Configuring the Product Settings from a Web Browser................................................................. 525
Accessing to the Web Configuration Page............................................................................... 525
Dashboard................................................................................................................................. 527
Settings...................................................................................................................................... 529
Tools...........................................................................................................................................531
Certificates................................................................................................................................. 533
Various Ways to Output........................................................................................ 534
Outputting with General-purpose Software.................................................................................... 534
Outputting and Controlling with Dedicated Command...................................................................535
Controlling the Product with External Signal................................................................................. 536
Adjusting the Product............................................................................................537
Printable Area.................................................................................................................................537
Media Sensor Positions and Media Stop Positions....................................................................... 538
Flow of Printing Operations............................................................................................................540
Printing Operations....................................................................................................................540
Operations in Continuous Mode............................................................................................... 541
Operations in Tear-Off Mode.....................................................................................................545
Operations in Cutter Mode........................................................................................................551
5
Operations in Dispenser Mode................................................................................................. 568
Operations in Linerless Mode................................................................................................... 586
Operations When the Barcode Check Function Is Enabled..................................................... 592
Operations When the Media Sensor Is Disabled..................................................................... 597
Adjusting the Base Reference Point.............................................................................................. 598
About the Base Reference Point.............................................................................................. 598
Adjusting the Print Position....................................................................................................... 600
Adjusting the Media Stop Position............................................................................................603
Notes on the Stop/Cut Position of Different Media...................................................................606
Adjusting the Print Quality..............................................................................................................608
Adjusting the Print Darkness.................................................................................................... 608
Adjusting the Print Speed......................................................................................................... 611
Adjusting the Product's Buzzer Volume......................................................................................... 614
Adjusting the Head Pressure Balance........................................................................................... 616
Print Head Balance................................................................................................................... 616
Head Pressure Setting.............................................................................................................. 617
Pressure Balance Setting..........................................................................................................618
Configuring Optional Barcode Check Function..............................................................................619
Basic Specifications of the Barcode Check Function............................................................... 619
Setting Up the Barcode Checker.............................................................................................. 626
Operational Settings for the Barcode Checker and Installation...........................................626
Changing How the RS-232C Interface is Used (When Using the KEYENCE Barcode
Checkers)............................................................................................................................. 627
Doing a Test Read with the Barcode Checker.................................................................... 629
Enabling the Barcode Check.................................................................................................... 633
Selecting the Barcode Check Mode.................................................................................... 633
Contents of the Check for Readable Mode and Comparison Mode.................................... 635
Restrictions for the Barcode Check Function........................................................................... 638
Initializing the Product.................................................................................................................... 641
Procedures for Initializing..........................................................................................................641
Initializing the Data Saved on the Product.......................................................................... 641
Initializing the Setting Values and Data on the Product.......................................................644
Initializing the Setting Values on the Product...................................................................... 648
List of Initial Values................................................................................................................... 653
[Printing] Menu..................................................................................................................... 653
[Interface] Menu................................................................................................................... 656
[Applications] Menu.............................................................................................................. 668
[System] Menu..................................................................................................................... 673
[Tools] Menu......................................................................................................................... 674
[Information] Menu............................................................................................................... 678
Maintenance............................................................................................................ 680
Cleaning the Product......................................................................................................................680
Cleaning.....................................................................................................................................680
Cleaning the Print Head and Platen Roller.............................................................................. 681
Cleaning Intervals.................................................................................................................681
Cleaning Using the Cleaning Kit..........................................................................................681
Cleaning the Optional Linerless Cutter Kit.......................................................................... 684
Cleaning Using the Cleaning Sheet.....................................................................................685
Replacing Consumable Parts.........................................................................................................688
Replacing the Print Head..........................................................................................................688
Replacing the Platen Roller...................................................................................................... 690
Operating the Notification Screen of SOS (SATO Online Services) (SOS users only).................. 693
Operating the Notification Screen of the SOS (SATO Online Services) On-Demand Mode (SOS
users only)................................................................................................................................. 693
6
Operating the Date and Time Settings Notification Screen of SOS (SATO Online Services) (SOS
users only)................................................................................................................................. 695
SOS (SATO Online Services) Application (SOS users only)......................................................... 697
When You Are in Trouble...................................................................................... 698
When an Error Message Appears................................................................................................. 698
Error Message Indication and Operating Procedure When the SOS (SATO Online Services) Is
Enabled (SOS users only)............................................................................................................. 740
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble.........................................................................742
Product Specifications...........................................................................................743
Specifications..................................................................................................................................743
Hardware................................................................................................................................... 743
Interface..................................................................................................................................... 748
Supported Interfaces............................................................................................................ 748
USB Interface....................................................................................................................... 748
LAN Interface....................................................................................................................... 749
Bluetooth Interface............................................................................................................... 750
NFC Interface....................................................................................................................... 750
RS-232C Interface................................................................................................................751
IEEE1284 Interface.............................................................................................................. 752
External Signal (EXT) Interface........................................................................................... 754
Wireless LAN Interface........................................................................................................ 761
Built-in Functions....................................................................................................................... 764
Printer Languages..................................................................................................................... 766
Usable Media and Ribbon..............................................................................................................767
Media......................................................................................................................................... 767
Ribbon........................................................................................................................................771
Usable Fonts and Barcodes...........................................................................................................772
Fonts.......................................................................................................................................... 772
Barcodes....................................................................................................................................796
Support and Warranty............................................................................................798
SOS (SATO Online Services) (SOS users only)........................................................................... 798
Maintenance Support..................................................................................................................... 799
Warranty Period for Consumables................................................................................................. 800
7
About This Manual
Before You Start
About This Manual
Thank you for purchasing the SATO CL4NX Plus (hereafter referred to as "the product").
This manual supplies basic information on how to operate the CL4NX Plus. Read the manual carefully
to understand each function of the CL4NX Plus before operation.
Symbols
This operator manual uses following symbols:
Item
Description
The Warning symbol indicates that you can cause death or serious injury
if you do not follow the instructions or procedures.
Warning
The Caution symbol indicates that you can cause injury or property
damage if you do not follow the instructions or procedures.
Caution
The Note symbol indicates useful and supplemental information that you
should know.
Note
The Reference symbol indicates the link of relevant information.
Reference
•
Reproduction in any manner of all or part of this document is prohibited.
•
The contents of this document may be changed without prior notice.
•
Great care has been taken in the preparation of this document, but if any problems,
mistakes, or omission are found, please contact your SATO reseller or technical
support center.
8
Features of the Product
CL4NX Plus is a high-performance labeling printer with engineered with a robust die-cast metal and
equipped with versatile features for ZERO downtime.
The main features of CL4NX Plus are as follows:
•
High accuracy and high quality printing, with resolutions of 203, 305 and 609 dpi
•
Printing speeds, up to 14ips
•
Supports large media rolls with outside diameter of 265 mm (10 inches)
•
Supports ribbon length up to 600 meters (1968.5 feets)
•
Designed for ease of use and serviceability
•
Easily see the printer status or errors with the highly legible TFT color 3.5-inch LCD
•
Easy to understand Onboard Guidance Videos
•
Print head and platen roller can be replaced without tools
•
Supports 31 languages for display and 47 languages for printing scalable fonts
•
Supports various communication interfaces
•
Supports various advance protocols such as IPv6, SNMP, LDP, FTP and NTP
•
Supports SATOs’ original Application Enabled Printing (AEP) for flexible user orientated features,
such as PC less printing and linking directly to PLC and much more
•
Supports SATO Online Services, for preemptive action of issues before they occur so to minimize
downtime
•
Supports various options: Guillotine Cutter, Label dispenser, Barcode checker, Linerless cutter
•
Certified by Wi-Fi alliance
9
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions
This topic describes how to use the product safely.
Be sure to read the following information carefully before using the product.
Pictographic Symbols
This operator manual and the product labels use a variety of pictographic symbols. These symbols
emphasize the safe and correct use of the product and to prevent injury to others and property
damage. The explanation of the symbols is as follows. Be sure to understand these symbols well
before you read the main text.
Ignoring the instructions marked by this symbol and
erroneously operating the product could result in death or
serious injury.
Ignoring the instructions marked by this symbol and
erroneously operating the product could result in injury or
property damage.
Example Pictographs
The
pictograph means "Caution is required". A specific warning symbol is
contained inside this pictograph (The symbol at left is for electric shock).
The
pictograph means "Should not be done". What is specifically prohibited
is contained in or near the pictograph (The symbol at left means "Disassembly
prohibited").
The
pictograph means "Must be done". What is specifically to be done is
contained in the pictograph (The symbol at left means "Unplug the power cord
from the outlet").
10
•
Do not use the power supply voltage other than the one specified.
Doing so could result in a fire or electric shock.
•
The product is not explosion proof certified.
•
Do not use in a potentially explosive environment or atmosphere.
Doing so could result in a fire or explosion.
•
Do not set the product on an unstable area, such as a wobbly table
or slanted area or on an area subject to strong vibration. The product
could fall or topple over, possibly resulting in injury.
•
If the product is dropped or breaks, immediately power it off, unplug
the power cord from the outlet, and contact your SATO reseller or
technical support. Using the product in one of these conditions could
result in a fire or electric shock.
•
Do not damage, break, or alter the power cord and other cables.
Also, do not place heavy objects on the power cord, apply heat to
it, or forcibly bend, twist, or pull it. Doing so could result in a fire or
electric shock.
•
Do not splash water on the power cord or get it wet. Doing so could
result in damage or electric shock.
•
If the power cord and other cables becomes damaged (core is
exposed, wires broken, deformed, etc.), contact your SATO reseller
or technical support. Using the power cord and other cables in this
condition could result in a fire or electric shock.
•
The dedicated power cord included in the package is to be used
specifically for this product. Do not use it for other electronic
products. Also, do not use the power cord of other products for this
product. Doing so could result in a fire or electric shock.
Do not use the voltage
other than specified
Do not use in
hazardous locations
Do not set on an
unstable area
When the product is
dropped or breaks
Handling the power
cord and other cables
11
Safety Precautions
•
Always connect the product's ground wire to a ground. Not grounding
the ground wire could result in electric shock.
•
Do not use the product if any abnormality such as smoke or an
unusual odor is detected. Doing so could result in a fire or electric
shock. Immediately power off the product, unplug the power cord
from the outlet, and contact your SATO reseller or technical support
for repairs.
•
Do not place flower vases, cups, or other containers holding liquids,
such as water or chemicals, near the product. If water or chemicals
get inside the product, immediately power it off, and contact your
SATO reseller or technical support. Using the product in this condition
could result in a fire or electric shock.
•
Do not use the product near a container holding liquid. If the product
is dropped into water, immediately power it off, and contact your
SATO reseller or technical support. Using the product in this condition
could result in a fire or electric shock.
•
Do not insert or drop any metal or flammable objects down the
opening (cable port, etc.) of the product. If a foreign object gets inside
the product, immediately power it off, unplug the power cord from the
outlet, and contact your SATO reseller or technical support. Using the
product in this condition could result in a fire or electric shock.
Always ground the
connections
Do not use the product
when something is
abnormal
Do not place
containers holding
water or other liquid
near the product
Do not drop the
product in water
Do not put objects
inside the product
12
Connecting cables or
optional devices
•
Before connecting a cable or optional device to the product, be
sure to power off the product and the optional devices. If they
are connected with the power on, an optional device could move
unexpectedly, resulting in injury, electric shock, or damage.
•
When installing a cable or optional device, be sure not to make a
mistake in the orientation and steps to install. Otherwise, it could
result in injury, fire, electric shock, or damage.
•
Do not use cables other than the ones supplied with the product or
recommended by us. Doing so could result in smoke, fire, electric
shock, or damage.
•
Do not power on/power off the product or plug/unplug the power cord
and other cables with wet hands. Doing so could result in electric
shock or damage.
•
Do not disassemble or modify the product. Doing so could result in a
fire or electric shock. Ask your SATO reseller or technical support to
conduct internal inspections, adjustments, and repairs.
•
Do not use cleaning fluids other than the ones supplied with the
product or recommended by us.
•
The cleaning fluid is to be strictly kept away from the fire. Never apply
heat or place it in the fire.
•
Keep the fluid out of reach of children to prevent them from
accidentally drinking it. If a child accidentally drinks the fluid,
immediately consult with a physician.
•
Do not touch the cutter with your hands or insert foreign objects other
than media into the cutter. Doing so could result in injury.
Do not operate with
wet hands
Do not disassemble
the product
Using the cleaning
fluid
Do not touch or insert
any object in the cutter
13
Safety Precautions
•
Do not carry the product while loaded with media or attached to an
optional external device. They could fall, possibly resulting in injury.
•
When setting the product on the floor or a stand, make sure not to
get your fingers or hands trapped under the product.
•
Before moving the product, be sure to power it off, unplug the power
cord from the outlet, and disconnect any connected cables. Moving
the product with the power cord or cables still connected could
damage them, possibly resulting in a fire, electric shock, or damage.
•
Do not place this product in an area with high humidity or where
condensation occurs. If condensation has occurred, immediately
power off the product, and avoid using it until it is dried. Using the
product while condensation is on it could result in a fire, electric
shock, or damage.
•
Grab a power cord and other cables by the plug when removing from
the outlet or connector port. Removing a power cord and other cables
by grabbing the cord/cable area could result in exposure of wires,
breakage, fire, electric shock, or damage.
•
Do not place the power cord and other cables near a heater or other
sources of heat. Doing so could result in melting of the power cord
and other cables sheathing, fire, electric shock, or damage.
•
Be careful not to get injured when handling the media inlet or the
cover.
•
When loading a media roll, be careful not to get your fingers trapped
between the media roll and the supply spindle.
•
The print head is hot after printing. Be careful not to get burned when
replacing media or cleaning immediately after printing.
•
To replace the print head, follow the procedure in the Operator
Manual. If the Operator Manual does not contain this procedure,
avoid trying to replace it on your own terms, and contact your SATO
reseller or technical support.
•
Do not touch the print head with your bare hands. Doing so could
result in injury or damage.
Carrying the product
Do not place the
product in areas with
high humidity
Power cord and other
cables
Loading fan-fold media
Loading media roll
14
Print head
•
When opening and closing the print head, make sure that objects
other than media do not get caught. Otherwise, it could result in injury
or damage.
•
When opening and closing the cover, be careful not to get your
fingers trapped in between. Also, firmly hold the cover to prevent it
from closing unexpectedly.
•
Always have the cover of the product closed when using. You could
get injured by touching the moving parts. Also, dust or foreign objects
could get inside, possibly resulting in the product to malfunction.
•
When not using the product for a long time, unplug the power cord
from the outlet to maintain safety.
•
When maintaining and cleaning the product, unplug the power cord
from the outlet to maintain safety.
Cover
Always keep the cover
of the product closed
When not using the
product for a long time
During maintenance
and cleaning
15
Select a Safe Location
Precautions for Installation and Handling
Select a Safe Location
Product operations can be affected by the product's environment.
Refer to the following instructions regarding how to install and handle the product.
•
Place the product on a surface that is flat and level.
If the surface is not flat and level, this may cause bad print quality. This may also cause a
malfunction and decrease the life span of the product.
•
Do not place the product in a location that is subject to vibration.
Subjecting the product to severe vibration or shock may cause a failure or damage to the
product, leading to a product malfunction.
•
Keep the product out of high temperature and humidity.
Avoid locations subject to extreme or fast changes in temperature or humidity.
•
Do not install the product in a location exposed to water or oil.
Water or oil entering inside the product may cause a fire, electric shock or malfunction.
•
Avoid dust.
Dust build up may cause lowered print quality, faults, or malfunctions.
•
Keep out of direct sunlight.
The product has a built-in optical sensor. Exposure to direct sunlight may cause incorrect
detection by the sensor so the product does not operate normally. Therefore, close the cover
when using the product.
•
Do not use in hazardous locations.
Do not use in a potentially explosive environment or atmosphere. Doing so could cause a fire or
explosion.
16
Power Supply
Product operations can be affected by the product's environment.
Refer to the following instructions regarding how to install and handle the product.
•
The product requires an AC power supply.
Be sure to connect the product to an AC power supply.
•
Connect the power cord to a grounded AC outlet.
Make sure that the product is connected to a grounded AC outlet.
•
Supply a stable source of electricity to the product.
When using the product, do not share its AC outlet with other electrical devices. This could cause
power fluctuations and performance issues with your product.
17
Printing
Printing
The print result varies depending on the usage environment (temperature and humidity), the supply
condition (the combination of media and ribbon), and the product settings (the print speed, the print
darkness, etc.).
Please sufficiently test the product in your usage environment, and use it with the optimal combination.
If anything is unclear, or if you have any questions, contact your SATO sales representative or reseller.
18
Regulatory Approval
FCC Warning
You are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Shielded cable must be used in order to comply with the emission limits.
FCC Statement for Optional Wireless LAN
This device complies with RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
The antenna used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20
cm from all people and must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
Bluetooth/Wireless Communication
Compliance Statement
This product has been certified for compliance with the relevant radio interference regulations of your
country or region. To make sure continued compliance, do not:
•
Disassemble or modify this product.
•
Remove the certificate label (serial number seal) affixed to this product.
Use of this product near microwave and/or other wireless LAN equipment, or where static electricity
or radio interference is present, may shorten the communication distance, or even disable
communication.
Industry Canada (IC) Statement for Bluetooth
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
•
This device may not cause interference.
•
This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment
and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should be
19
Regulatory Approval
installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from person’s body
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes :
•
L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage.
•
L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage
est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un
environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF)
CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou
plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et
chevilles).
20
Disposal of Old Electrical & Electronic Equipment (Applicable in the European Union and other
European countries with separate collection systems)
A product marked with this symbol on itself or on its packaging shall not be
treated as household waste. Instead it shall be handed over to an appropriate
collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment in
accordance with local regulations. Inappropriate waste handling of this product
may cause detrimental consequences for the environment and damage
to human health. The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural
resources and contribute to your community. For more detailed information
on recycling of this product, please contact your local municipal organization,
your household waste disposal service or the dealer where you purchased the
product.
21
Environmentally Hazardous Materials
Environmentally Hazardous Materials
RoHS Directive
This product is in conformity with RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU on the Restriction of the Use of Certain
Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
Compliance Status of REACH Regulation
(1) Status of registered chemical substances
No chemical substances are intentionally emitted, nor are there any chemical substances that are
registered with the European Chemicals Agency.
(2) Information about the Substances of Very High Concern (SVHC) contained in the product
Currently, there has been no information communicated regarding SVHC that exceed 0.1% of the
product's weight. In the future, if SVHC that exceed 0.1% of the product's weight are found, we
will immediately communicate that information.
22
Copyrights/Limitation of Liability/Trademarks
Copyrights
Any unauthorized reproduction of the contents of this document, in part or whole, is strictly prohibited.
© 2019 SATO Corporation. All rights reserved.
23
Limitation of Liability
Limitation of Liability
•
SATO Corporation and its subsidiaries in Japan, the U.S. and other countries make no
representations or warranties of any kind regarding this material, including, but not limited to,
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. SATO Corporation shall
not be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any
damages, whether direct, indirect, incidental or consequential, in connection with the furnishing,
distribution, performance or use of this material.
•
Specifications and contents in this document are subject to change without notice.
•
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the product. SATO
Corporation cannot be held responsible for any product malfunctions caused by a virus spread
via USB memory.
24
Trademarks
•
SATO is a registered trademark of SATO Holdings Corporation and its subsidiaries in Japan, the
U.S. and other countries.
•
NiceLabel is a trademark or registered trademark of Euro Plus d.o.o. in the U.S.A and other
countries.
•
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.
•
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance.
•
Wi-Fi Direct
•
Windows and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
•
Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A.
•
Android, YouTube, the YouTube logo, and Google Chrome are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Google LLC.
•
iPad, iPhone, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
•
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used
under license.
•
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
®
TM
TM
, Wi-Fi Protected Setup
TM
, WPA
25
TM
and WPA2
are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.
Bundled Accessories
Basic Information
Bundled Accessories
After unpacking the product, make sure that you have all the bundled accessories. If there are any
missing items, contact the SATO reseller where you purchased the product.
•
User documents (Quick Guide, Safety Instructions, and Global Warranty Program leaflet)
•
Power cord
The shape of power plug varies depending on the region in which it was purchased.
•
Keep the packaging box and cushioning material after installing the product. You can
pack the product with this packaging box for shipment when requesting for repairs.
26
Optional Devices
The optional devices for the product are as follows. The optional devices can be factory installed or
installed by the customer engineer. Contact your SATO reseller or technical support center.
Optional Devices
Description
Available or
not
Cutter unit
Automatically cuts the media in the
designated number of pages.
Available
Simple dispenser kit
Removes the label from the liner.
Available
The liner is ejected out of the product.
Dispenser unit (with internal liner
rewinder)
Removes the label from the liner.
Linerless cutter kit
The environmentally friendly linerless
labels can be used.
Available
RTC (Calendar) kit
A calendar system for printing the date
and time on a label to output.
Available
External rewinder
Automatically rewinds the label output
by the product.
Available
Communicates with the wireless LAN.
Available
A stand kit to mount the barcode
checker.
Available
WLAN 802.11a/b/g/n Dual Band
Available
The liner can be ejected out of the
product or rewound inside of the
product.
RWG500
WLAN (2.4GHz, 5GHz)
Barcode checker stand kit
For the details of the installation, refer
to the bundled Installation Manual.
External cover kit
A set of covers to prevent dust from
entering the external openings for label
supply.
Available
For the details of the installation, refer
to the bundled Installation Manual.
•
For more details about the optional devices, contact your SATO sales representative.
27
Front View
Parts Identification
Parts Identification for the Product
Front View
(1) Top cover
(2) NFC antenna location
(3) Color LCD
(4) Operator panel
(5) Media discharge outlet
(6) USB connector (Type A)
Enable the storage of product settings information with USB memory.
Also, other devices like a barcode checker, barcode scanner or keyboard can be connected.
•
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
product. SATO Corporation cannot be held responsible for any product malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
28
Rear View
(1) Wireless LAN antenna (Optional)
Connector for installation of optional wireless LAN antenna.
(2) RS-232C connector
To connect the product to the computer using the RS-232C serial interface.
You can also connect a barcode checker.
Usage of the RS-232C interface can be selected in the [Tools] > [Barcode Checker] > [Test] >
[Interface] menu.
(3) IEEE1284 connector
To connect the product to the computer using the IEEE1284 interface.
(4) EXT connector (External signal interface)
Interface connector for external signals. Connect an optional device to this terminal.
(5) USB connector (Type B)
To connect the product to the computer using the USB interface.
(6) USB connector (Type A)
Enable the storage of product settings information with USB memory.
Also, other devices like a barcode checker, barcode scanner or keyboard can be connected.
•
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
product. SATO Corporation cannot be held responsible for any product malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
(7) LAN connector
To connect the product to the network using the LAN interface.
29
Internal View
(8) AC input terminal
Supplies power to the product through the inserted power cord.
Before connecting, make sure that the AC voltage of your region is in the range of AC 100 to 240
V, 50 to 60 Hz.
Internal View
(1) Ribbon supply spindle
(2) Ribbon rewind spindle
(3) Ribbon roller
(4) Print head (Consumables)
Creates an image directly on the media or by using a ribbon. Clean the print head regularly.
(5) Platen roller (Consumables)
(6) Front cover
(7) Media holder guide
Used to hold the media roll.
(8) Media roll holder
Used to hang the media roll to the bar.
(9) Media guide
(10) Head lock lever
Used to release the print head assembly.
30
Parts Identification for the Operator Panel
(1)
Power button
To power on the product, press the
power button until the LED lights up in blue.
To power off the product, press the
power button for more than two seconds.
(2) LED indicator
(3) Color LCD
(4)
Soft buttons
The functions change depending on the screen. The functions of the buttons are indicated on the
bottom of the screen.
Example 1: In Offline mode
left soft button: ONLINE,
right soft button: FEED
31
Parts Identification for the Operator Panel
Example 2: The numerical value input screen of the Settings menu
left soft button: Delete one character,
right soft button: Save
Back button
(5)
Returns to the previous screen.
Line button
(6)
Toggle between Online/Offline mode or playback/pause the video.
Enter button
(7)
Confirm the selected item or setting value.
(8)
/
/
/
Arrow buttons
Navigate the selection in the screen menu.
32
Using the Operator Panel
Display and Operation of the Operator Panel
LED Indicator
The LED indicator lights up or flashes to show the current status of the product. The product statuses
which the LED indicator shows are as follows:
LED Indicator
Color/Status
Description
Blue/Lights on
Online mode
Lights off
Power off or Offline mode
Red/Lights on
Product error (for example, when the ribbon
runs out)
Blue/Flashes at
intervals of two
seconds
Sleep mode (energy saving mode)
•
If the product enters sleep mode during a product error status (LED lights red), the LED
indicator will flash blue at intervals of two seconds.
•
By default, the product goes into sleep mode after 60 minutes of inactivity. Use the
[Energy Saving] menu to change the period before the product enters sleep mode.
Operations in Online/Offline Mode
Online Mode
33
Operations in Online/Offline Mode
In Online mode, you can execute the print job.
(1) Change to Offline mode.
Offline Mode
In Offline mode, the print job will stop.
You can adjust the print settings, cancel the print job or feed the media.
After you complete or cancel the print job, you can show the Settings mode.
(1) Cancel the print job.
(2) Change to Online mode.
(3) Feed the media.
(4) Shows the Adjustments mode when the print job is paused.
Shows the Settings mode when there are no print jobs.
34
Status Icon
The icons on the status bar of the display show the product's status.
(1) Status bar
Communication Interface Status
Icon
Description
Bluetooth is enabled but not connected.
Bluetooth is enabled and connected.
Network link is enabled but not connected.
Network link is enabled and connected.
NFC is enabled but not connected.
35
Status Icon
Icon
Description
NFC is enabled and connected.
Not connected to the NTP time server.
Wi-Fi is authenticated, but not connected.
Wi-Fi is connected.
Signal Level: 1
Wi-Fi is connected.
Signal Level: 2
Wi-Fi is connected.
Signal Level: 3
Wi-Fi is connected.
Signal Level: 4
Wi-Fi Direct is not connected.
Wi-Fi Direct is connected.
Signal Level: 1
36
Icon
Description
Wi-Fi Direct is connected.
Signal Level: 2
Wi-Fi Direct is connected.
Signal Level: 3
Wi-Fi Direct is connected or the product is set to act as an access point.
Signal Level: 4
Product is connected to USB host.
Waiting for external input/output signal.
Standard code is disabled.
The On-Demand mode of the SOS (SATO Online Services) is enabled.
The Real Time mode of the SOS is enabled. The product is connected to the SOS
cloud.
The Real Time mode of the SOS is enabled, but not connected to the SOS cloud.
If the LAN or Wi-Fi icon is grayed out, the product is not connected to the network.
If the LAN or Wi-Fi icon is active, the Internet connection of the SOS cloud has a
trouble.
37
Status Icon
Icon
Description
Time period set for periodic notification for On-Demand mode for SOS has been
reached. Scan the QR code and send the information to the SOS cloud.
IP address could not be acquired. Or a communication error has occurred.
USB Memory Status
Icon
Description
USB memory is connected.
Barcode Checker Status
Icon
Description
Barcode checker is connected.
Barcode Scanner Status
Icon
Description
Barcode scanner is connected in AEP mode.
38
Print Job Status
Icon
Description
Waiting for media removal. Remove the media.
Ribbon is near the end. The rest of the ribbon is decreased. Prepare a new
ribbon.
Label is near the end. The rest of the media is decreased. Prepare new media.
Command error detected. Check the print data.
Receive buffer is nearly full. Stop sending print data until the buffer is no longer
nearly full.
Defective print head is detected. Replace the print head.
Incompatible print head is detected. Replace the print head.
Maintenance Status
Icons notify you about cleaning the product and replacing parts at the set periods when [Notifications]
is enabled.
39
Operations When Errors Occur
Icon
Description
Clean the print head or platen roller.
Replace the print head.
Replace the platen roller.
Replace the cutter unit.
Operations When Errors Occur
When a product error occurs, an icon and message (the error and solution) for the error appear on the
display. When an error occurs, you can perform the following operations:
•
Change to Offline mode.
•
Cancel the error.
•
Feed the media.
•
Change to Settings mode.
•
Change to guidance video.
•
Change to the SOS error screen on which the QR code and phone number are displayed if the
SOS (SATO Online Services) is enabled.
40
•
The available operations vary, depending on the situation.
(1) Error Icon
(2) Error number
(3) Clear the error if allowed for the active error.
(4) Change to Offline mode if allowed for the active error.
(5) The icon appears when the Settings mode or guidance video is available.
The SOS icon appears when the SOS is enabled.
(6) Feed the media if allowed for the active error.
(7) Change to Settings mode or guidance video.
Change to the SOS error screen on which the QR code and phone number are displayed if the
SOS is enabled.
(8) When there are two icons on the (5) area, select the icon by using
icon will be highlighted.
Error Icon
Icon
Description
Paper end is detected.
Ribbon end is detected.
41
/
buttons. The selected
Operations When Errors Occur
Icon
Description
Print data is larger than the media size.
Sensor error is detected.
Print head is unlocked.
Print head error is detected.
•
Communication error is detected.
•
BCC error is detected.
•
CRC error is detected.
Receive buffer overflow.
Cutter error is detected.
•
USB memory is not accessible.
•
There is no free space in the USB memory.
Calendar error is detected.
42
Icon
Description
•
Wireless LAN setting error is detected.
•
Authentication with the server failed.
•
Authentication with the server timed out.
•
No print head installed or head resolution was changed.
•
Product error was detected.
The temperature of the print head has exceeded the tolerance range.
Bluetooth module is defective.
Paper jam is detected.
NFC error is detected.
NFC command error is detected.
The barcode checker is not detected at product startup or at the start of printing
when the barcode check mode is enabled.
•
The barcode could not be read.
•
The read result of the barcode does not match the command data.
43
Guidance Videos
Guidance Videos
The product contains guidance videos that are shown on the display for visual reference of the
product's operations.
List of the Guidance Videos
The product contains the following guidance videos for visual reference of product operations.
The onboard guidance videos are as follows:
No.
Guidance Videos
Show video from
Error screen
Startup Guide
[Information]
Menu
1
Media roll loading
(Standard)
-
Possible
Possible
2
Media roll loading
(Cutter)
-
Possible
Possible
3
Media roll loading
(Linerless)
-
Possible
Possible
4
Media roll loading
(Dispenser)
-
Possible
Possible
5
Media roll loading
(Dispenser with rewinder)
-
Possible
Possible
6
Fan-fold media loading
(Standard)
-
Possible
Possible
7
Fan-fold media loading
(Cutter)
-
Possible
Possible
8
Ribbon loading
-
Possible
Possible
9
Media roll replacement
(Standard)
Possible
-
Possible
10
Media roll replacement
(Cutter)
Possible
-
Possible
11
Media roll replacement
(Linerless)
Possible
-
Possible
12
Media roll replacement
(Dispenser)
Possible
-
Possible
13
Media roll replacement
(Dispenser with rewinder)
Possible
-
Possible
14
Fan-fold media
replacement (Standard)
Possible
-
Possible
44
No.
Guidance Videos
Show video from
Error screen
Startup Guide
[Information]
Menu
15
Fan-fold media
replacement (Cutter)
Possible
-
Possible
16
Ribbon replacement
Possible
-
Possible
17
Print head replacement
-
-
Possible
18
Platen roller replacement
-
-
Possible
19
Cleaning
-
-
Possible
Playing the Guidance Video from the Error Screen
Play the guidance video from the error screen and resolve the error by following the procedure of the
video.
1. On the error screen, press the
button to play the guidance video.
If there are more videos to choose from, press the arrow buttons to select the guidance video, and
then press the
button. The guidance video starts.
2. Follow the procedures to resolve the error according to the guidance video.
Getting Access to the Guidance Video in Online Mode
When in the Online mode, play the guidance video according to the following procedure.
45
Guidance Videos
1. Press the
button in Online mode.
The product changes to Offline mode.
2. Press the
button.
The product changes to Settings mode.
3. Select [Information] using the
/
buttons.
46
4. Press the
button.
The item list appears.
5. Select [Help] using the
6. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The guidance video list appears.
7. Select the video for playback using the
button.
/
The guidance video starts.
47
buttons, and then press the
Adjusting the Print Settings During Printing
Operating the Guidance Video
(1) Indication panel appears again when one of the buttons is pressed.
(2) Stop the playback of the video and return to menu.
(3) Playback the video from the start.
(4) Playback or pause the video.
(5) Rewind the video.
(6) Fast-forward the video.
Adjusting the Print Settings During Printing
Follow the procedure below to adjust the print position, print darkness and print speed during printing.
1. Press the
button to pause print job and change the product to Offline mode.
48
2. Press the
button.
The Adjustments mode appears.
3. Select an item and adjust the setting.
4. Press the
button to return to Offline mode.
5. Press the
button to change to Online mode.
The print job resumes with the adjusted settings.
•
When [Printing] > [Advanced] > [Prioritize] menu has been set to [Commands] and the
print settings have been specified by command, the changes made in the Adjustments
mode will be applied only to the data already analyzed at that time. The settings
specified by command will be applied to the rest of the data.
Canceling the Print Job
Cancel the print job according to the following procedure. When the print job is canceled, the data
stored in the receive buffer of the product is also deleted.
49
Canceling the Print Job
1. Press the
2. Press the
button to change the product to Offline mode.
button.
A message appears, confirming that you want to cancel the print job.
3. Press the
button.
The print job is canceled.
50
Settings Mode
In the Settings mode, you can set the product's various settings. The topics here explain how to
operate the Settings mode.
Settings Mode Menus
There are six main menus in the Settings mode and each menu contains many layers of submenus.
Frequently used settings are also listed in the [Shortcut] menu so that you can directly access them.
Menu
Description
Shortcut Menu
Directly access frequently used settings.
Printing Menu
Access the settings related to printing.
Interface Menu
Access the settings related to the interfaces.
Applications Menu
Access the settings related to the printer command.
System Menu
Access the settings related to the display language, buzzer volume
etc.
Tools Menu
Access the test print, initialization and other settings.
Information Menu
Displays the information and guidance videos for the product.
•
The
icon appears between the [Information] menu and [Shortcut] menu when
the [System] > [Regional] > [Display Language Icon] menu is enabled. You can easily
access the [Language] menu.
Changing to the Settings Mode
The Settings mode appears when no print jobs remain in the product.
Change the product to the Settings mode according to the following procedure:
51
Changing to the Settings Mode
1. Press the
button in Online mode.
The product changes to Offline mode.
2. Press the
button.
The product changes to Settings mode.
52
•
To exit the Settings mode, press the
button.
Logging In to/Logging Out of the Settings Mode
The Settings mode logs in and logs out by the following procedure, if the password is enabled.
•
If the password is enabled, input the password after entering the Settings mode.
When logged in to the Settings mode, [LOG OUT] appears on the bottom left of the screen.
•
Press the
button to log out of the Settings mode.
Password is required to enter the Settings mode again.
•
With password enabled, if no button is pressed for about 10 minutes after login, the
login session will end automatically. Password is required to enter the Settings mode
again.
Item Selection
Select an item in Settings mode according to the following procedure:
53
Item Selection
1. Select menu using the
2. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The item list appears.
3. Select an item using the
4. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
If the selected item is a setting item, the setting screen appears.
If the selected item is a handling item such as the auto calibration, copy, or delete, the starting
screen or confirmation screen appears.
Items with a [>] indicated on the right side have more items in the next layer of the submenu.
Press the
or
button to show the next layer.
Similarly, select an item using the
Press the
/
and
buttons.
button to return to the previous screen.
54
(1) There are more items in the next layer.
(2) Return to the previous screen.
Setting Value Input or Selection
This topic describes the character and number input on the setting screen and how to select an item
from the list.
•
You can also input characters and numbers from a USB keyboard by connecting it to
the product.
•
Character Input
•
Numeric Input
•
Selection from the List
•
Selection from the Box
•
IP Address Input
55
Setting Value Input or Selection
•
Character Input
(1) Text box
(2) Selection area
(3) Delete the character displayed to the left of the cursor in the text box.
(4) Select the character for input using the arrow buttons. The selected character will be highlighted in
the selection area.
(5) Change the input mode.
(6) Save the character you enter in the text box and return to the item list.
(7) Cancel the character you enter in the text box and return to the item list.
(8) Enter the selected character into the text box.
•
Numeric Input
(1) Text box
56
(2) Selection area
(3) Delete the number displayed to the left of the cursor in the text box.
(4) Select the number for input using the arrow buttons. The selected number will be highlighted in the
selection area.
(5) Change the input mode.
(6) Save the number you enter in the text box and return to the item list.
(7) Cancel the number you enter in the text box and return to the item list.
(8) Enter the selected number into the text box.
•
Selection from the List
(1) Selection area
(2) Select an item using the
area.
/
buttons. The selected item will be highlighted in the selection
(3) Save the selection from the list and return to the item list.
(4) Cancel the selection from the list and return to the item list.
57
Setting Value Input or Selection
•
Selection from the Box
(1) Change the value in the selection box using the
/
buttons.
(2) Selection box
(3) Perform the function as shown on the screen above.
(4) Return to the previous screen.
(5) Select an item using the
area.
•
/
buttons. The selected item will be highlighted in the selection
IP Address Input
(1) Text box
(2) Select the digit for input using the
/
buttons.
(3) Save the IP address you enter in the text box and return to the item list.
58
(4) Cancel the IP address you enter in the text box and return to the item list.
(5) Select the number to input using the
/
buttons.
59
Product Memory and USB Memory
Product Memory and USB Memory
The memory of the user area of the product is a maximum of 679 MB.
However, you cannot use the whole memory of the user area, because this area is also used for the
log data and HEX dump functions.
USB memory can be connected to the product. There is no capacity limit for USB memory.
There are two USB connectors (Type A) at front and back of the product. USB memory can be
connected to either connector.
What you can do with this product while it is connected to USB memory is as follows:
•
Get the HEX dump data
•
Install certificates used for Wi-Fi authentication and for HTTPS
•
Get the barcode check log data
•
Create clone data (copy the product's settings information)
•
Get the support information
•
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
product. SATO Corporation cannot be held responsible for any product malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
•
The product does not support USB memory with security functions such as fingerprint
authentications.
•
The product does not support connection through the USB HUB.
60
Getting Started
Installation
Installation Precautions
Install the product in a location as follows:
•
A location that is horizontal and stable.
•
A location that has sufficient space for operating the product.
Do not install the product in a location as follows. Doing so could cause the product to malfunction.
•
A location that is subject to vibration.
•
A location with high temperature and humidity.
•
A dusty location.
•
A location exposed to direct sunlight.
61
Installation Precautions
•
A location with a lot of electrical noise.
•
A location with a large fluctuation in power.
•
A location with an explosive atmosphere (flammable gas or vapor).
62
Installation Space
Front View
Make sure that there is sufficient space around the product so that the top cover can be fully opened
when operating or cleaning the product, or replacing consumables.
The dimensions of the front view of the product are as follows:
CL4NX Plus
•
The image above is the standard model.
Side View
Make sure that there is sufficient space around the product so that the top cover can be fully opened
when operating or cleaning the product, or replacing consumables.
Make sure that there is sufficient space on the rear side of the product so that no stress is applied to
the power cord or cables connected to the product.
63
Bottom View
The dimensions of the side view of the product are as follows:
•
The arrow indicates the front of the product.
Bottom View
The bottom surface dimensions of the product are as follows:
CL4NX Plus
•
The arrow indicates the front of the product.
64
Powering On/Off the Product
Connecting the Power Cord
•
Do not power on or off the product, connect or disconnect the power cord while your
hands are wet. Doing so could cause an electric shock.
•
Always connect the ground wire to a ground terminal. Electric shock could occur if you
do not.
•
Make sure that the AC voltage of your region is in the range of AC 100 - 240 V, 50 60 Hz. If your local voltage is not in the stated range, contact your SATO reseller or
technical support center.
•
The attached power cord is designed exclusively for this product. Do not use it with
other devices.
1. Connect the power cord to the AC input terminal (1) at the rear of the product.
Take note of the orientation of the connector. Secure the product with one hand, and insert the
connector tightly.
2. Insert the power plug into an AC outlet.
* The shape of the power plug varies depending on the region in which it was purchased.
65
Connecting the Power Cord
•
This product is also designed for IT power distribution system with phase-to-phase
voltage 230 V.
66
Powering On the Product
•
Do not power on or off the product, connect or disconnect the power cord while your
hands are wet. Doing so could cause an electric shock.
•
You can power on/off the product from the main power source by enabling [Start on
AC] under the [System] menu.
1. Press the
power button of the operator panel until the LED lights up in blue to
power on the product.
"Online" appears on the screen.
67
Powering Off the Product
Powering Off the Product
•
Do not power on or off the product, connect or disconnect the power cord while your
hands are wet. Doing so could cause an electric shock.
•
Do not power off the product during operation, such as when printing or updating.
Doing so could cause a malfunction of the product.
•
Do not disconnect the power cord until the powering off process is completed on the
product.
•
An incorrect power on/off operation may damage the product settings. In such a case,
the product settings are reset to their default values. It is always recommended to use
the power button to allow proper shutdown of the product and ensure changes made to
menu settings are saved appropriately.
•
You can power on/off the product from the main power source by enabling [Start on
AC] under the [System] menu.
1. Make sure that the product is in Offline mode before you power off.
If "Online" appears on the screen, press the
button to change to Offline mode.
68
2. Press the
power button for more than two seconds to power off the product.
69
Initial Setup (Startup Guide)
Initial Setup (Startup Guide)
The topics here explain how to complete the startup guide that appears when you power on the
product for the first time after purchase.
70
Overview of the Startup Guide
When you power on the product for the first time after purchase, the display shows the startup guide.
The startup guide is a function to help you through the initial product settings, such as setting date and
time, and loading the ribbon and media.
You can cancel the startup guide and perform the configuration later from the menu.
•
If you have installed the optional RTC (Real Time Clock) kit, the time zone, date and
time setting screens appear.
The startup guide lets you configure the product by the following flow:
1. Startup Screen
2. Language Selection
Select the display language.
3. Region Setting with Optional RTC Kit
Set the region (time zone).
71
Overview of the Startup Guide
4. City Setting with Optional RTC Kit
Set the city (time zone).
5. Date Setting with Optional RTC Kit
Set the date.
6. Time Setting with Optional RTC Kit
Set the time.
7. Print Method Setting
Set whether to use the ribbon or direct thermal media to print.
72
8. Ribbon Setting
Load the ribbon.
Appears if you have selected [Use Ribbon] in the print method setting.
9. Media Sensor Type Setting
Set the sensor type for detecting the media.
10. Media Setting
Load the media.
11. Completion of Initial Setup Screen
Finish the startup guide.
Startup Guide Cancelation
To cancel the startup guide in the middle of the configuration, press the
73
button.
Overview of the Startup Guide
Select whether or not to show the startup guide during the next startup, and press the
button to confirm.
74
Startup Screen
When you power on the product for the first time after purchase, the display shows the startup guide.
1. Press the
power button of the operator panel until the LED lights blue to power
on the product.
The startup screen appears.
75
Language Selection
Language Selection
Select the display language.
1. Select the language name using the
2. Press the
button or
/
buttons.
button to confirm.
76
Region Setting with Optional RTC Kit
Set the region (time zone).
1. Select the region using the
2. Press the
button or
/
buttons.
button to confirm.
77
City Setting with Optional RTC Kit
City Setting with Optional RTC Kit
Set the city (time zone).
1. Select the city using the
2. Press the
button or
/
buttons.
button to confirm.
78
Date Setting with Optional RTC Kit
Set the date.
1. Select the current value using the
/
/
buttons, and move the cursor using the
buttons.
2. When you have completed the date setting, press the
button.
The confirmation screen appears.
3. Press the
button to confirm.
79
button or
Time Setting with Optional RTC Kit
Time Setting with Optional RTC Kit
Set the time.
1. Select the current value using the
/
/
buttons, and move the cursor using the
buttons.
2. When you have completed the time setting, press the
button.
•
The time is set in 24-hour format.
The confirmation screen appears.
3. Press the
button to confirm.
80
button or
Print Method Setting
Set whether to use the ribbon or direct thermal media to print.
1. Select the print method using the
/
buttons.
[Use Ribbon]
Print using a ribbon.
[Direct Thermal]
Print using direct thermal media.
2. Press the
button or
button to confirm.
If you have selected [Use Ribbon], the ribbon setting screen appears.
If you have selected [Direct Thermal], the media sensor type setting screen appears.
81
Ribbon Setting
Ribbon Setting
Load the ribbon. You can check the loading method of the ribbon through the video.
•
Appears if you have selected [Use Ribbon] in the print method setting.
1. Press the
button to play the video.
The video starts.
2. Load the ribbon while checking the video.
3. After you complete the ribbon setting, press the
The display returns to the previous screen.
4. Press the
button to go to the next screen.
82
button to stop the video.
Media Sensor Type Setting
Set the sensor type for detecting the media.
1. Select the media sensor type using the
/
buttons.
[None]
Disable the media sensor.
[Gap]
Select this option when using gap type media. Use the transmissive type sensor.
[I-Mark]
Select this option when using I-mark type media. Use the reflective type sensor.
•
The available options will vary depending on the [Print Mode] set on the product. The
initial value of [Print Mode] differs depending on the options installed on the product.
◦
If [Print Mode] is set to [Tear-Off], [Dispenser], or [Cut & Print], only [Gap] and [I-Mark]
will be available.
◦
If [Print Mode] is set to [Linerless], only [None] and [I-Mark] will be available.
2. Press the
button or
button to confirm.
83
Media Setting
Media Setting
Load the media. You can check the loading method of the media through the video.
1. Press the
button.
For the models other than the CL4NX Plus linerless model, the selection screen of the video for
playback appears. Proceed to step 2.
For the CL4NX Plus linerless model, the video appears immediately after the
pressed. Proceed to step 4.
2. Select the video to playback using the
/
For Standard Model and Cutter Model
[Roll]
Shows the video on how to load the media roll.
[Fanfold]
Shows the video on how to load the fan-fold media.
84
buttons.
button is
For Dispenser Model
[Dispenser]
Shows the video on how to eject the liner out of the product.
[Rewinder]
Shows the video on how to rewind the liner in the product.
3. Press the
button or
button.
The video starts.
4. Load the media while checking the video.
5. After you complete the media setting, press the
The display returns to the previous screen.
6. Press the
button to go to the next screen.
85
button to stop the video.
Completion of Initial Setup Screen
Completion of Initial Setup Screen
When the startup guide completes, the completion of initial setup screen appears.
1. If you want the startup guide to show the next time you start up, press the
button. If not, press the
button.
When you press one of the soft buttons, the product automatically feeds the media (to the print
head position) and changes to Online mode.
•
You can enable or disable the startup guide in [Startup Guide] under the [Tools] menu.
86
Startup Guide Cancelation
You can cancel the startup guide at any time.
1. Press the
button while configuring the startup guide.
The screen to confirm whether or not to show the startup guide again appears.
2. Select whether or not to show the startup guide during the next startup using the
/
buttons, and press the
button to confirm.
Press the
button to return to the startup guide setting without canceling it.
•
You can enable or disable the startup guide in [Startup Guide] under the [Tools] menu.
•
Even if you cancel the startup guide before completing it, the product will save the
settings you have changed.
87
Configuring the Product According to Media and Options
Configuring the Product According to Media and Options
Before starting to print with the product, configure the product according to the media to be used and
the installed options.
88
Print Method
The product supports two types of print methods, thermal transfer and direct thermal.
Thermal transfer
Prints using a ribbon.
Direct thermal
Prints using direct thermal media.
•
Ribbon is not necessary if you are using direct thermal media.
Change the print method according to the following procedure:
1. Press the
button in Online mode.
The product changes to Offline mode.
89
Print Method
2. Press the
button.
The product changes to Settings mode.
3. Select [Printing] using the
4. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The item list appears.
90
5. Select [Printing Mode] using the
6. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The [Printing Mode] screen appears.
7. Select the print method using the
/
buttons.
[Use Ribbon]
Prints using a ribbon.
[Direct Thermal]
Prints using direct thermal media.
8. Press the
button to confirm.
91
Media Sensor Type
Media Sensor Type
The product adjusts the print position precisely by detecting I-marks or gaps on the media (label) using
media sensors.
The I-marks or gaps on each type of media are as follows:
I-mark label
Gap label
I-mark journal paper/
linerless label
(1) Media feed direction
Set the sensor type to detect the print position according to the media to be used.
Set the sensor type according to the following procedure:
1. Press the
button in Online mode.
The product changes to Offline mode.
92
2. Press the
button.
The product changes to Settings mode.
3. Select [Printing] using the
4. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The item list appears.
93
Media Sensor Type
5. Select [Sensor Type] using the
6. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The [Sensor Type] screen appears.
7. Select the sensor type to detect the print position using the
/
buttons.
[None]
Disables the media sensor.
[Gap]
Select when using gap type media. Use the transmissive type sensor.
[I-Mark]
Select when using I-mark type media. Use the reflective type sensor.
•
If you have selected [Tear-Off], [Dispenser], or [Cut & Print] in the [Print Mode] menu,
only [Gap] and [I-Mark] will be available.
•
If you have selected [Linerless] in the [Print Mode] menu, only [None] and [I-Mark] will
be available.
94
8. Press the
button to confirm.
95
Print Mode
Print Mode
You can change the print mode of the product according to its usage and installed options.
The product has the following print modes:
[Continuous]
Prints the specified number of media. The media remains in position for printing at all times.
[Tear-Off] (Feeding media to the position for manual cutting)
After printing the specified number of media, the product feeds the last printed media so that it
is fully extended out of the product’s front for removal. After printing, tear off the media manually.
The media will be back to the print head position to start the next printing.
[Cutter]
Cuts each media while printing the specified number of media. You can specify this option if you
have installed the cutter unit.
[Cut & Print]
Allows you to continuously print and cut at the specified media repeat. If no print data is received
within the period specified for [Eject Cut], the product will feed the media to the cut position and
cut the last printed media. You can specify this option if you have installed the cutter unit.
[Dispenser]
Peels the liner from the printed label as the label is fed to the product’s front. Once the printed
label has been removed from the product for application, the next label will retract and position
itself for printing. You can specify this option if you have installed the dispenser unit.
[Linerless]
Cuts each label while printing the specified number of labels. You can specify this option if you
have installed the linerless cutter kit.
•
You cannot set the [Print Mode] if [Auto-mode] is [Enabled].
Change the print mode according to the following procedure:
96
1. Press the
button in Online mode.
The product changes to Offline mode.
2. Press the
button.
The product changes to Settings mode.
3. Select [Printing] using the
/
buttons.
97
Print Mode
4. Press the
button.
The item list appears.
5. Select [Print Mode] using the
6. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The [Print Mode] screen appears.
98
7. Select the print mode using the
/
buttons.
•
If no option is installed, [Continuous] and [Tear-Off] are available.
•
If the optional cutter unit is installed, [Continuous], [Tear-Off], [Cutter], and [Cut & Print]
are available.
•
If the optional dispenser unit is installed, [Continuous], [Tear-Off], and [Dispenser] are
available.
•
If the optional linerless cutter kit is installed, only [Linerless] is available.
8. Press the
button to confirm.
99
Connecting the Product to a Computer
Connecting the Product to a Computer
This section explains how to connect the product to a computer, and how to install the printer driver
and the All-In-One Tool.
100
Procedure for Connecting the Product to a Computer
The product supports various interfaces and can be connected to a computer in an optimum way for
your environment. When you have installed the printer driver to the computer, the data created with
the computer (documents and illustrations) can be printed to a label through easy operations.
Also, you can print by sending a command directly to the product.
The product can be connected to a computer in the following ways.
1. Connecting Interfaces
2. Configuring the Interface Settings
Set the product's interface from the [Interface] menu on the Settings menu, which can be
accessed from the product's display or the web configuration page. It can also be accessed from
the All-In-One Tool, which can be used by installing it to a computer.
◦
When you connect them with LAN or wireless LAN interfaces, configure the communication
conditions, such as the IP address of the product.
◦
When you connect them with other interfaces, configure the communication conditions when
needed to adapt to the computer to which you are connecting.
◦
To use the printer driver, the communication protocol must be set to Status4. (The initial value for
the communication protocol for the product's interfaces is Status4.)
3. Installing the Printer Driver (Unnecessary when using commands)
•
Use barcode fonts to create a barcode. Sometimes the barcode may not be read by a
scanner if it is created with tools for creating images (such as BMP) and printed from
this product. Because the tools create the barcode as an image only, the barcode may
not be the correct data. Therefore, if the barcode cannot be read by a scanner, it is
not a failure of the product or printer driver. Note that reading of the barcode is not
guaranteed if it is created by such tools.
•
The head check is just for a reference to check a broken element of the print head, and
it is not a function to guarantee barcode readability. A regular barcode reader test is
required.
101
Available Interfaces
Connecting Interfaces
Available Interfaces
The product supports the following interfaces.
•
A product connected with multiple interface cables can continue to operate when
receiving data. However, you cannot receive data from more than one interface at a
time. Normally, do not use multiple interfaces at a time.
•
The product prints the received data in order of reception. The next received data is
stored in the receive buffer while the first data is printed.
(1) NFC
(2) Wireless LAN
(3) RS-232C
(4) IEEE1284
(5) External signal (EXT)
(6) USB
(7) LAN
•
Bluetooth
•
The wireless LAN interface is optional.
•
The NFC interface supports the handover function that simplifies the Bluetooth/Wi-Fi
connection setup with Android devices. In addition, the NFC interface can be used for
changing product settings with an Android device while the product is powered off and
the power cord is not connected.
102
•
Do not connect or disconnect the interface cables (or use a switch box) while power
is supplied to either the product or computer. This may cause damage to the interface
circuitry in the product or computer and is not covered by warranty.
USB Interface Connection (Standard)
Connect the interface cable when the product is powered off.
Connect the USB cable to the USB connector (Type B) (1) of the product.
The USB interface is selected after connecting the USB cable to the computer and the product, and
powering on the product while the computer is turned on.
•
If the product is powered on without installing the printer driver, Windows' Plug & Play
runs. When using the printer driver, do not power on the product while the USB cable is
connected until instructed in the procedure for installing the printer driver.
•
The recommended USB cable is the one within 2 meters (6.6 feet) length.
LAN Interface Connection (Standard)
Connect the interface cable when the product is powered off.
Connect the LAN cable to the LAN connector (1) of the product.
103
NFC Interface Connection (Standard)
The communication condition settings must be configured according to your network environment. Set
the IP address of the product.
The IP address of the product can be set through the product's [Interface] menu or the All-In-One Tool.
•
To use the printer driver, the communication protocol must be set to Status4. (The
initial value for the communication protocol for the product's LAN interface is Status4
ENQ.)
Bluetooth Interface Connection (Standard)
The product can perform wireless communication with Bluetooth-compatible computers placed within
about 10 meters (32.8 feet) from it.
Make sure that the Bluetooth function of the product and the computer is enabled, and then add the
product as a Bluetooth device on the computer.
The product's Bluetooth function is enabled by default and can be configured from the [Interface] menu
or the All-In-One Tool.
•
To use the printer driver, the communication protocol must be set to Status4. (The
initial value for the communication protocol for the product's Bluetooth interface is
Status4 Multi.)
NFC Interface Connection (Standard)
The NFC interface of the product supports a handover function that simplifies the Bluetooth/Wi-Fi
connection setup with Android devices.
The handover function only performs the connection setup, such as the pairing and authentication with
NFC, and passes the actual interface to the more advanced Bluetooth and Wi-Fi when communicating
between NFC supported devices. In general, the pairing and authentication require some procedures
to enter authentication information, but the connection can be completed simply by holding the Android
devices over the product while using NFC.
Touch the NFC antenna (1) of the product with the NFC mark on the Android device.
104
•
If it does not communicate well, shift the Android device to the front, back, left and
right, and then hold it up again.
•
For the operation of the NFC for the Android device, refer to the user manual for the
Android device.
RS-232C Interface Connection (Standard)
Connect the interface cable when the product is powered off.
Connect the RS-232C cable to the RS-232C connector (1) of the product.
Configure the interface settings of the product according to the interface settings of the computer.
The communication conditions of the RS-232C interface can be set from the product's [Interface]
menu or the All-In-One Tool.
105
IEEE1284 Interface Connection (Standard)
•
To use the RS-232C interface to connect with the computer, the product's [Tools] >
[Barcode Checker] > [Test] > [Interface] menu must be set to [RS-232C].
•
The interface settings of the computer can be confirmed by the following. In the Device
Manager, right-click [Ports] > [Communications Port (COM1)] and select [Properties].
Then, check the [Port Settings] tab of the displayed Properties screen.
•
For the RS-232C cable, note that the connection cable varies according to the
communication protocol setting. If you use the wrong cable, it will not operate correctly.
•
If the communication settings differ between the computer and product, it will not
operate correctly. A communication error will be detected.
•
To use the printer driver, the communication protocol must be set to Status4. (The
initial value for the communication protocol for the product's RS-232C interface is
STATUS4.)
•
Be sure to use the recommended RS-232C cable.
•
Printing using the USB serial conversion cable is not guaranteed. Also, no support for
the connection procedure is provided.
IEEE1284 Interface Connection (Standard)
Connect the interface cable when the product is powered off.
Connect the IEEE1284-compliant cable to the IEEE1284 connector (1) of the product.
106
•
If the product is powered on without installing the printer driver, Windows' Plug & Play
runs. When you use the printer driver, do not power on the product while the cable is
connected, until instructed in the procedure for installing the printer driver.
•
Be sure to use the recommended IEEE1284-compliant cable. If you use cables other
than the IEEE1284-compliant cable, your data may become corrupt.
•
IEEE1284-compliant: compatible mode, ECP mode, and nibble mode are supported.
•
Some computers may not support ECP mode.
•
ECP mode is configured in the BIOS settings of the computer. Some computers may
use the software tools for Windows.
•
Some computer models may not perform ECP operations even if they are set to ECP
mode. Contact the computer manufacturer.
•
Printing using the USB parallel conversion cable is not guaranteed. Also, no support for
the connection procedure is provided.
Wireless LAN Interface Connection (Optional)
Check if the wireless LAN antenna (1) is attached to the product.
107
Wireless LAN Interface Connection (Optional)
The printer driver performs data communication using the dedicated SOCKET interfaces.
The communication condition settings must be configured according to your network environment. Set
the IP address of the product.
The IP address of the product can be set through the product's [Interface] menu or the All-In-One Tool.
•
To use the printer driver, the communication protocol must be set to Status4. (The
initial value for the communication protocol for the product's wireless LAN interface is
Status4 ENQ.)
•
The product does not support Atheros, SuperG, or XR functions.
108
Configuring the Interface Settings
Interface Setting Methods
Configure the interface settings of the product according to the communication conditions of the
connected network and computer.
You can set the interface settings of the product doing either of the following.
•
Set from the [Interface] menu of the product
•
Set using the All-In-One Tool from the computer
Configuring the Interface Settings from the Interface Menu of the Product
Configure the settings related to the interfaces from the [Interface] menu in the Settings mode of the
product.
1. Press the
button in Online mode.
The product changes to Offline mode.
109
Configuring the Interface Settings from the Interface Menu of the Product
2. Press the
button.
The product changes to Settings mode.
3. Select [Interface] using the
4. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The item list appears.
110
5. Select the interface using the
/
buttons.
[Network]
Sets the LAN connection and wireless LAN connection.
[IEEE1284]
Sets the IEEE1284 connection.
Appears only if the combo interface board is installed.
[RS-232C]
Sets the RS-232C connection.
Appears only if the combo interface board is installed.
[USB]
Sets the USB connection.
[Bluetooth]
Sets the Bluetooth connection.
[NFC]
Sets the NFC connection.
[Ignore CR/LF]
Sets to ignore CR/LF codes.
[Ignore CAN/DLE]
Sets to ignore CAN/DLE codes.
[External I/O]
Sets the external signal (EXT).
Appears only if the combo interface board is installed.
6. Press the
button.
The settings items of the selected interface appear.
111
Configuring the Interface Settings Using the All-In-One Tool
Change the settings according to the communication conditions of the connected network and
computer.
Configuring the Interface Settings Using the All-In-One Tool
Installing the All-In-One Tool
When you use the All-In-One Tool, you can easily set and manage the product.
Download the All-In-One Tool and All-In-One Tool Manual from the SATO All-In-One Tool download
site http://www.satoworldwide.com/software/all-in-one-tool.aspx, and install the software to a
computer. For the compatible OS, refer to the "System Requirements" section of the All-In-One Tool
Manual.
112
Installing the Printer Driver
Basic Information about the Printer Driver
The printer driver is software that can send data created on the computer (documents and illustrations)
to the product and print it to a label.
For information about the printer driver, refer to "CL4NX Plus Printer Driver Manual".
Installing the Printer Driver (USB)
When the computer is connected to the Internet, the printer driver is automatically installed after
connecting the USB cable between the computer and the product and powering on the product.
Do the following procedures to install the printer driver when the computer is not connected to the
Internet. The following procedures use Windows 10 as an example.
•
Before starting the installation, close all applications.
•
Power off the product and connect the interface cable to a computer.
•
When you do the printer driver setup, the properties settings, or the print settings, log in
with Administrator Privilege.
•
When you use the printer driver, enable bi-directional communication.
•
If the terminal service is being started with Windows Server 2008, change the terminal
service to the install mode. However, it is not guaranteed that the printer driver can be
used in the terminal service environment.
•
When using multiple products, it is necessary to install as many printer drivers as
products, to identify each product.
•
After installing the printer driver for the first product, the printer driver for the second
and additional products will be automatically installed when the products are connected
to the computer and powered on. However, the name of the printer drivers will be
"driver name (1)", "driver name (2)", and so on. To change the driver name, right-click
the product in [Devices and Printers], select [Printer properties], and change the name
at the top of the [General] tab.
1. Power off the product and connect the USB cable to a computer.
2. Start Windows.
3. Download the printer driver from the SATO printer driver download site. http://
www.satoworldwide.com/software/gallerydriver.aspx
4. Extract the downloaded compressed file of the printer driver.
5. Execute PrnInst.exe to start the installer.
6. If a user account control message appears, click [Yes] or [Continue].
113
Installing the Printer Driver (USB)
7. Click [Next].
8. Click [Install Printer Driver].
114
9. Click [USB Port].
10. Follow the instructions on the screen to power on the product.
Windows' Plug & Play runs, and the [Printer Options] screen appears.
115
Installing the Printer Driver (USB)
11. Click [Install].
12. When the security warning screen appears, click [Install].
The printer driver is installed.
•
The warning screen above may not appear, depending on the version of the printer
driver or your computer environment.
•
If a security warning screen indicating that another process is blocking access
appears, follow the steps on the screen, and click [Next].
116
13. Click [Exit] to complete the installation.
14. In [Devices and Printers], confirm that the product is added to [Printers].
•
The settings of the printer driver should be performed by the Administrator Privilege.
Installing the Printer Driver (LAN/Wireless LAN)
Do the following procedures to install the printer driver using a LAN/Wireless LAN. The following
procedures use Windows 10 as an example.
117
Installing the Printer Driver (LAN/Wireless LAN)
•
Before starting the installation, close all applications.
•
Power off the product and connect the interface cable to a computer.
•
When you do the printer driver setup, the properties settings, or the print settings, log in
with Administrator Privilege.
•
When you use the printer driver, enable bi-directional communication.
•
If the terminal service is being started with Windows Server 2008, change the terminal
service to the install mode. However, it is not guaranteed that the printer driver can be
used in the terminal service environment.
•
When using multiple products, it is necessary to install as many printer drivers as
products, to identify each product.
1. Power on the product, and confirm that the product is connected to the network.
2. Start Windows.
3. Download the printer driver from the SATO printer driver download site. http://
www.satoworldwide.com/software/gallerydriver.aspx
4. Extract the downloaded compressed file of the printer driver.
5. Execute PrnInst.exe to start the installer.
6. If a user account control message appears, click [Yes] or [Continue].
7. Click [Next].
118
8. Click [Install Printer Driver].
9. Click [Network Port].
A list of the printers found on the network appears.
119
Installing the Printer Driver (LAN/Wireless LAN)
10. Select the printer to add and click [Add].
If the product is not shown on the list, click [Refresh]. If the product is still not shown on the list, add
the product using the following procedures.
a. Click [Manual].
120
b. Select the model of the product and click [Next].
•
Select the model which is compatible with the resolution of the product. The resolution
of the product is displayed on the upper left of the Online/Offline screen.
121
Installing the Printer Driver (LAN/Wireless LAN)
c.
Select the network port, and click [Next].
If you have selected [Create a new network port], proceed to step d.
If you have selected [Use an existing port] and then selected a port from the list, proceed to
step 11.
d. Enter the printer name or IP address, and click [Next].
122
11. Click [Install].
12. When the security warning screen appears, click [Install].
The printer driver is installed.
•
The warning screen above may not appear, depending on the version of the printer
driver or your computer environment.
•
If a security warning screen indicating that another process is blocking access
appears, follow the steps on the screen, and click [Next].
123
Installing the Printer Driver (Bluetooth)
13. Click [Exit] to complete the installation.
14. Open [Devices and Printers] and confirm that the printer driver is installed.
•
The settings of the printer driver should be performed by the Administrator Privilege.
Installing the Printer Driver (Bluetooth)
To use the printer driver with the Bluetooth interface connection, add the product to the computer as a
Bluetooth device, and then install the printer driver. During the installation, it is necessary to match the
port setting of the added Bluetooth device and the printer driver.
124
The procedure for adding (pairing) the Bluetooth device varies depending on the environment of your
computer. The following procedure is an example of Windows 10. For details, refer to the user manual
of your computer.
•
Before starting the installation, close all applications.
•
When you do the printer driver setup, the properties settings, or the print settings, log in
with Administrator Privilege.
•
When you use the printer driver, enable bi-directional communication.
•
If the terminal service is being started with Windows Server 2008, change the terminal
service to the install mode. However, it is not guaranteed that the printer driver can be
used in the terminal service environment.
•
When using multiple products, it is necessary to install as many printer drivers as
products, to identify each product.
1. Start Windows.
2. Power on the product.
3. Confirm that Bluetooth is enabled (initial value) in the [Interface] menu of the
product.
4. Right-click the Bluetooth icon at the lower-right corner of the Windows desktop
screen, and select [Add a Bluetooth Device].
125
Installing the Printer Driver (Bluetooth)
5. Select the product from the search device list and click [Pair].
•
The initial value of the device name for the product is "SATO PRINTER_xxxxxxxxxxxx
(BD address)". You can check and change it on the [Bluetooth] > [Name] on the
[Interface] menu of the product.
6. Enter the passcode for the product and click [Next].
•
The default passcode of the product is "0000". You can check and change it on the
[Bluetooth] > [PIN Code] on the [Interface] menu of the product.
126
The product is added as a Bluetooth device.
7. Open [Devices and Printers], right-click the product added as a Bluetooth device,
and select [Properties].
127
Installing the Printer Driver (Bluetooth)
8. Confirm the port assigned as the [Serial port (SPP)] in the [Services] tab, and click
[OK].
Note down this information as it will be necessary for the printer driver installation.
9. Download the printer driver from the SATO printer driver download site. http://
www.satoworldwide.com/software/gallerydriver.aspx
10. Extract the downloaded compressed file of the printer driver.
11. Execute PrnInst.exe to start the installer.
12. If a user account control message appears, click [Yes] or [Continue].
128
13. Click [Next].
14. Click [Install Printer Driver].
129
Installing the Printer Driver (Bluetooth)
15. Click [Other].
16. Select the model of the product and click [Next].
130
•
Select the model which is compatible with the resolution of the product. The resolution
of the product is displayed on the upper left of the Online/Offline screen.
17. Click [Add] and add a port manually.
18. Select [SERIAL (COM)] from the [Select port type] drop down list and click [OK].
131
Installing the Printer Driver (Bluetooth)
19. Configure the port setting.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Enter the port name.
In [Serial port], select the port of the Bluetooth device checked in step 8.
In [Flow control], select [None].
Click [OK].
20. Click [Next].
132
21. Click [Install].
22. When the security warning screen appears, click [Install].
The printer driver is installed.
•
The warning screen above may not appear, depending on the version of the printer
driver or your computer environment.
•
If a security warning screen indicating that another process is blocking access
appears, follow the steps on the screen, and click [Next].
133
Installing the Printer Driver (Bluetooth)
23. Click [Exit] to complete the installation.
24. Open [Devices and Printers] and confirm that the printer driver is installed.
The printer driver can be used with the Bluetooth interface connection.
When printing, use the product added when the printer driver was installed, not the product added as
the Bluetooth device.
•
The settings of the printer driver should be performed by the Administrator Privilege.
134
Installing the Printer Driver (RS-232C)
Do the following procedures to install the printer driver using RS-232C interfaces. The following
procedures use Windows 10 as an example.
•
Before starting the installation, close all applications.
•
Power off the product and connect the interface cable to a computer.
•
When you do the printer driver setup, the properties settings, or the print settings, log in
with Administrator Privilege.
•
When you use the printer driver, enable bi-directional communication.
•
If the terminal service is being started with Windows Server 2008, change the terminal
service to the install mode. However, it is not guaranteed that the printer driver can be
used in the terminal service environment.
•
When using multiple products, it is necessary to install as many printer drivers as
products, to identify each product.
•
The interface settings of the connection port (COM) for the product and computer
should match. You can check the interface settings in the [Interface] menu of the
product. The interface settings of the computer can be confirmed by the following. In
the Device Manager, right-click [Ports] > [Communications Port (COM1)] and select
[Properties]. Then, check the [Port Settings] tab of the displayed Properties screen.
•
To use the RS-232C interface to connect with the computer, the product's [Tools] >
[Barcode Checker] > [Test] > [Interface] menu must be set to [RS-232C].
1. Connect the product and computer with the RS-232C cable, and power on the
product.
2. Start Windows.
3. Download the printer driver from the SATO printer driver download site. http://
www.satoworldwide.com/software/gallerydriver.aspx
4. Extract the downloaded compressed file of the printer driver.
5. Execute PrnInst.exe to start the installer.
6. If a user account control message appears, click [Yes] or [Continue].
135
Installing the Printer Driver (RS-232C)
7. Click [Next].
8. Click [Install Printer Driver].
136
9. Click [Local Port].
10. Select the model of the product and click [Next].
137
Installing the Printer Driver (RS-232C)
•
Select the model which is compatible with the resolution of the product. The resolution
of the product is displayed on the upper left of the Online/Offline screen.
11. Select a serial (COM) port and click [Next].
138
12. Click [Install].
13. When the security warning screen appears, click [Install].
The printer driver is installed.
•
The warning screen above may not appear, depending on the version of the printer
driver or your computer environment.
•
If a security warning screen indicating that another process is blocking access
appears, follow the steps on the screen, and click [Next].
139
Installing the Printer Driver (IEEE1284)
14. Click [Exit] to complete the installation.
15. Open [Devices and Printers] and confirm that the printer driver is installed.
•
The settings of the printer driver should be performed by the Administrator Privilege.
Installing the Printer Driver (IEEE1284)
When the computer is connected to the Internet, the printer driver is automatically installed after
connecting the IEEE1284 compliant cable between the computer and the product and powering on the
product.
140
Do the following procedures to install the printer driver when the computer is not connected to the
Internet. The following procedures use Windows 10 as an example.
•
Before starting the installation, close all applications.
•
Power off the product and connect the interface cable to a computer.
•
When you do the printer driver setup, the properties settings, or the print settings, log in
with Administrator Privilege.
•
When you use the printer driver, enable bi-directional communication.
•
If the terminal service is being started with Windows Server 2008, change the terminal
service to the install mode. However, it is not guaranteed that the printer driver can be
used in the terminal service environment.
•
When using multiple products, it is necessary to install as many printer drivers as
products, to identify each product.
•
After installing the printer driver for the first product, the printer driver for the second
and additional products will be automatically installed when the products are connected
to the computer and powered on. However, the name of the printer drivers will be
"driver name (1)", "driver name (2)", and so on. To change the driver name, right-click
the product in [Devices and Printers], select [Printer properties], and change the name
at the top of the [General] tab.
1. Power off the product and connect the IEEE1284 compliant cable to a computer.
2. Start Windows.
3. Download the printer driver from the SATO printer driver download site. http://
www.satoworldwide.com/software/gallerydriver.aspx
4. Extract the downloaded compressed file of the printer driver.
5. Execute PrnInst.exe to start the installer.
6. If a user account control message appears, click [Yes] or [Continue].
141
Installing the Printer Driver (IEEE1284)
7. Click [Next].
8. Click [Install Printer Driver].
142
9. Click [Local Port].
10. Select the model of the product and click [Next].
143
Installing the Printer Driver (IEEE1284)
•
Select the model which is compatible with the resolution of the product. The resolution
of the product is displayed on the upper left of the Online/Offline screen.
11. Select a printer port (LPT) and click [Next].
144
12. Click [Install].
13. When the security warning screen appears, click [Install].
The printer driver is installed.
•
The warning screen above may not appear, depending on the version of the printer
driver or your computer environment.
•
If a security warning screen indicating that another process is blocking access
appears, follow the steps on the screen, and click [Next].
145
Installing the Printer Driver (IEEE1284)
14. Click [Exit] to complete the installation.
15. Power on the product.
Windows' Plug & Play runs.
16. Open [Devices and Printers] and confirm that the printer driver is installed.
•
The settings of the printer driver should be performed by the Administrator Privilege.
146
Uninstalling the Printer Driver
The printer driver is uninstalled using the installer with the following procedures. The following
procedures use Windows 10 as an example.
Do not remove the device from [Devices and Printers].
•
Before starting the uninstallation, close all applications.
•
When you do the printer driver setup, the properties settings, or the print settings, log in
with Administrator Privilege.
1. Power off the product.
2. Start Windows.
3. Download the printer driver from the SATO printer driver download site. http://
www.satoworldwide.com/software/gallerydriver.aspx
4. Extract the downloaded compressed file of the printer driver.
5. Execute PrnInst.exe to start the installer.
6. If a user account control message appears, click [Yes] or [Continue].
7. Click [Next].
147
Uninstalling the Printer Driver
8. Click [Uninstall Printer Drivers].
9. Check the check box of the printer you want to uninstall and click [Next].
You can select multiple printers.
The printer driver is uninstalled.
•
When the multiple printers are shown, as long as you do not remove all of the printers,
the files related to the installed printer drivers are not removed. In that case, only the
printer name is removed.
•
If a security warning screen indicating that another process is blocking access
appears, follow the steps on the screen, and click [Next].
148
10. Click [Exit].
149
Configuring the Printer Driver Settings as an Administrator
Printer Driver Features
The topics here explain how to open the printer driver setting screens and provide an overview of the
printer driver features.
Configuring the Printer Driver Settings as an Administrator
Configuring the Printer Driver Settings as an Administrator (Windows 7 or Later)
When printing a layout created by an application software, configure the printer driver settings first.
The settings of the printer driver should be done by the administrator. If you change a setting value
or add a printer port through someone other than the administrator, an error screen appears and the
processes you operated are not reflected.
In Windows 7 or later, open the properties screen of the printer driver as an administrator with the
following procedures. The following procedures use Windows 10 as an example.
1. Open the [Devices and Printers] folder.
2. Right-click the icon of the printer you use and select [Printer properties].
150
3. Open the [Sharing] tab.
151
Configuring the Printer Driver Settings as an Administrator
4. Click [Change Sharing Options].
152
If [Change Sharing Options] is not shown, do the following procedures.
a. Open the [Control Panel] and select [Network and Sharing Center].
153
Configuring the Printer Driver Settings as an Administrator
b. Select [Change advanced sharing settings].
c.
In [File and printer sharing], select [Turn off file and printer sharing] and click the [Save changes]
button.
Configuring the Printer Driver Settings as an Administrator (Windows Server 2008)
When printing a layout created by an application software, configure the printer driver settings first.
154
The settings of the printer driver should be done by the administrator. If you change a setting value
or add a printer port through someone other than the administrator, an error screen appears and the
processes you operated are not reflected.
In Windows Server 2008, open the properties screen of the printer driver as an administrator with the
following procedures.
1. Open the [Printers] folder.
2. Right-click the icon of the printer you use and select [Run as administrator], and
then [Properties].
Configuring the Driver Settings
In the printer driver [Properties] > [Driver settings] tab, various settings can be configured, such as
adding media size and fonts and importing/exporting the driver settings.
155
Configuring the Driver Settings
•
The settings of the printer driver should be done by an administrator.
(1) [Stocks]
Manages stored media. The stored media can be used from applications.
(2) [Fonts]
Defines and manages barcode fonts and command fonts. You can add, modify, and delete
definitions. Also, you can print by replacing the system fonts with the product’s device fonts when
defining replacement fonts.
(3) [Driver Settings]
Sets whether to enable the driver settings or application settings.
(4) [Configure Printer]
Obtains and changes the settings of the connected product.
(5) [RFID Settings]
Manages the RFID tag and its settings.
(6) [Maintenance]
Outputs the current driver settings to a file and reads the settings.
(7) [International]
Sets the display language of the printer driver.
•
Be sure to manage the master data for fonts by customer. SATO do not take
responsibility for data stored on the product.
156
Configuring the Printer Settings
[Printing Defaults] and [Printing Preferences]
These functions can configure the media settings and printing modes of the product from the printer
driver and send them to the product.
Use [Printing Defaults] or [Printing Preferences] from the properties screen of the product's printer
driver.
When configuring the printer driver for all users, use [Printing Defaults].
When configuring the printer driver for each user, use [Printing Preferences].
•
The settings of the printer driver should be done by an administrator.
How to Show the [Printing Defaults] Settings Screen
When you open the printer driver [Properties], select the [Advanced] tab and click [Printing Defaults],
the [Printing Defaults] settings screen is opened. The printer driver settings for all users can be
selected.
How to Show the [Printing Preferences] Settings Screen
When you open the printer driver [Properties], select the [General] tab and click [Preferences], the
[Printing Preferences] settings screen is opened. The user specific printer driver settings can be
selected.
157
Configuring the Printer Settings
•
When you right-click the product in [Devices and Printers] and select [Printing
preferences], the same screen as the settings screen for the [Printing Preferences]
appears.
Overview of the Printer Settings
The product settings can be configured from the printer settings screen of [Printing Defaults] or
[Printing Preferences].
•
The settings of the printer driver should be done by an administrator.
(1) [Page Setup]
Sets the size and sensor type of the media set to the product.
(2) [Print Options]
Adjusts the settings of the print speed, print darkness, and base reference point.
(3) [Print Mode]
Sets the print mode of the product.
(4) [Barcode Verifier]
Specifies the baecode verifier that scans the barcodes immediately after printing and checks the
accuracy of printed 1D and 2D barcode symbologies.
(5) [Graphic Options]
Specifies dithering and the graphic form when sending to the product.
It is not necessary to change it in particular, and it is available with initial values.
(6) [Custom Commands]
Specifies the method to control the product behavior directly.
It is best to use this method only if user understands the SBPL command or the programming
references.
158
(7) [Maintenance]
Returns the printer driver settings to their initial values.
(8) [International]
Selects the unit to be used.
(9) [About]
Shows the version of the printer driver and provides access to the SATO homepage.
Outputting a Label from an Application Software
The method for starting a print job varies depending on application software. In general, print jobs
begin when you click [Print] button in the dialog that is displayed after selecting [Print] from the [File]
menu. Refer to the user manual of the application software you are using.
159
Outputting a Label from an Application Software
Before starting the print job, confirm that the printer driver to be used in the application software is set
to the appropriate printer driver for the product you are using.
The method for setting the printer driver varies depending on the application software. In general,
select the item you want from the list that is displayed when you select [Print] from the [File] menu, or
when you click [▼] in [Printer Name] in the dialog.
Depending on the application software. it may be necessary to select the media again in the media
selection function of the application software to use the media selected in the [Page Setup] of the
printer driver.
•
If you use software such as NiceLabel, the settings of the software are enabled, not the
settings of the printer driver.
160
Printer Driver Sharing Function
Connecting When Using the Printer Driver with Sharing Settings
The figure below shows how to connect when using the printer driver with sharing settings.
Set one computer (PC-0) as the print server and set other computers (PC-1, PC-2, PC-3, and so
on) as clients. All computers should be connected using a LAN connection and the print server and
product should be connected using LPT, COM, USB, or LAN.
Printer Driver Sharing Settings
The following shows how to set the printer driver when using the printer driver with sharing settings.
1. In both the print server and clients, download and install the printer driver from
the SATO printer driver download site. http://www.satoworldwide.com/software/
gallerydriver.aspx
•
If you are adding it with the [Add a printer] icon from the [Printers] folder, the necessary
files may not be installed and may not perform correctly (the copy of the sharing printer
icon on the network computer will be the same).
2. After confirming that a label can be output correctly from the printer driver of the
print server, set the printer driver to "Shared".
3. Specify the output port of the client's printer driver to the sharing printer
configured on the server.
Environment
Setting Method
Windows Server 2008
In the printer driver, open [Properties] > [Ports] > [Add Port]
> [Local Port], and specify the port name as "\\Sharing
computer name\Sharing printer name".
Windows 7 or later
In the printer driver, open [Printer properties] > [Ports] >
[Add Port] > [Local Port], and specify the port name as "\
\Sharing computer name\Sharing printer name".
4. Turn off the bi-directional communication of the printer driver in the client.
161
Printer Driver Sharing Function
Environment
Setting Method
Windows Server 2008
In the printer driver, open [Properties] > [Ports], and
uncheck [Enable bidirectional support].
Windows 7 or later
In the printer driver, open [Printer properties] > [Ports], and
uncheck [Enable bidirectional support].
Restrictions When Using the Printer Driver with Sharing Settings
When you use the printer driver with sharing settings, the following restrictions occur because bidirectional communication is disabled in the client.
•
Errors that occur with the product, such as "Paper End" and "Ribbon End", cannot be recognized.
•
In the printer driver [Properties] > [Driver settings] tab > [Configure Printer], [Get from printer] and
[Send to printer] cannot be used.
•
The settings you change in the printer driver [Printing Preferences] > [Printer Settings] tab cannot
be sent to the product (when the green check box is not selected).
162
All-In-One Tool Features
When you add the product to the All-In-One Tool, you can easily set and manage the product.
•
For details of the All-In-One Tool, download and read the All-In-One Tool Manual from
the SATO All-In-One Tool download site. http://www.satoworldwide.com/software/all-inone-tool.aspx
163
Media, Ribbon and Print Methods
Loading Media and Ribbon
Media, Ribbon and Print Methods
The product supports two types of print methods, thermal transfer and direct thermal.
The media or ribbon to be used varies depending on the print method.
Thermal transfer
Prints using a ribbon.
Direct thermal
Prints using direct thermal media.
•
Ribbon is not necessary if you are using direct thermal media.
164
Loading Media
The topics here explain how to load the media.
165
Usable Media
Usable Media
The product can print on the following two types of media.
•
Media roll
•
Fan-fold media
The product uses media sensors to detect I-marks or gaps on the media in order to precisely print the
content.
I-mark label
Gap label
I-mark journal paper/
linerless label
(1) Media feed direction
166
Adjusting the Position of the Media Sensor
When you use nonstandard media (for example, media with printing on the underside, or media with
a special shape), the media sensor cannot detect the I-mark or gap of the media correctly. In such a
case, adjust the position of the media sensor to detect the I-mark or gap correctly.
•
Adjust the media sensor guide to the position where it can detect the I-mark or gap of the
media.
•
The I-mark sensor (reflective type) is below the
type) is below the
mark.
167
mark, and the Gap sensor (transmissive
Loading the Media Roll
Loading the Media
Precautions for Loading the Media
Use genuine SATO media and ribbons for the product, for optimum print quality.
•
The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing. Be careful not to touch it, to
avoid being burned.
•
Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury.
•
The usable media sizes, the output speed and print quality vary depending on the
media specification, media and ribbon combination, product settings and outputting
environment. It is recommended to perform a test print with the media and ribbon to be
used in advance.
Loading the Media Roll
•
The routing path of the media is shown in the below picture.
Face-in media
Face-out media
1. Open the top cover (1).
168
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
2. Push the head lock lever (2) towards the rear.
169
Loading the Media Roll
3. Pull the media holder guide (3) and media guide (4) away from the product.
Turn the knob (5) counterclockwise to release the media guide.
4. Load the media in the media holder (6).
Make sure that the media roll is all the way in towards the inside of the product.
5. Push the media holder guide (3) lightly against the media roll.
170
6. Pass the media below the media damper (7) and the media sensor guide (8) while
pushing the media to inside of the product.
Make sure that the end of the media extends out the front of the product.
7. Press the print head down until the head lock lever is locked.
8. Press the media guide (4) lightly against the end of the media, and turn the knob (5)
to lock the media guide.
9. Close the top cover.
171
Loading the Fan-fold Media
•
When closing the top cover, be careful not to pinch your fingers.
10. Perform a test print to make sure that the media is loaded correctly.
•
You need to load the ribbon when printing using thermal transfer.
Loading the Fan-fold Media
1. Open the top cover (1).
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
2. Push the head lock lever (2) towards the rear.
172
3. Place the fan-fold media on a flat location, and load the media from the media slot
on the rear or the bottom of the product.
The routing path of the media is shown in the below picture.
Load the media from the rear of the product
Load the media from the bottom of the product.
•
When loading the media, make sure that the print side faces up.
4. After passing the media through the slot, refer to the same steps as the Media Roll
to load the media.
5. Perform a test print to make sure that the media is loaded correctly.
•
You need to load the ribbon when printing using thermal transfer.
•
If a media jam frequently occurs with the media being loaded from the bottom of the
product, change the load location to the rear of the product.
Loading the Media with the Optional Cutter Unit
•
Be careful not to touch the cutter blade.
1. Open the top cover (1).
173
Loading the Media with the Optional Cutter Unit
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
2. Push the head lock lever (2) towards the rear.
174
3. Pull the media holder guide (3) and media guide (4) away from the product.
Turn the knob (5) counterclockwise to release the media guide.
4. Load the media roll or the fan-fold media.
For Media Roll
The routing path of the media is shown in the below picture.
Face-in media
Face-out media
175
Loading the Media with the Optional Cutter Unit
a. Load the media in the media holder (6).
Make sure that the media roll is all the way in towards the inside of the product.
b. Push the media holder guide (3) lightly against the media roll.
For Fan-fold Media
a. Place the fan-fold media on a flat location, and then load the media from the rear of the product or
from the media slot on the bottom of the product.
The routing path of the media is shown in the below picture.
176
Load the media from the rear of the product
Load the media from the bottom of the product.
•
When loading the media, make sure that the print side faces up.
5. Pull the tab (7) of the cutter unit in the direction A, and then open up the cutteropen lever to (B).
6. Pass the media below the media damper (8) and media sensor guide (9) and
through the cutter unit while pushing the media to inside of the product.
Make sure that the end of the media extends out the front of the product.
177
Loading the Media with the Optional Cutter Unit
7. Press the print head down until the head lock lever is locked.
8. Close the cutter and then push the tab (7) in the reverse direction to lock it.
9. Press the media guide (4) lightly against the end of the media, and then turn the
knob (5) to lock the media guide.
10. Close the top cover.
•
When closing the top cover, be careful not to pinch your fingers.
11. Perform a test print to make sure that the media is loaded correctly.
178
•
You need to load the ribbon when printing using thermal transfer.
Loading the Media with the Optional Dispenser Unit and Liner Discharge Outlet
The below topic describes the procedure to dispense the label and eject the liner out of the product.
1. Open the top cover (1).
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
2. Push the head lock lever (2) towards the rear.
179
Loading the Media with the Optional Dispenser Unit and Liner Discharge Outlet
3. Pull the media holder guide (3) and media guide (4) away from the product.
Turn the knob (5) counterclockwise to release the media guide.
4. Load the media in the media holder (6).
Make sure that the media roll is all the way in to inside of the product.
5. Push the media holder guide (3) lightly against the media roll.
180
6. Pass the media below the media damper (7) and the media sensor guide (8) while
pushing the media to inside of the product.
Make sure that the end of the media extends out the front of the product.
7. Press the tab (9) at the front of the product to open the dispenser unit (10).
8. Remove about 30 cm (11.8") of labels (11) from the liner (12).
181
Loading the Media with the Optional Dispenser Unit and Liner Discharge Outlet
9. Pass the liner (12) through the gap of the dispenser unit to the outside of the
product.
10. Adjust the dispenser roller (13) to the center of the label.
11. Close the print head.
12. Close the dispenser unit.
13. Press the media guide lightly against the end of the media, and then turn the knob
to lock the media guide.
14. Close the top cover.
•
When closing the top cover, be careful not to pinch your fingers.
15. Perform a test print to make sure that the media is loaded correctly.
•
You need to load the ribbon when printing using thermal transfer.
•
When not using the product for a long time, keep the dispenser unit open to protect the
roller.
182
Loading the Media with the Optional Dispenser Unit and Liner Discharge Rewinder
The below topic describes the procedure to dispense the label and rewind the liner in the product.
•
The maximum diameter of the liner that can be rewound in the product is φ120 mm
(4.72").
•
The routing path of the media is shown in the below picture.
Label
Liner
1. Open the top cover (1).
183
Loading the Media with the Optional Dispenser Unit and Liner Discharge Rewinder
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
2. Push the head lock lever (2) towards the rear.
184
3. Pull the media holder guide (3) and media guide (4) away from the product.
Turn the knob (5) counterclockwise to release the media guide.
4. Load the media in the media holder (6).
Make sure that the media roll is all the way in to inside of the product.
5. Push the media holder guide (3) lightly against the media roll.
185
Loading the Media with the Optional Dispenser Unit and Liner Discharge Rewinder
6. Pass the media below the media damper (7) and the media sensor guide (8) while
pushing the media to inside of the product.
Make sure that the end of the media extends out the front of the product.
7. Press the tab (9) at the front of the product to open the dispenser unit (10).
8. Remove about 80 cm (31.5") of labels (11) from the liner (12).
186
9. Pass the liner (12) through the gap of the dispenser unit to the inside of the
product.
10. Adjust the dispenser roller (13) to the center of the label.
11. Pass the liner (12) below the liner rewinder (14), and attach it with the clip (15).
12. Rotate the liner rewinder (14) counterclockwise by hand, to wind the liner.
187
Removing the Liner from the Rewinder
13. Close the print head.
14. Close the dispenser unit.
15. Press the media guide lightly against the end of the media, and then turn the knob
to lock the media guide.
16. Close the top cover.
•
When closing the top cover, be careful not to pinch your fingers.
17. Perform a test print to make sure that the media is loaded correctly.
•
You need to load the ribbon when printing using thermal transfer.
•
When not using the product for a long time, keep the dispenser unit open to protect the
roller.
Removing the Liner from the Rewinder
•
The rewinder can take up maximum a diameter of 120 mm (4.72") of liner.
1. Confirm that the liner (1) has been cut, pull the clip (2) towards you, and pull out
the liner (1).
2. Place the clip back to its original position.
188
Loading Ribbon
You need to load the ribbon when printing using thermal transfer. The topics here explain how to load
and replace the ribbon.
189
Checking the Ink Side of the Ribbon
Checking the Ink Side of the Ribbon
There are two wind directions for the ribbon. Face-out means the ink is on the outer side and Face-in
means the ink is on the inner side. The product supports both wind directions. You can examine the
ink side of the ribbon using the following procedure.
1. Place the outer side of the ribbon onto the media (touching).
2. Scratch the inner side of the ribbon with your fingernail or a pointed object.
If there is a mark on the media, the ink is coated on the outer side of the ribbon.
◦
The ink is coated on the outer side. (Face-out ribbon)
◦
The ink is coated on the inner side. (Face-in ribbon)
190
Loading the Ribbon
•
The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing. Be careful not to touch it, to
avoid being burned.
•
Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury.
•
Use genuine SATO media and ribbons for the product, for optimum print quality.
•
The routing path of the ribbon is shown in the below picture.
Face-in ribbon
Face-out ribbon
•
You can also refer to the sticker located on the inner side of the top cover.
1. Open the top cover (1).
191
Loading the Ribbon
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
2. Push the ribbon rewind spindle (2) all the way in.
If there is any ribbon on the ribbon rewind spindle, remove it from the spindle before installing new
ribbon.
3. Push the head lock lever (3) towards the rear.
192
4. Load the ribbon (4) onto the ribbon supply spindle (5).
While taking note of the wind direction, insert the ribbon all the way in.
5. From the ribbon supply spindle (5), pass the ribbon below the print head (6).
6. Wind the ribbon counterclockwise to the ribbon rewind spindle (2) and grip sheet
(7).
Turn the ribbon rewind spindle counterclockwise for several rounds, to wind the ribbon.
193
Loading the Ribbon
7. If the media is already loaded, press the print head down until the head lock lever
is locked.
If the media is not loaded, load the media.
8. Close the top cover.
•
When closing the top cover, be careful not to pinch your fingers.
194
Replacing the Ribbon
1. Open the top cover (1).
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
2. Push the head lock lever (2) towards the rear.
195
Replacing the Ribbon
3. Press the tab (3) on the tip of the ribbon rewind spindle to pull it out.
4. Pull to remove the used ribbon from the ribbon rewind spindle.
5. Push the ribbon rewind spindle (4) all the way in.
6. Remove the used ribbon core from the ribbon supply spindle.
196
7. Load the ribbon (5) onto the ribbon supply spindle (6).
While taking note of the wind direction, insert the ribbon all the way in.
8. From the ribbon supply spindle (6), pass the ribbon below the print head (7).
9. Wind the ribbon counterclockwise to the ribbon rewind spindle (4) and grip sheet
(8).
Turn the ribbon rewind spindle counterclockwise for several rounds, to wind the ribbon.
197
Replacing the Ribbon
10. Press the print head down until the head lock lever is locked.
11. Close the top cover.
•
When closing the top cover, be careful not to pinch your fingers.
12. Press the
button (FEED) to feed the media.
13. Press the
button (ONLINE) to change to Online mode.
198
When to Replace Media and Ribbon
Checking the Remaining Amount of Media and Ribbon
You can check the remaining amount of media and ribbon according to the following procedure.
•
Checking through the window on the right side of the product
You can visually check the remaining amount of media and ribbon in the product through the
window on the right side of the product (1).
•
Checking through the notifications of the product
The product has Near End and End detection functions for the media and ribbon.
With icons and error messages on the display of the product, you can check if you need to replace
the media or ribbon soon, or if the remaining amount of media and ribbon is scarce.
199
Conditions That Trigger Paper End
Conditions That Trigger Paper End, Label Near End, Ribbon End and
Ribbon Near End
Conditions That Trigger Paper End
The conditions that trigger paper end vary depending on the operation of the product.
Conditions That Trigger Paper End in the Feeding Operation
A paper-end occurs if the no-paper condition persists even after the paper-end sensor detects the nopaper condition when 15 mm (0.59") continues to be fed.
(1) Print head position
(2) Paper end sensor: I-mark sensor/Gap sensor
Select in [Printing] > [Advanced] > [Paper End] menu, or specify by command.
(3) Media feed direction
Conditions That Trigger Paper End in the Printing Operation
1. The paper end sensor detects a no-paper condition at the position where 15 mm (0.59") has been
fed.
200
2. If the amount of printing remaining is less than the distance between the print head position and
paper end sensor -15 mm (-0.59"), a paper end error occurs after completing the output of 1.
If the amount of media remaining is more than the distance between the print head position and
paper end sensor -15 mm (-0.59"), a paper end error occurs right after detecting the paper end,
and the product will reprint after clearing the paper end error.
(1) Print head position
(2) Paper end sensor: I-mark sensor/Gap sensor
Select in [Printing] > [Advanced] > [Paper End] menu, or specify by command.
(3) Media feed direction
If a paper end error is detected while printing, operation varies depending on the amounts of printing
and media remaining when the error was detected.
The amount of media remaining can be calculated as follows:
Amount of media remaining = distance between print head position and paper end sensor -15 mm
(-0.59")
(1) Print head position
(2) Distance between the print head position and paper end sensor
(3) Paper end sensor
(4) Amount of media remaining
201
Conditions That Trigger Paper End
•
When the Amount of Printing Remaining Is More Than the Amount of Media Remaining
If the amount of printing remaining is more than the amount of media remaining when a paper
end error is detected, the product cannot finish the print job. Printing stops immediately and a
paper end error occurs.
(1) Print head position
(2) Paper end sensor
(3) Amount of media remaining
(4) Amount of printing remaining
•
When the Amount of Printing Remaining Is Less Than the Amount of Media Remaining
If the amount of printing remaining is less than the amount of media remaining, the product will
finish the print job and a paper end error will occur.
(1) Print head position
(2) Paper end sensor
(3) Amount of media remaining
(4) Amount of printing remaining
202
If there are multiple sheets between the print head and paper end sensor when a paper end error
is detected, a paper end error will occur only after finishing the label currently being printed.
(1) Print head position
(2) Paper end sensor
(3) Amount of media remaining
(4) Amount of printing remaining
Conditions That Trigger Label Near End
Label near end is detected by the label near end sensor.
Label near end occurs when the amount of label remaining is less than approximately 12 meters (39.4
feet) (media thickness: 160 μm (0.0063"), label diameter: approximately φ96 mm (3" core)).
•
Detection of the label near end is only for reference. The timing of label near end and
paper end may overlap, or the paper end may occur before the label near end occurs
depending on the label thickness and the top and bottom fluttering of the paper core.
Conditions That Trigger Ribbon End
Ribbon end error is detected by the ribbon sensor in the ribbon supply spindle. Ribbon end error
occurs when the product detects that the ribbon in the ribbon supply spindle has not moved (rolled)
more than 15 mm (0.59") after feeding the media.
Conditions That Trigger Ribbon Near End
Ribbon near end is detected by the ribbon sensor in the ribbon supply spindle. Ribbon near end
occurs when the amount of ribbon remaining is approximately less than 15 meters (49.2 feet) (ribbon
diameter: approximately 36 mm (1.42")).
•
The amount of ribbon remaining (15 meters (49.2 feet)) is only for reference. The
timing of ribbon near end varies depending on the ribbon thickness and the reading
status of the ribbon sensor.
203
[Shortcut] Menu
Various Settings of the Product
The Product's [Settings] Menu
[Shortcut] Menu
Frequently used settings are listed in the [Shortcut] menu.
204
[Printing] Menu
The following settings are available in the [Printing] menu:
Label Length
Set the length of the media.
Label Width
Set the width of the media.
Auto Measure
Automatically measure the length of the media.
Printing Mode
Set whether to print using a ribbon or direct thermal media.
Ribbon Near End
Enable or disable the warning when the ribbon is about to run out.
◦
Appears if you have selected [Use Ribbon] in the [Printing Mode] menu.
Speed
Set the print speed.
Sensor Type
Set the media sensor type.
Micro Label Print Mode
Set the micro label print mode.
Auto-mode
Automatically set the print mode.
Print Mode
Manually set the print mode.
205
[Label Length]
Backfeed
Set the backfeed operation.
Eject Cut
Set the time from the print completion until the print cut.
◦
Appears if you have selected [Cut & Print] in the [Print Mode] menu.
Darkness Range
Set the range of the print darkness.
Darkness
Set the print darkness.
Imaging
Set the print reference position in the vertical and horizontal directions.
Advanced
Set the sensor operation and print motion.
[Label Length]
Set the length of the media.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range of the label length is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
1 to 20000 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
1 to 18000 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
1 to 9600 dots
206
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
•
Set the label size to a value that includes the liner.
[Label Width]
Set the width of the media.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range of the label width is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
1 to 832 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
1 to 1248 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
1 to 2496 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
•
Set the label size to a value that includes the liner.
207
[Auto Measure]
[Auto Measure]
The product automatically measures the length of the media.
The measured length of the media will be automatically saved in [Label Length].
The Auto Measure function can be performed when [Sensor Type] is set to [Gap] or [I-Mark].
The setting procedure of the label length using the Auto Measure function is as follows:
1. Load the media.
2. Set [Auto Measure] to [Enabled].
3. Press the
button or
button to show the Online or Offline screen.
4. Open the print head. (Head Open error occurs.)
5. Close the print head. (The display returns to Offline screen.)
6. When you press the
button, the product feeds two pieces of label and measures the label
length.
7. The measured label length is saved in [Label Length].
•
When you have set [Auto Measure] to [Enabled], this function executes when the
product powers on.
208
[Printing Mode]
Set whether to print using a ribbon or direct thermal media.
The options are as follows:
Use Ribbon
Print using a ribbon.
Direct Thermal
Print using direct thermal media.
[Ribbon Near End]
Shows or does not show the warning icon when the ribbon is about to run out. Printing does not stop
even if the warning icon shows up.
Appears if you have selected [Use Ribbon] in the [Printing Mode] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Shows the warning icon.
209
[Speed]
Disabled
Does not show the warning icon.
Does not show the warning icon nor light the warning lamp and the [Media Remaining Amount]
signal is not output externally.
•
The warning icon is shown in the status bar on the upper part of the screen.
[Speed]
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range of the print speed is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi (8 dots/mm)
2 to 14 ips (inches/sec) (50.8 to 355.6 mm/sec)
305 dpi (12 dots/mm)
609 dpi (24 dots/mm)
2 to 6 ips (inches/sec) (50.8 to 152 mm/sec)
•
If the optional linerless cutter kit is installed to CL4NX Plus, the setting range is as
follows:
◦
The setting range is 2 to 6 ips (inches/sec) (50.8 to 152 mm/sec) regardless of the
printing resolution.
◦
If the [Speed] is set more than 7 ips (177.8 mm/sec), it is changed to 4 ips after
installing the linerless cutter kit.
•
Setting the print speed to a level that is too fast may affect the print quality.
210
[Sensor Type]
Set the sensor type for detecting the media.
The options are as follows:
None
Disable the media sensor.
Gap
Select when using gap type media. Use the transmissive type sensor.
I-Mark
Select when using I-mark type media. Use the reflective type sensor.
•
If you have selected [Tear-Off], [Dispenser], or [Cut & Print] in the [Print Mode] menu,
only [Gap] and [I-Mark] will be available.
•
If you have selected [Linerless] in the [Print Mode] menu, only [None] and [I-Mark] will
be available.
[Micro Label Print Mode]
211
[Micro Label Print Mode]
Set the micro label print mode operation.
Micro Label Print Mode is a mode to provide high accuracy printing for small sized labels.
•
The improved accuracy provided by micro label print mode is for labels sizes of less
than 53 mm (incl. GAP).
•
When the Micro Label Print Mode is enabled when print speed is 7ips or above, the
print speed will be automatically reduced to 6ips.
The setting items are as follows:
Micro Label Print Mode
Enable or disable the micro label print mode.
Auto Label Length Detection
Enable or disable the auto label length detection.
◦
Available if [Micro Label Print Mode] is set to [Enabled].
Label Length Averaging Count
Set the number of labels measured to be used for averaging the automatically set label length.
◦
Available if [Micro Label Print Mode] is set to [Enabled] and [Auto Label Length Detection] is set
to [Enabled].
Label Length
Set the label length manually.
◦
Available if [Micro Label Print Mode] is set to [Enabled] and [Auto Label Length Detection] is set
to [Disabled].
•
If the print start position is out of alignment when using [Auto Label Length Detection],
use [Label Length] to set the label length manually.
[Micro Label Print Mode]
212
Enable or disable the use of Micro Label Print Mode.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable Micro Label Print Mode.
Disabled
Disable Micro Label Print Mode.
[Auto Label Length Detection]
Enable or disable automatic measurement of label length when the [Micro Label Print Mode] is set to
[Enabled].
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the auto label length detection.
Disabled
Disable the auto label length detection.
213
[Micro Label Print Mode]
[Label Length Averaging Count]
Set the number of labels measured to be used for averaging the automatically set label length when
the [Micro Label Print Mode] is set to [Enabled] and the [Auto Label Length Detection] is set to
[Enabled].
The setting range is from 1 to 10.
[Label Length]
Set the label length manually when the [Micro Label Print Mode] is set to [Enabled] and the [Auto
Label Length Detection] is set to [Disabled].
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range of the label length is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
72 to 424 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
108 to 636 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
216 to 1272 dots
214
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
•
Set the label size to a value that includes the liner.
[Auto-mode]
When using [Auto-mode], the print mode changes automatically according to the status of the installed
option unit.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
The print mode changes automatically.
Disabled
The print mode changes according to the setting of the [Print Mode].
•
Operate in cutter mode if you have installed the optional cutter unit.
•
Operate in dispenser mode if you have installed the optional dispenser unit.
•
Operate in linerless mode if you have installed the optional linerless cutter kit.
215
[Print Mode]
[Print Mode]
Set the print mode.
The options are as follows:
Continuous
Continuously print the specified number of the media. The media remains in position for printing at
all times.
Tear-Off (Feeding media to the position for manual cutting)
After continuously printing the specified number of the media, feed the media to the point to
remove the media. After printing, tear off the media manually. The media will be back to the print
head position for starting the next printing.
Cutter
Cut each media while printing the specified number of media. You can specify this option if you
have installed the cutter unit.
Cut & Print
Allows you to continuously print and cut at the specified media repeat. If no print data is received
within the period specified for [Eject Cut], the product will feed the media to the cut position and
cut the last printed media. You can specify this option if you have installed the cutter unit.
Dispenser
Peel the liner from the printed label as the label is fed to the product’s front. Once the printed label
has been removed from the product for application, the next label will retract and position itself for
printing. You can specify this option if you have installed the dispenser unit.
Linerless
Cut each label while printing the specified number of labels. You can specify this option if you
have installed the linerless cutter kit.
216
•
If no option is installed, [Continuous] and [Tear-Off] are available.
•
If the optional cutter unit is installed, [Continuous], [Tear-Off], [Cutter], and [Cut & Print]
are available.
•
If the optional dispenser unit is installed, [Continuous], [Tear-Off], and [Dispenser] are
available.
•
If the optional linerless cutter kit is installed, only [Linerless] is available.
•
You cannot set the [Print Mode] if [Auto-mode] is [Enabled].
[Backfeed]
[Backfeed] is applicable when the print mode is set to tear-off mode, cutter mode, cut & print mode,
dispenser mode or linerless mode.
The options are as follows:
None
Do not backfeed.
After
After cut, backfeed the front part of the next media to the print head position. For dispenser mode,
backfeed the front part of the next label after dispensing the label.
Before
Before printing, backfeed the front part of the next media to the print head position.
•
If you have selected [Tear-Off] or [Linerless] in the [Print Mode], only [Before] is
available.
•
If you have selected [Cut & Print] in the [Print Mode], only [After] is available.
217
[Darkness Range]
[Eject Cut]
Set the Eject cut motion for the last printed media. Cut the last media after the specified timing.
Appears if you have selected [Cut & Print] in the [Print Mode] menu.
The setting range is Off, or from 1 to 5 (sec).
[Darkness Range]
Set the range of the print darkness.
The darkness range affects the print darkness.
The options are as follows:
A, B, C, D, E, F
•
The normal setting is A. You can also select B to F but the print darkness does not
change.
218
[Darkness]
Specify the print darkness from 10 steps.
The setting range is from 1 to 10. 1 is the lightest and 10 is the darkest.
•
To further fine tune the print darkness, set [Printing] > [Advanced] > [Adjustments] >
[Darkness Adjust].
[Imaging]
Set the print reference position in the vertical and horizontal directions.
The setting items are as follows:
Vertical
Adjust the print position in the vertical (feed) direction.
Horizontal
Adjust the print position in the horizontal direction.
219
[Imaging]
Adjusting direction of the print reference position and base reference point
(1) Feed direction
(2) Liner
(3) Label
(4) Gap between labels
(5) Adjustment of vertical base reference point
(6) Base reference point after adjustment
(7) Adjustment of horizontal base reference point
(8) Print reference position
[Vertical]
Set the print position in the vertical direction.
220
Set the correction value from the standard printing position as "-" for the direction of the paper feed
and "+" for the direction opposite to the paper feed.
(1) Feed direction
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
-19999 to 0 to 19999 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
-17999 to 0 to 17999 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
-9599 to 0 to 9599 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
[Horizontal]
Set the print position in the horizontal direction.
221
[Advanced]
Set the correction value from the standard printing position when facing the product, use "-" to adjust
to the right side and "+" to adjust to the left side.
(1) Feed direction
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
-831 to 0 to 831 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
-1247 to 0 to 1247 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
-2495 to 0 to 2495 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
[Advanced]
Set detailed sensor operation and print motion.
222
The setting items are as follows:
Calibrate
Adjust the media sensor.
Head Check
Check if there is a broken element of the print head.
Head Check Mode
Set the mode for head check.
◦
Appears if you have selected [All] or [Barcode] in the [Head Check] menu.
Every Page
Set the interval for head check.
◦
Appears if you have selected [Every Page] in the [Head Check Mode] menu.
Check Media Size
Enable or disable media size check.
◦
Appears if you have selected [Gap] or [I-Mark] in the [Sensor Type] menu.
Adjustments
Correct the offset value, print position and print darkness.
Start Online
Set whether to power on the product in Online mode.
Feed After Error
Set whether to automatically feed the media when recovering from an error.
Feed At Power On
Set whether to automatically feed the media when the product is powered on.
Finisher Feed
Set the length to feed after printing.
Paper End
Select the sensor for sensing the paper end.
Head Base Position
Set the edge position for printing.
Prioritize
For product settings, set whether to prioritize the settings that are done through the product or
through commands.
Reprint
Enable or disable the reprint function.
Print End Position
Adjust the media stop position or cut position when [Sensor Type] is set to [None].
223
[Advanced]
Label Near End
Enable or disable the warning when the media is about to run out.
[Calibrate]
Adjust the media sensor level.
In instances of media detection malfunction, adjust the media sensor level (Gap and I-mark sensors).
The setting items are as follows:
Auto-calibration
Automatically adjust the sensor level.
◦
Does not appear if you have installed the optional linerless cutter kit.
GAP Levels
Manually set the Gap sensor level.
GAP Slice Level
Manually set the Gap sensor slice level.
I-Mark Levels
Manually set the I-mark sensor level.
I-Mark Slice Level
Manually set the I-mark sensor slice level.
224
[Auto-calibration]
Perform the auto-calibration for the selected media sensor.
[Auto-calibration] is not available if you have installed the optional linerless cutter kit.
Gap + I-Mark
Adjusts both the Gap sensor and I-mark sensor.
Gap
Adjusts the Gap sensor.
I-Mark
Adjusts the I-mark sensor.
The procedure to auto-calibrate the media sensor is as follows:
1. Push the head lock lever towards the rear to unlock the print head.
2. Pass the media below the media sensor guide. If you are using labels, remove the label from the
liner. Align it so that the media sensor does not detect the I-mark (black mark).
3. Press the print head down until the head lock lever is locked. To get the correct adjustment result,
adjust after you have locked the print head.
4. Press the
/
buttons to select the type of sensor to be adjusted.
5. Press the
button or
button.
6. When the confirmation screen appears, press the
button to start the sensor adjustment.
7. The result of the sensor adjustment is shown. To exit the adjustment, press the
8. Set to Offline mode. Press the
•
button to confirm that the media is fed correctly.
If the media is not fed correctly after doing [Auto-calibration], contact your SATO
reseller or technical support center.
225
button.
[Advanced]
[GAP Levels]
Manually set the Gap sensor level.
The setting procedure is as follows:
First, adjust the "Low" level (voltage) of the Gap sensor.
1. Remove the label from the liner.
2. Pass the liner through the media sensor. Align it so that the media sensor does not detect the Imark (black mark).
3. Close the print head. To get the correct adjustment result, adjust after you have closed the print
head.
4. Select the [GAP Levels] in the [Calibrate] menu and press the
button.
5. Press the
/
buttons to change the [Emit] value until the [Sensor] value is below 0.5 (V).
Set the [Emit] value as low as possible.
6. If the [Sensor] value does not decrease below 0.5 after you changed the [Emit] value, press the
/
buttons to change the [Receive] value.
7. Take a note of the [Sensor] value from the above procedure. This is the "Low" level value for the
Gap sensor.
Next, check the "High" level (voltage) of the Gap sensor as follows:
1. Pass the media (attached with liner) between the media sensors. Align it so that the media sensor
does not detect the I-mark (black mark).
2. Close the print head.
3. Check the [Sensor] value.
If the value is 1.0 (V) higher than the "Low" level value you have recorded, this is the "High" level
value for the Gap sensor.
If the difference between the "High" and the "Low" levels is less than 1.0, adjust the [Emit] and
[Receive] values so that the difference is more than 1.0, or adjust the "Low" level (voltage) of the
Gap sensor again.
4. If both "High" and "Low" levels comply with the standard value, press the
button to
confirm the value.
The standard values for the "High" and "Low" levels for the Gap sensor are as follows:
226
◦
Low (with only liner) ≤ 0.5 (V)
◦
High (media attached with liner) - Low ≥ 1.0 (V)
[GAP Slice Level]
Set the Gap sensor slice level.
The setting procedure is as follows:
1. Use the following formula to calculate the slice level:
(High level - Low level) x 0.3 + Low level = slice level
2. Select the [GAP Slice Level] in the [Calibrate] menu and press the
button.
3. Press the
/
buttons to change the [Slice level] value. Set the [Slice level] to the level
calculated in step 1.
4. Press the
button to confirm the value.
•
If you set the [Slice level] to 0.0 (V), the product sets the slice level automatically.
227
[Advanced]
[I-Mark Levels]
Manually set the I-mark sensor level.
The setting procedure is as follows:
First, adjust the "Low" level (voltage) of the I-mark sensor.
1. Pass the media (attached with liner) between the media sensors. Align it so that the media sensor
does not detect the I-mark (black mark).
2. Close the print head. To get the correct adjustment result, adjust after you have closed the print
head.
3. Select the [I-Mark Levels] in the [Calibrate] menu and press the
button.
4. Press the
/
buttons to change the [Emit] value until the [Sensor] value is below 0.5 (V).
Set the [Emit] value as low as possible.
5. If the [Sensor] value does not decrease below 0.5 after you changed the [Emit] value, press the
/
buttons to change the [Receive] value.
6. Take a note of the [Sensor] value from the above procedure. This is the "Low" level value for the Imark sensor.
Next, check the "High" level (voltage) of the I-mark sensor as follows:
1. Pass the media between the media sensors so that the media sensor can detect the I-mark (black
mark).
2. Close the print head.
3. Check the [Sensor] value.
If the value is 1.0 (V) higher than the "Low" level value you have recorded, this is the "High" level
value for the I-mark sensor.
If the difference between the "High" and the "Low" levels is less than 1.0, adjust the [Emit] and
[Receive] values so that the difference is more than 1.0, or adjust the "Low" level (voltage) of the Imark sensor again.
4. If both "High" and "Low" levels comply with the standard value, press the
button to
confirm the value.
The standard values for the "High" and "Low" levels for the I-mark sensor are as follows:
◦
Low (without I-mark) ≤ 0.5 (V)
◦
High (with I-mark) - Low ≥ 1.0 (V)
228
[I-Mark Slice Level]
Set the I-mark sensor slice level.
The setting procedure is as follows:
1. Use the following formula to calculate the slice level:
(High level - Low level) x 0.7 + Low level = slice level
2. Select the [I-Mark Slice Level] in the [Calibrate] menu and press the
button.
3. Press the
/
buttons to change the [Slice level] value. Set the [Slice level] to the slice level
calculated in step 1.
4. Press the
button to confirm the value.
•
If you set the [Slice level] to 0.0 (V), the product sets the slice level automatically.
[Head Check]
Automatically check if there is a broken element of the print head.
229
[Advanced]
The options are as follows:
Off
Disable the Head Check.
All
Check the entire print area.
Barcode
Check only the area for printing a barcode. Head check is not applicable for barcodes printed as
graphic data.
•
Head check is a reference for checking for a broken element of the print head. This
function does not guarantee barcode readability. A regular barcode reader test is
required. When a void of printing got up, the head check function may not work
immediately. Some gaps may occur.
For the outputted label after the head error, perform the scanner reader of the printed
barcode to check the label.
[Head Check Mode]
Set the method for head check.
Appears if you have selected [All] or [Barcode] in the [Head Check] menu.
The options are as follows:
Always
Perform the head check for every item.
After Batch
The head check occurs before starting to print and when printing is stopped. If backfeed is
applicable, the head check occurs before starting to print, when stopping to print and during the
backfeed.
Every Page
Perform the head check for each specified number of media.
230
[Every Page]
Perform the head check for each specified number of media.
Appears if you have selected [Every Page] in the [Head Check Mode] menu.
The setting range is from 1 to 999999.
[Check Media Size]
Enable or disable media size check.
Appears if you have selected [Gap] or [I-Mark] in the [Sensor Type] menu.
If this function is enabled, "Media Error" is shown when either of the following conditions applies:
•
If the media is more than 3 mm (0.12") longer than the media length specified with the media size
command ESC+A1.
•
If the current media feed length is more than 3 mm (0.12") longer than the media length fed for
the first time after this function is enabled.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable media size check.
231
[Advanced]
Disabled
Disable media size check.
[Adjustments]
Correct the offset position, print position and print darkness.
The setting items are as follows:
Offset
Adjusts the backfeed/stop position for Tear-off/Cut/Dispense operation.
Pitch
Adjusts the print start position thus effects the vertical print position placement.
Pitch Offset
Adjusts the offset position and the pitch position at the same time.
Darkness Adjust
Fine tune the print darkness.
[Offset]
232
Correct the offset position.
Offset adjusts the backfeed/stop position for Tear-off/Cut/Dispense operation.
Set the value '+' to move the offset position in the direction opposite to the feed direction and '-' to
move in the feed direction.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
[Pitch]
Pitch adjusts the print start position thus effects the vertical print position placement.
233
[Advanced]
Set the value '+' to move print position in the direction opposite to the feed direction and '-' to move in
the feed direction.
(1) Feed direction
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
[Pitch Offset]
Pitch Offset adjusts the offset position and the pitch position at the same time.
234
Set the value '+' to move the offset and pitch positions in the direction opposite to the feed direction
and '-' to move in the feed direction.
(1) Feed direction
(2) Offset position (backfeed/stop position for Tear-off/Cut/Dispense operation)
(3) Pitch position (leading edge of media position that decides the vertical print position)
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
-392 to 0 to 392 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
-588 to 0 to 588 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
-1176 to 0 to 1176 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
[Darkness Adjust]
235
[Advanced]
Fine tune the print darkness.
The setting range is from 0 to 99.
0 is the lightest and 99 is the darkest.
[Start Online]
Select default mode when the product is powered on.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
The product powers on in Online mode.
Disabled
The product powers on in Offline mode.
[Feed After Error]
Set whether to automatically feed the media when recovering from an error and changing to Online
mode.
The options are as follows:
236
Enabled
Feed the media when changing to Online mode after recovering from an error.
Disabled
Do not feed the media when changing to Online mode after recovering from an error.
However, if [Feed At Power On] is set to [Enabled], the product feeds the media when it is
powered on and changes to Online mode.
[Feed At Power On]
Set whether to automatically feed the media when the product is powered on.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Feed the media when the product is powered on.
Disabled
Do not feed the media when the product is powered on.
However, if [Feed After Error] is set to [Enabled], the product feeds the media when it is powered
on and changes to Online mode.
237
[Advanced]
[Finisher Feed]
Set the media feed amount for Tear-off, cut and dispense stop. Set the media feed amount based on
the print head position of 0.
The actual media feed amount is the value of [Offset] + [Finisher Feed].
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
0 to 2040 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
0 to 3060 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
0 to 6120 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
•
When [Printing Mode] is set to [Use Ribbon], the length of label backfeed needs to be
under 30 mm (1.18"). If it is over 30 mm (1.18"), the end of the ribbon may be falsely
detected.
•
A message prompting you to restart the product will appear on the Online/Offline
screen if you have made any changes. In such a case, reboot the product to apply the
settings.
238
[Paper End]
Select the sensor for sensing the paper end.
The options are as follows:
Using I-mark
Use the I-mark sensor (reflective type) to detect the paper end.
Using Gap
Use the Gap sensor (transmissive type) to detect the paper end.
[Head Base Position]
Set the position used for the base reference point for printing.
The options are as follows:
Item
CL4NX Plus
[Standard]
Print with a standard base reference point.
[Left-justify]
Move the base reference point 2 mm (0.08") to the left
toward the product.
239
[Advanced]
•
A message prompting you to restart the product will appear on the Online/Offline
screen if you have made any changes. In such a case, reboot the product to apply the
settings.
[Prioritize]
For product settings, set whether to prioritize the settings that are done through the product or through
commands.
The options are as follows:
Commands
Prioritize the settings through commands.
Settings
Prioritize the settings that are done through the product.
[Reprint]
Enable or disable the reprint function.
The options are as follows:
240
Enabled
Enable the reprint function.
Disabled
Disable the reprint function.
If you have selected [Enabled] in [Reprint], you can press the
Online screen to print the previous data again.
•
button ([REPRINT]) on the
The previous data will be lost if you power off the product.
[Print End Position]
Adjust the media stop position or cut position when the [Sensor Type] is set to [None]. This adjustment
also sets the blank amount from the media stop position.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
0 to 20000 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
0 to 18000 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
0 to 9600 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
241
[Advanced]
[Label Near End]
Shows or does not show the warning icon when the media is about to run out. Printing does not stop
even if the warning icon shows up.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Shows the warning icon.
Disabled
Does not show the warning icon.
•
The warning icon is shown in the status bar on the upper part of the screen.
242
[Interface] Menu
The following settings are available in the [Interface] menu:
Network
Set the LAN connection and wireless LAN connection.
IEEE1284
Set the IEEE1284 connection.
◦
Appears only if the combo interface board is installed.
RS-232C
Set the RS-232C connection.
◦
Appears only if the combo interface board is installed.
USB
Set the USB connection.
Bluetooth
Set the Bluetooth connection.
NFC
Set the NFC connection.
Ignore CR/LF
Set to ignore CR/LF codes.
Ignore CAN/DLE
Set to ignore CAN/DLE codes.
External I/O
Set the external signal (EXT).
243
[Network]
◦
Appears only if the combo interface board is installed.
[Network]
This menu is for using LAN and wireless LAN for the interface between the computer and the product.
The setting items are as follows:
Settings
Set LAN or wireless LAN, or select an interface.
Services
Set the TCP/IP port number, NTP, LPD, FTP, SNMP, or SOS (SATO Online Services).
Advanced
Set the advanced function for the interface.
[Settings]
Set the LAN or wireless LAN, or select the interface.
The setting items are as follows:
244
LAN
Set the LAN.
Wi-Fi
Set the wireless LAN.
◦
Appears only if you have installed the optional wireless LAN.
Interface
Select the network interface.
◦
This item is to select the network interface from LAN or wireless LAN when you have installed
the optional wireless LAN.
•
You cannot use LAN and wireless LAN at the same time. The wireless LAN function is
available only if you have installed the wireless LAN.
[LAN]
Set the IPv4, IPv6 or proxy for the LAN.
The setting items are as follows:
IPv4
Set the IPv4 for the LAN.
IPv6
Set the IPv6 for the LAN.
Proxy
Set the proxy for the LAN.
245
[Network]
[IPv4]
Set IPv4 for the LAN.
The setting items are as follows:
Mode
Select the IP address assignment method.
DHCP / Renew Lease
Update the lease time and get the IP address from the DHCP server again.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu and LAN is the active interface.
◦
Does not appear if the wireless LAN is the active interface.
IP Address
Set and check the IP address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the IP address you received
from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select this to set the IP address.
Netmask
Set and check the subnet mask address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the subnet mask address you
received from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select this to set the subnet mask address.
Gateway
Set and check the default gateway address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the gateway address you
received from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select this to set the default gateway address.
246
DNS
Set and check DNS server addresses.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select this to set and check DNS server
addresses.
•
After doing the settings, press the
button to enable the new settings. Press
the
button to cancel the new settings and return to the previous settings.
•
You cannot change [IP Address], [Netmask], [Gateway], or [DNS] when [Mode] is
[DHCP].
[Mode]
Select the IP address assignment method.
The options are as follows:
DHCP
Automatically retrieve the IP address, gateway and subnet mask from the DHCP server.
Static
Manually set the IP address, gateway and subnet mask.
247
[Network]
[IP Address]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the IP address.
The setting range is as follows:
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
[Netmask]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the subnet mask address.
Each group of the address can be set cyclically among 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254 and 255.
The setting range is as follows:
128.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.254
248
[Gateway]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the default gateway address.
The setting range is as follows:
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
[DNS]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set and check DNS server addresses.
The setting range is as follows:
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
•
You can register up to three IP addresses for the DNS server. Use a comma to delimit
different IP addresses.
249
[Network]
[IPv6]
Set the IPv6 for the LAN.
The setting items are as follows:
Mode
Select the IP address assignment method or disable IPv6.
DHCP / Renew Lease
Update the lease time and get the IP address from the DHCP server again.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu.
◦
Does not appear if the wireless LAN is the active interface.
IP Address
Set and check the IP address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the IP address you received
from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select this to set the IP address.
Prefix Length
Set and check the prefix.
Gateway
Set and check the default gateway address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the gateway address you
received from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select this to set the default gateway address.
DNS
Set and check the address of the primary DNS server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set the primary address of the DNS
server.
250
•
After doing the settings, press the
button to enable the new settings. Press
the
button to cancel the new settings and return to the previous settings.
•
You cannot change [IP Address], [Prefix Length], [Gateway], or [DNS] if [Mode] is
anything other than [Static].
[Mode]
Select the IP address assignment method or disable IPv6.
The options are as follows:
Disable
Disable IPv6.
Auto
Automatically generate the IP address and gateway (stateless mode).
DHCP
Automatically retrieve the IP address and gateway from the DHCP server (stateful mode).
Static
Manually set the IP address, gateway and prefix length.
251
[Network]
[IP Address]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the IP address.
The setting range is as follows:
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 to ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
[Prefix Length]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the prefix.
The setting range is from 1 to 128.
252
[Gateway]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the default gateway address.
The setting range is as follows:
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 to ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
[DNS]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the primary address of the DNS server.
The setting range is as follows:
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 to ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
•
You can register only one IP address for the DNS server for IPv6.
253
[Network]
[Proxy]
Set the proxy for the LAN.
The setting items are as follows:
Enabled
Enable or disable use of proxy.
Server
Set the proxy server address.
Exclude
Exclude the proxy from usage.
[Enabled]
Enable or disable use of proxy.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable proxy server usage.
254
Disabled
Disable proxy server usage.
•
To enable the proxy, [Server] should be set and [Exclude] must contain at least
127.0.0.1 and localhost.
[Server]
Set the name or IP address of the proxy server.
Example of input) 172.128.1.100:8080
•
Server should be set with a valid name or IP address and port number.
•
Separate the IP address and port number with a colon (:).
[Exclude]
Set names, IP addresses or domains for the proxy to exclude.
•
Exclude must contain at least 127.0.0.1 and localhost.
255
[Network]
[Wi-Fi]
Set the wireless LAN.
Appears only if you have installed the optional wireless LAN.
The setting items are as follows:
IPv4
Configure IPv4 for Wi-Fi.
IPv6
Configure IPv6 for Wi-Fi.
Proxy
Configure the proxy for Wi-Fi.
Wi-Fi Protected Setup
Set the wireless LAN connection with the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) function.
Wi-Fi Direct
Set the Wi-Fi Direct function.
◦
Enabled only if you have selected [Infrastructure] in the [Mode] menu.
SSID
Set the SSID.
Hidden SSID
Set the hidden SSID.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Infrastructure] in the [Mode] menu.
Mode
Set the communication mode.
Channel
Set the communication channel.
Security
Set the security (encryption method).
256
WEP Conf.
Set the WEP key.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [WEP] in the [Security] menu.
WPA Conf.
Set the WPA authentication.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [WPA2/WPA] or [WPA2] in the [Security] menu.
EAP Conf.
Set the EAP authentication.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Dynamic WEP] in the [Security] menu.
•
After doing the settings, press the
button to enable the new settings. Press
the
button to cancel the new settings and return to the previous settings.
•
When [Wi-Fi Direct] is active, [IPv6] and [Wi-Fi Protected Setup] do not appear on the
screen.
[IPv4]
Configure IPv4 for Wi-Fi.
The setting items are as follows:
Mode
Select the IP address assignment method.
DHCP / Renew Lease
Update the lease time and get the IP address from the DHCP server again.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu.
◦
Does not appear if LAN is the active interface.
257
[Network]
IP Address
Set and check the IP address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the IP address you received
from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set the IP address.
Netmask
Set and check the subnet mask address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the subnet mask address you
received from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set the subnet mask address.
Gateway
Set and check the default gateway address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the gateway address you
received from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set the default gateway address.
DNS
Set and check DNS server addresses.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set and check DNS server addresses.
•
After doing the settings, return to the [Wi-Fi] screen by pressing the
then press the
button to enable the new settings. Press the
to cancel the new settings and return to the previous settings.
•
button, and
button
When [Wi-Fi Direct] is active, [Mode], [DHCP] and [DNS] do not appear. In addition,
you cannot change [IP Address], [Netmask], or [Gateway] if [DHCP] or [Wi-Fi Direct] is
active. [DNS] cannot be changed if [Mode] is [DHCP].
[Mode]
Select the IP address assignment method.
The options are as follows:
258
DHCP
Automatically retrieve the IP address, gateway and subnet mask from the DHCP server.
Static
Manually set the IP address, gateway and subnet mask.
[IP Address]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the IP address.
The setting range is as follows:
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
[Netmask]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the subnet mask address.
Each group of the address can be set cyclically among 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254 and 255.
The setting range is as follows:
128.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.254
259
[Network]
[Gateway]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the default gateway address.
The setting range is as follows:
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
[DNS]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set and check DNS server addresses.
The setting range is as follows:
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
•
You can register up to three IP addresses for the DNS server. Use a comma to delimit
different IP addresses.
260
[IPv6]
Configure IPv6 for Wi-Fi.
The setting items are as follows:
Mode
Select the IP address assignment method or disable IPv6.
DHCP / Renew Lease
Update the lease time and get the IP address from the DHCP server again.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu.
◦
Does not appear if LAN is the active interface.
IP Address
Set and check the IP address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the IP address you received
from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set the IP address.
Prefix Length
Set and check the prefix.
Gateway
Set and check the default gateway address.
If you have selected [DHCP] in the [Mode] menu, the screen shows the gateway address you
received from the DHCP server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set the default gateway address.
DNS
Set and check the address of the primary DNS server.
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, select to set the primary address of the DNS
server.
261
[Network]
•
After doing the settings, return to the [Wi-Fi] screen by pressing the
button, and
then press the
button to enable the new settings. Press the
to cancel the new settings and return to the previous settings.
•
button
When [Wi-Fi Direct] is active, this [IPv6] screen does not appear. In addition, you
cannot change [IP Address], [Prefix Length], [Gateway], or [DNS] if [Mode] is anything
other than [Static].
[Mode]
Select the IP address assignment method or disable IPv6.
The options are as follows:
Disable
Disable IPv6.
Auto
Automatically generate the IP address and gateway (stateless mode).
DHCP
Automatically retrieve the IP address and gateway from the DHCP server (stateful mode).
Static
Manually set the IP address, gateway and prefix length.
262
[IP Address]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the IP address.
The setting range is as follows:
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 to ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
[Prefix Length]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the prefix.
The setting range is from 1 to 128.
263
[Network]
[Gateway]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the default gateway address.
The setting range is as follows:
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 to ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
[DNS]
If you have selected [Static] in the [Mode] menu, set the primary address of the DNS server.
The setting range is as follows:
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 to ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff
•
You can register only one IP address for the DNS server for IPv6.
264
[Proxy]
Configure the proxy for Wi-Fi.
The setting items are as follows:
Enabled
Enable or disable use of proxy.
Server
Set the proxy server address.
Exclude
Exclude the proxy from usage.
[Enabled]
Enable or disable use of proxy.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable proxy server usage.
265
[Network]
Disabled
Disable proxy server usage.
•
To enable the proxy, [Server] should be set and [Exclude] must contain at least
127.0.0.1 and localhost.
[Server]
Set the name or IP address of the proxy server.
Example of input) 172.128.1.100:8080
•
Server should be set with a valid name or IP address and port number.
•
Separate the IP address and port number with a colon (:).
[Exclude]
Set names, IP addresses or domains for the proxy to exclude.
•
Exclude must contain at least 127.0.0.1 and localhost.
266
[Wi-Fi Protected Setup]
Set the wireless LAN connection using the push button or PIN code method.
The setting items are as follows:
Button (PBC)
Set the wireless LAN connection using the push button method.
PIN
Set the wireless LAN connection using the PIN code method.
•
Refer to the manual of the access point device for its operation.
•
This screen does not appear if [LAN] or [Wi-Fi Direct] is active.
[Button (PBC)]
Set the wireless LAN connection using the push button method.
1. Select [Button (PBC)] in the [Wi-Fi Protected Setup] menu and press the
button.
2. When [Scanning...] appears on the screen, press the WPS button on the access point of the
wireless LAN device.
267
[Network]
3. When the connection to the access point is established, [Successfully configured.] appears on the
screen.
[PIN]
Set the wireless LAN connection using the PIN code method.
1. Select [PIN] in the [Wi-Fi Protected Setup] menu and press the
button.
2. When [Scanning...] appears on the screen, set the PIN code shown on the screen to the access
point of the wireless LAN or computer.
268
3. When the connection to the access point is established, [Successfully configured.] appears on the
screen.
[Wi-Fi Direct]
Connect without group
Connect with group
Set the Wi-Fi Direct function.
269
[Network]
The Wi-Fi Direct function is enabled if you have selected [Infrastructure] in the [Mode] menu. If you
have changed the setting from [Ad-hoc] to [Infrastructure] in the [Mode] menu, reboot the product
before setting the Wi-Fi Direct function.
The setting procedure is as follows:
1. Set the device name for the product using [Device Name]. You can enter 1 to 32 characters.
Alphabets (capital and small letters), numbers and symbols can be used. Press the
button to
return to the [Wi-Fi] menu and press the
button to enable changes.
2. Select [Connect] to search and show the connectable device names or to accept connection
requests when the product is the GO (Group Owner). Select the device name you want to connect
using the
/
buttons, and press the
button.
3. Select [Start Group] if you want to start a new persistent group or select a group from the list.
4. Select [Remove Group] to remove the persistent group in step 3.
5. Complete the connection according to the display on the product or device you want to connect.
6. Select [Disconnect] if you want to stop the connection.
270
•
You can connect a maximum of 10 devices.
•
When Wi-Fi Direct is active, [Device Name] cannot be changed.
•
[Start Group] and [Remove Group] are shown only if Wi-Fi is active and the product is
not connected to a Wi-Fi Direct network.
•
[Remove Group] is shown if Wi-Fi is active and the product is connected.
•
After setting up a start group, the product will be set to the GO (Group Owner) and will
wait for a connection request from another device.
•
If the product is powered off during a persistent group connection, the group will be
started automatically after the product is powered on.
[SSID]
Set the SSID.
The screen shows the Wi-Fi network detected by the product.
Select the name of the Wi-Fi network you want to connect using the
/
buttons and press the
button to confirm.
To register a Wi-Fi network manually, press the
button and enter the name of the network.
You can enter a maximum of 32 characters. Alphabets (capital and small letters), numbers and
symbols can be used.
271
[Network]
[Hidden SSID]
Set the hidden SSID (stealth function).
Appears if you have selected [Infrastructure] in the [Mode] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the hidden SSID.
Disabled
Disable the hidden SSID.
[Mode]
Set the communication method of the wireless LAN.
The options are as follows:
•
[Infrastructure]
•
[Ad-hoc]
272
[Channel]
Set the communication channel.
[Channel] can be set only if you have selected [Ad-hoc] in the [Mode] menu.
The number of channels you can set varies depending on the region of the product.
[Security]
Set the security method of the network. Set the security methods so that the product, host and network
devices match.
The options are as follows:
•
[None]
•
[WEP]
•
[WPA2/WPA]
•
[WPA2]
•
[Dynamic WEP]
If you have selected [Ad-hoc] in the [Mode] menu, only [None] and [WEP] will be available.
273
[Network]
[WEP Conf.]
Set the WEP key.
Appears if you have selected [WEP] in the [Security] menu.
The setting items are as follows:
Authentication
Set the WEP authentication method.
Key Index
Set the key index.
Key #1 to Key #4
Set the WEP key1 - key4.
[Authentication]
Set the WEP authentication method.
The options are as follows:
•
[Open System]
•
[Shared Key]
274
[Key Index]
Set the key index.
Set the key index (WEP key) according to the access point of the wireless LAN you connect.
The setting range is from 1 to 4.
•
Depending on the connecting device, the range of the key index may be 0 to 3. In such
a case, if you have set the product to 1, set the connecting device to 0.
[Key #1] to [Key #4]
Set the WEP key #1 - key #4.
You can enter alphabets (capital and small letters) and numbers.
Depending on the length of the WEP key, the number of characters you can set is as follows:
•
When the key length is 64 bits
ASCII: Five characters
Hexadecimal: 10 characters
•
When the key length is 128 bits
ASCII: Thirteen characters
Hexadecimal: 26 characters
275
[Network]
[WPA Conf.]
Set the WPA authentication.
Appears only if you have selected [WPA2/WPA] or [WPA2] in the [Security] menu.
The setting items are as follows:
WPA Authentication
Set the WPA authentication method.
PSK
Set the PSK shared key.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Personal (PSK)] in the [WPA Authentication] menu.
EAP Conf.
Set the functions for EAP.
◦
Appears only if you have selected items other than [Personal (PSK)] in the [WPA Authentication]
menu.
[WPA Authentication]
276
Set the WPA authentication method.
The options are as follows:
•
[Personal (PSK)]
•
[Enterprise (802.1x)]
•
[CCKM]
[PSK]
Set the PSK shared key.
Appears only if you have selected [Personal (PSK)] in the [WPA Authentication] menu.
You can enter 8 to 63 ASCll characters or 64 hexadecimal digits. Alphabets, numbers and symbols
can be used.
[EAP Conf.]
Set the functions for EAP.
Appears only if you have selected items other than [Personal (PSK)] in the [WPA Authentication] menu
or if you have selected [Dynamic WEP] in the [Security] menu.
The setting items are as follows:
EAP Mode
Set the EAP Mode (authentication mode).
277
[Network]
Inner Method
Set the inner method.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [FAST], [PEAP], or [TTLS] in the [EAP Mode] menu.
Username
Set the user name.
Password
Set the password.
Anon. Outer ID
Set the external ID.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [FAST], [PEAP], or [TTLS] in the [EAP Mode] menu.
Verify Server Cert.
Enable or disable server authentication.
◦
Appears if you have selected anything other than [LEAP] in the [EAP Mode] menu.
Private Key P/W
Set the Private Key password.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [TLS] in either the [EAP Mode] menu or [Inner Method] menu.
PAC Auto Provisioning
Enable or disable PAC Auto Provisioning.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [FAST] in the [EAP Mode] menu.
PAC P/W
Set the PAC password.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [FAST] in the [EAP Mode] menu and if you have selected
[Disabled] in [PAC Auto Provisioning].
278
[EAP Mode]
Set the EAP Mode (authentication mode).
The options are as follows:
•
[FAST]
•
[LEAP]
•
[PEAP]
•
[TLS]
•
[TTLS]
[Inner Method]
Set the inner method.
Appears only if you have selected [FAST], [PEAP], or [TTLS] in the [EAP Mode] menu.
•
If you have selected [FAST] in the [EAP Mode] menu, the options are [MSCHAPv2], [GTC], and
[TLS].
•
If you have selected [PEAP] in the [EAP Mode] menu, the options are [MSCHAPv2], [GTC],
[MD5], [OTP], and [TLS].
•
If you have selected [TTLS] in the [EAP Mode] menu, the options are [MSCHAPv2], [MSCHAP],
[CHAP], [PAP], [EAP-GTC], [EAP-MD5], [EAP-MSCHAPV2], [EAP-OTP], and [EAP-TLS].
279
[Network]
[Username]
Set the user name.
You can enter 0 to 63 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
[Password]
Set the password.
You can enter 0 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
280
[Anon. Outer ID]
Set the external ID.
Appears if you have selected [FAST], [PEAP], or [TTLS] in the [EAP Mode] menu.
You can enter 0 to 63 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
[Verify Server Cert.]
Enable or disable server certificate validation.
Appears if you have selected anything other than [LEAP] in the [EAP Mode] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable server certificate validation.
Disabled
Disable server certificate validation.
281
[Network]
[Private Key P/W]
Set the Private Key password.
Appears only if you have selected [TLS] in either the [EAP Mode] menu or [Inner Method] menu.
You can enter 0 to 64 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
[PAC Auto Provisioning]
Enable or disable PAC auto provisioning.
Appears if you have selected [FAST] in the [EAP Mode] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable PAC auto provisioning.
Disabled
Disable PAC auto provisioning.
282
[PAC P/W]
Set the PAC password.
Appears only if you have selected [FAST] in the [EAP Mode] menu and if you have selected [Disabled]
in [PAC Auto Provisioning].
You can enter 0 to 64 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
[Interface]
Select the network interface.
This item is to select the network interface from LAN or wireless LAN when you have installed the
optional wireless LAN.
The options are as follows:
Auto
Automatically select between LAN and wireless LAN interface at product startup. LAN is selected
if LAN cable is connected to a link-established hub (Link LED is flashing) at product startup.
Wireless LAN is selected if LAN is not detected at product startup.
LAN
Use LAN interface (or force LAN interface).
Wi-Fi
Use wireless LAN interface (or force wireless LAN interface).
283
[Network]
◦
Appears only if you have installed the optional wireless LAN.
•
A message prompting you to restart the product will appear on the Online/Offline
screen if you have made any changes. In such a case, reboot the product to apply the
settings.
[Services]
Set the TCP/IP port number, NTP, LPD, FTP, SNMP, or SOS (SATO Online Services).
The setting items are as follows:
Ports
Set the TCP/IP port number.
NTP
Set the functions for NTP.
LPD
Set the functions for LPD.
FTP
Set the functions for FTP.
SNMP
Set the functions for SNMP.
Online Services
Set the functions for SOS (SATO Online Services).
284
[Ports]
Set the TCP/IP port number.
The setting items are as follows:
Port1
Set the port number of Port1.
For the two-port connection of Status4, this port is used for receiving print data. For the one-port
connection of Status3/Status5, this port is used for both receiving print data and returning the
product status.
Port2
Set the port number of Port2.
For the two-port connection of Status4, this port is used for returning the product status.
Port3
Set the port number of Port3.
For the one-port connection of Status3/Status4/Status5, this port is used for both receiving print
data and returning the product status.
Flow Control
Set the communication protocol.
TCP Connection Queue
Set whether to allow queuing for connection when multiple hosts or applications are sending
connection requests to the product.
Legacy Status for Port 9100
Set whether to change the return status format of Port3 to legacy status.
◦
Does not appear if you have selected [None] in the [Flow Control] menu.
ENQ Reply Delay
Set the period to delay status reply to status request ENQ.
◦
Not available if you have selected [Status4] in the [Flow Control] menu.
285
[Network]
Status4 Cyclic Response
Set the interval for the cyclic status response.
◦
Available only if you have selected [Status4] in the [Flow Control] menu.
BCC
Set the BCC check function.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Status5] in the [Flow Control] menu.
Roles of Port1 to Port3
In the socket server function of TCP/IP, either of the following connection methods can be used.
The ports to be used and their roles change depending on the connection method and communication
protocol.
Two-port connection
Port1 is used for receiving print data, and Port2 is used for returning the product status.
Two-port connection is available when the communication protocol is Status4.
One-port connection
One port is used for both receiving print data and returning the product status.
When the communication protocol is Status4, Port3 is used.
When the communication protocol is Status3 or Status5, Port1 or Port3 is used.
286
[Port1]
Set the port number of Port1.
For the two-port connection of Status4, this port is used for receiving print data. For the one-port
connection of Status3/Status5, this port is used for both receiving print data and returning the product
status.
The setting range is from 1 to 65535.
•
Each port (1, 2 and 3) must be set to different values.
•
Set a port number not used by other services. If port numbers that overlap with those
used by other services are used, communication cannot be performed properly.
[Port2]
Set the port number of Port2.
For the two-port connection of Status4, this port is used for returning the product status.
The setting range is from 1 to 65535.
•
Each port (1, 2 and 3) must be set to different values.
•
Set a port number not used by other services. If port numbers that overlap with those
used by other services are used, communication cannot be performed properly.
287
[Network]
•
This setting is disabled when AEP mode is enabled.
[Port3]
Set the port number of Port3.
For the one-port connection of Status3/Status4/Status5, this port is used for both receiving print data
and returning the product status.
The setting range is from 1 to 65535.
•
Each port (1, 2 and 3) must be set to different values.
•
Set a port number not used by other services. If port numbers that overlap with those
used by other services are used, communication cannot be performed properly.
•
You can change the return status format of port3 to Compatible mode by enabling
[Legacy Status for Port 9100].
[Flow Control]
Set the communication protocol.
The options are as follows:
•
[Status4]
288
•
[Status4 ENQ]
•
[Status3]
•
[Status5]
•
[None]
[TCP Connection Queue]
Set whether to allow queuing for connection when multiple hosts or applications are sending
connection requests to the product.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
While connecting with one host or application, the product can receive connection requests from
other hosts or applications. The subsequent connection requests are put on hold, and processed
in order of reception after the first connection is closed.
Disabled
While connecting with one host or application, the product cannot receive connection requests
from other hosts or applications.
•
When you have selected [Enabled], be sure to use one port connection for Status3,
Status4, and Status5. Operation using two port connections for Status4 is not
guaranteed.
289
[Network]
[Legacy Status for Port 9100]
Set whether to change the return status format of port3 to legacy status.
Does not appear if you have selected [None] in the [Flow Control] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Change the return status format of port3 to legacy status.
Disabled
Do not change the return status format of port3 to legacy status.
In legacy status, the return status format of port3 becomes as follows:
Status3
Mode
Data format
Normal
([Legacy
Status
for Port
9100] is
[Disabled])
Legacy
status
([Legacy
Status for
Port 9100]
is [Enabled])
Status4
290
Mode
Data format
Normal
([Legacy
Status
for Port
9100] is
[Disabled])
Legacy
status
([Legacy
Status for
Port 9100]
is [Enabled])
Status5
Mode
Data format
Normal
([Legacy
Status
for Port
9100] is
[Disabled])
Legacy
status
([Legacy
Status for
Port 9100]
is [Enabled])
291
[Network]
[ENQ Reply Delay]
Set the period to delay status reply to status request ENQ.
The target interfaces are LAN and Wireless LAN.
The target statuses are Status3, Status4 ENQ reply, and Status5.
The setting range is from 0 to 9999 ms.
•
Normally, keep this setting at the default value.
[Status4 Cyclic Response]
Set the interval for the cyclic status response.
The target interfaces are LAN and Wireless LAN.
The target status is Status4 reply cycle.
The setting range is from 100 to 999 ms.
292
[BCC]
Enable or disable the BCC check function.
Appears only if you have selected [Status5] in the [Flow Control] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the BCC check function.
Disabled
Disable the BCC check function.
[NTP]
Set the functions for NTP.
The NTP function gets the time information from the NTP server through the network and sets the time
of the product.
The setting items are as follows:
Enable
Enable or disable the functions for NTP.
293
[Network]
Error
Set to show the NTP error message if detected.
Time Server IP
Set the IP address of the NTP server.
[Enable]
Enable or disable the functions for NTP.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the NTP function.
Disabled
Disable the NTP function.
[Error]
Set to show the NTP error message if detected.
The options are as follows:
294
Enabled
Shows the error message.
Disabled
Does not show the error message.
[Time Server IP]
Set the IP address of the NTP server.
The setting range is as follows:
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
The IP address should normally be set to 0.0.0.0 (the default value). For the default value, the global
NTP servers are assigned automatically. Set to a valid IP if the time synchronization is requested for a
specific server.
[LPD]
Set the functions for LPD.
The setting items are as follows:
295
[Network]
Enable
Enable or disable the LPD function.
DNS Lookup
Enable or disable the DNS Lookup function.
[Enable]
Enable or disable the LPD function.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the LPD function.
Disabled
Disable the LPD function.
[DNS Lookup]
Enable or disable the DNS Lookup function.
The options are as follows:
296
Enabled
Enable the DNS Lookup function.
Disabled
Disable the DNS Lookup function.
[FTP]
Set the functions for FTP.
The setting items are as follows:
Enable
Enable or disable the functions for FTP.
FTP Timeout
Set the connection timeout period between the product's FTP server and clients.
[Enable]
Enable or disable the functions for FTP.
The options are as follows:
297
[Network]
Enabled
Enable the FTP function.
Disabled
Disable the FTP function.
[FTP Timeout]
Set the connection timeout period between the product's FTP server and clients.
Specify the maximum number of seconds that the product's FTP server will allow clients to stay
connected without receiving any data on either the control or data connection.
The setting range is from 10 to 3600 seconds.
[SNMP]
Set the functions for SNMP.
The SNMP function enables you to monitor and manage a UDP/IP based network.
The setting items are as follows:
sysContact
Set the contact information.
298
sysName
Set the name information.
sysLocation
Set the location information.
prtMarkerCounterUnit
Set the unit to use for reporting counter values for subunits.
Agent
Set the Agent function.
Traps
Set the Traps function.
[sysContact]
Set the contact information.
You can enter 0 to 255 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
[sysName]
Set the name information.
You can enter 0 to 255 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
299
[Network]
[sysLocation]
Set the location information.
You can enter 0 to 255 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
[prtMarkerCounterUnit]
Set the unit to use for reporting counter values for subunits.
The options are as follows:
impressions
Report the number of printed labels.
meters
Report the length of printed labels in meters.
300
[Agent]
Set the Agent function.
The setting items are as follows:
Enable
Use the Agent function.
Read-Only
Set the read-only function.
Read-Write
Set the read-write function.
[Enable]
Enable or disable the functions for Agent.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the functions for Agent.
301
[Network]
Disabled
Disable the functions for Agent.
[Read-Only]
Set the read-only function.
The setting items are as follows:
SNMP Version
Set the SNMP version.
Community
Set the read-only community name.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [1|2c] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
User
Set the read-only user name.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
User Security
Set the read-only security level.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
Authentication Protocol
Set the authentication protocol.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
Authentication Passphrase
Set the authentication passphrase.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
302
Privacy Protocol
Set the privacy protocol.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
Privacy Passphrase
Set the privacy passphrase.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
[SNMP Version]
Set the SNMP version.
The options are as follows:
•
[1|2c|3]
•
[1|2c]
•
[3]
•
[Disabled]
[Community]
303
[Network]
Set the read-only community name.
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [1|2c] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
You can enter 1 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: public
[User]
Set the read-only user name.
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
You can enter 1 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: rouser
[User Security]
Set the read-only security level.
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[None]
•
[Authentication]
•
[Privacy]
304
[Authentication Protocol]
Set the authentication protocol.
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[MD5]
•
[SHA]
[Authentication Passphrase]
Set the authentication passphrase.
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
You can enter 8 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: mypassword
305
[Network]
[Privacy Protocol]
Set the privacy protocol.
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[DES]
•
[AES]
[Privacy Passphrase]
Set the privacy passphrase.
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
You can enter 8 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: mypassword
306
[Read-Write]
Set the read-write function.
The setting items are as follows:
SNMP Version
Set the SNMP version.
Community
Set the read-write community name.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [1|2c] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
User
Set the read-write user name.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
User Security
Set the read-write security level.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
Authentication Protocol
Set the authentication protocol.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
Authentication Passphrase
Set the authentication passphrase.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
Privacy Protocol
Set the privacy protocol.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
307
[Network]
Privacy Passphrase
Set the privacy passphrase.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
[SNMP Version]
Set the SNMP version.
The options are as follows:
•
[1|2c|3]
•
[1|2c]
•
[3]
•
[Disabled]
[Community]
Set the read-write community name.
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [1|2c] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
You can enter 1 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
308
Initial setting: private
[User]
Set the read-write user name.
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
You can enter 1 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: rwuser
[User Security]
Set the read-write security level.
Appears only if you have selected [1|2c|3] or [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[None]
•
[Authentication]
•
[Privacy]
309
[Network]
[Authentication Protocol]
Set the authentication protocol.
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[MD5]
•
[SHA]
[Authentication Passphrase]
Set the authentication passphrase.
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
You can enter 8 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: mypassword
310
[Privacy Protocol]
Set the privacy protocol.
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[DES]
•
[AES]
[Privacy Passphrase]
Set the privacy passphrase.
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [User Security] menu.
You can enter 8 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: mypassword
311
[Network]
[Traps]
If [SNMP Version] is [1]
If [SNMP Version] is [3]
If [Security] is [Privacy]
Set the Traps function.
The setting items are as follows:
312
Enable
Enable the Traps function.
SNMP Version
Set the SNMP version.
IP Version
Set the IP version to use for trap destinations.
Destinations
Set the number of trap destinations.
Destination 1
Set address 1 for the trap destination.
Destination 2
Set address 2 for the trap destination.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [2] or [3] in the [Destinations] menu.
Destination 3
Set address 3 for the trap destination.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [3] in the [Destinations] menu.
Community
Set the Traps community name.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [1] or [2c] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
User
Set the Traps user name.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
Engine ID
Set the engine ID.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
Security
Set the security level.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
Authentication Protocol
Set the authentication protocol.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [Security] menu.
313
[Network]
Authentication Passphrase
Set the authentication passphrase.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [Security] menu.
Privacy Protocol
Set the privacy protocol.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [Security] menu.
Privacy Passphrase
Set the privacy passphrase.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [Security] menu.
[Enable]
Enable or disable the functions for Traps.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the Traps function.
Disabled
Disable the Traps function.
314
[SNMP Version]
Set the SNMP version.
The options are as follows:
•
[1]
•
[2c]
•
[3]
[IP Version]
Set the IP version to use for trap destinations.
The options are as follows:
4
Set the IP version to IPv4.
6
Set the IP version to IPv6.
315
[Network]
[Destinations]
Set the number of trap destinations.
The setting range is from 1 to 3.
[Destination 1]
Set address 1 for the trap destination.
The displayed IP version differs depending on the [IP Version] setting.
316
[Destination 2]
Set address 2 for the trap destination.
The displayed IP version differs depending on the [IP Version] setting.
Appears only if you have selected [2] or [3] in the [Destinations] menu.
[Destination 3]
Set address 3 for the trap destination.
The displayed IP version differs depending on the [IP Version] setting.
Appears only if you have selected [3] in the [Destinations] menu.
317
[Network]
[Community]
Set the Traps community name.
Appears only if you have selected [1] or [2c] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
You can enter 1 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: trapcom
[User]
Set the Traps user name.
Appears only if you have selected [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
You can enter 1 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: trapuser
318
[Engine ID]
Set the engine ID.
Appears only if you have selected [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
Initial setting: Created from the MAC address.
Hexadecimal characters are allowed and the range is from 10 to 64 characters. (Only an even number
of characters is allowed.)
[Security]
Set the security level.
Appears only if you have selected [3] in the [SNMP Version] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[None]
•
[Authentication]
•
[Privacy]
319
[Network]
[Authentication Protocol]
Set the authentication protocol.
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [Security] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[MD5]
•
[SHA]
[Authentication Passphrase]
Set the authentication passphrase.
Appears only if you have selected [Authentication] or [Privacy] in the [Security] menu.
You can enter 8 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: mypassword
320
[Privacy Protocol]
Set the privacy protocol.
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [Security] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[DES]
•
[AES]
[Privacy Passphrase]
Set the privacy passphrase.
Appears only if you have selected [Privacy] in the [Security] menu.
You can enter 8 to 32 characters. Alphabets, numbers and symbols can be used.
Initial setting: mypassword
321
[Network]
[Online Services] (SOS users only)
Set the functions for SOS (SATO Online Services).
To use SOS Real-Time and On-Demand periodic notification, it is necessary to first create an SOS
account and add the product.
The setting items are as follows:
SOS Mode
Selects the mode for SOS or disable SOS.
Allow Remote Control
Sets whether to allow setting the product (remote control) from SOS.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Real-Time] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
MQTT Protocol
Set the communication method for MQTT.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Real-Time] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
Add Device
Shows the serial number and association code that are necessary when adding the product to
SOS.
◦
Appears if you have selected other than [Disabled] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
Copy Log Files
Copies an SOS log file to USB memory.
◦
Appears if you have selected other than [Disabled] in the [SOS Mode] menu. It is available only
when the log data is in the product and the USB memory is inserted into the product.
Contact Information
Sets the SOS contact information that is displayed at the time of the error outbreak.
◦
Appears if you have selected other than [Disabled] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
322
Periodic Notification
Sets the functions for periodic SOS notifications.
A specialized application is required to scan the QR code displayed on the screen of this function.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
Update Screen
Sets whether or not to print the QR code displayed with the regular notification or with SOS
update.
A specialized application is required to scan the QR code.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
QR code offset
Adjusts the print position for printing a QR code displayed on the notification screen for SOS
(SATO Online Services).
◦
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
Daily Checkup
Shows the current product information with a QR code. Scan the QR code with a tablet or
smartphone, and send it to the SOS cloud.
NFC connection can be used for Android device to acquire the product's information.
A specialized application is required to scan the QR code or acquire the product's information with
NFC connection.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
[SOS Mode] (SOS users only)
Select or disable the SOS (SATO Online Services) mode.
The options are as follows:
323
[Network]
Disabled
Disables SOS.
On-Demand
Shows the product information with a QR code. Scan the displayed QR code with a tablet or
smartphone and send the information to the SOS cloud. This connection allows you to check the
product's operating information via SOS Web.
NFC connection can be used for Android device to acquire the product's information.
A specialized SOS application is required to scan the QR code or to read NFC.
Real-Time
Sends the product information to the SOS cloud in real-time using a LAN/wireless LAN
connection. This connection allows you to check the product's operating information and to check
or modify the product's settings via SOS Web.
A confirmation screen appears if you select [Real-Time]. To agree with the Terms of Use and
enable the Real-Time mode, press the
button.
Light
Sends the product information to the SOS cloud in real-time using the LAN/wireless LAN
connection. This connection allows you to check the product's operating information via SOS
Web.
[Allow Remote Control] (SOS users only)
Set whether to allow setting the product (remote control) from SOS (SATO Online Services).
Appears only if you have selected [Real-Time] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
The options are as follows:
Deny
Does not allow remote control from SOS.
Until Reboot
Allows remote control from SOS until the product reboots.
Always
Always allows remote control from SOS.
324
[MQTT Protocol] (SOS users only)
Set the communication method for MQTT.
Appears only if you have selected [Real-Time] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
The options are as follows:
MQTT
Set when performing MQTT communication by using 443 and 8883 ports.
MQTT over WebSocket
Set when performing MQTT communication by using only 443 port. The proxy server cannot be
used.
[Add Device] (SOS users only)
Shows the serial number and association code that are necessary when adding the product to SOS
(SATO Online Services).
Appears if you have selected other than [Disabled] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
•
To add a product to SOS, refer to the Printer setup manual.
https://www.sato-sos.com/en/support/index.html#print_preparation_manual
325
[Network]
[Copy Log Files] (SOS users only)
Copies SOS (SATO Online Services) log files to USB memory.
Appears if you have selected other than [Disabled] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
It is available only when the log data is in the product and the USB memory is inserted into the
product.
•
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
product. SATO Corporation cannot be held responsible for any product malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
The procedure to copy the log file is as follows:
1. Select the file to copy and press the
file name.
2. After you select the file, press the
button. A check mark is shown on the right side of the
button to copy the selected file to the USB memory.
[Contact Information] (SOS users only)
326
Sets the SOS (SATO Online Services) contact information that is displayed at the time of the error
outbreak.
Appears if you have selected other than [Disabled] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
The setting items are as follows:
Phone Number
Sets the phone number that is displayed on the SOS error screen when you select the SOS icon
on an error message screen.
[Phone Number] (SOS users only)
Sets the phone number that is displayed on the SOS error screen when you select the SOS (SATO
Online Services) icon on an error message screen.
Up to 20 characters can be set.
[Periodic Notification] (SOS users only)
When [Counter] is set with [Head] in the [Type] menu
Sets the function for periodic SOS (SATO Online Services) notifications.
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
In this function, the product information is shown periodically with a QR code. Scan the displayed QR
code with a tablet or smartphone, and send the information to the SOS cloud.
327
[Network]
A specialized application is required to scan the QR code.
The setting items are as follows:
Type
Select the timing to perform the periodic notification or disable this function.
Counter
You can select the counter for the print head, cutter, or both for the timing to perform the periodic
notification.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Counter] in the [Type] menu.
Head
You can specify or check the print distance of the print head for the timing to perform the periodic
notification.
◦
Appears only if you have set [Counter] with [Head] or [Head+Cutter] in the [Type] menu.
Cutter
You can specify or check the number of cut times of the cutter for the timing to perform the
periodic notification.
◦
Appears only if you have set [Counter] with [Cutter] or [Head+Cutter] in the [Type] menu.
Notifications
Specifies the number of periodic notifications to be sent per day.
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you
have selected [Daily] in the [Type] menu.
Weekday
Specifies the day of the week to perform the periodic notification.
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you
have selected [Weekly] in the [Type] menu.
Day
Sets the date to perform the periodic notification.
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you
have selected [Monthly] in the [Type] menu.
Time 1
Specifies the time to perform the first periodic notification.
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you
have selected [Daily] in the [Type] menu.
Time 2
Specifies the time to perform the second periodic notification.
328
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you
have selected [Daily] in the [Type] menu and have set more than two times for [Notifications].
Time 3
Specifies the time to perform the third periodic notification.
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you
have selected [Daily] in the [Type] menu and have set three times for [Notifications].
Time
Specifies the time of the specified day or date to perform periodic notifications.
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you
have selected [Weekly] or [Monthly] in the [Type] menu.
[Type] (SOS users only)
Select the timing to perform the periodic notification or disable this function.
Advanced setting items appear on the [Periodic Notification] menu according to the selected options.
The options are as follows:
Disabled
Disables the periodic notification function.
Daily
Displays the notification screen every day for specified number of times, at the specified time.
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit.
Weekly
Displays the notification screen every week at the specified day of week and time.
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit.
329
[Network]
Monthly
Displays the notification screen every month at the specified day and time.
◦
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit.
Counter
Displays the notification screen when the counter of a consumable reaches to the specified value.
Offline
Displays the notification screen when the product is changed to Offline mode.
[Counter] (SOS users only)
You can select the counter for the print head, cutter, or both for the timing to perform the periodic
notification.
Appears only if you have selected [Counter] in the [Type] menu.
Advanced setting items appear on the [Periodic Notification] menu according to the selected options.
The options are as follows:
•
[Head]
•
[Cutter]
•
[Head+Cutter]
330
[Head] (SOS users only)
You can specify or check the print distance of the print head for the timing to perform the periodic
notification.
Appears only if you have selected [Head] or [Head+Cutter] for [Counter] in the [Type] menu.
The setting items are as follows:
Meters
Specifies the print distance of the print head for the timing to perform the periodic notification.
Last Update
Shows the print distance of the print head for the last periodic notification.
Next Update
Shows the print distance of the print head for the next periodic notification.
Current Value
Shows the current print distance of the print head.
[Meters] (SOS users only)
Specifies the print distance of the print head for the timing to perform the periodic notification. You will
be notified for every meter you specify.
331
[Network]
The setting range is from 1 to 100,000.
[Cutter] (SOS users only)
You can specify or check the number of cut times of the cutter for the timing to perform the periodic
notification.
Appears only if you have selected [Cutter] or [Head+Cutter] for [Counter] in the [Type] menu.
The setting items are as follows:
Cuts
Specifies the number of cut times of the cutter for the timing to perform the periodic notification.
Last Update
Shows the number of cut times of the cutter for the last periodic notification.
Next Update
Shows the number of cut times of the cutter for the next periodic notification.
Current Value
Shows the current number of cut times of the cutter.
[Cuts] (SOS users only)
332
Specifies the number of cut times of the cutter for the timing to perform the periodic notification. You
will be notified for each number of cut times you specify.
The setting range is from 1 to 1000000.
[Notifications] (SOS users only)
Specifies the number of periodic notifications to be sent per day.
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you have
selected [Daily] in the [Type] menu.
The setting range is from 1 to 3.
[Weekday] (SOS users only)
Specifies the day of the week to perform the periodic notification.
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you have
selected [Weekly] in the [Type] menu.
The setting range is from Sunday to Saturday.
333
[Network]
[Day] (SOS users only)
Sets the date to perform the periodic notification.
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you have
selected [Monthly] in the [Type] menu.
The setting range is from 1 to 28.
[Time 1] (SOS users only)
Specifies the time to perform the first periodic notification.
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you have
selected [Daily] in the [Type] menu.
334
[Time 2] (SOS users only)
Specifies the time to perform the second periodic notification.
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you have
selected [Daily] in the [Type] menu and have set more than two times for [Notifications].
[Time 3] (SOS users only)
Specifies the time to perform the third periodic notification.
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you have
selected [Daily] in the [Type] menu and have set three times for [Notifications].
335
[Network]
[Time] (SOS users only)
Specifies the time of the specified day or date to perform periodic notifications.
Appears only if you have enabled the NTP function or installed the optional RTC kit, and if you have
selected [Weekly] or [Monthly] in the [Type] menu.
[Update Screen] (SOS users only)
Sets whether to print a QR code displayed with SOS (SATO Online Services) periodic notification or
SOS update.
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
A specialized application is required to scan the QR code.
The options are as follows:
Normal
Shows the scan screen of a normal QR code.
Print
Prints with the scan screen for the QR code. Press the
button to print the QR code.
To print the QR code, use media of more than 33 mm (1.3") in length and more than 33 mm (1.3")
in width (not including the liner).
336
[QR code offset] (SOS users only)
Adjust the print position for printing a QR code displayed on the notification screen for SOS (SATO
Online Services).
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
Available only if you have selected [Print] in the [Update Screen] menu.
The options are as follows:
Vertical
Adjust the print position of the QR code in the vertical direction.
Horizontal
Adjust the print position of the QR code in the horizontal direction.
[Vertical] (SOS users only)
Adjust the print position of the QR code for SOS (SATO Online Services) in the vertical direction.
337
[Network]
Set the correction value from the standard printing position as "+" for the direction opposite to the
media feed and "-" for the direction of the media feed.
(1) Feed direction
The setting range is from -792 to +792 dots.
•
The length of 1 dot varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
◦
203 dpi : 1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049")
◦
305 dpi : 1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033")
◦
609 dpi : 1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017")
[Horizontal] (SOS users only)
Adjust the print position of the QR code for SOS (SATO Online Services) in the horizontal direction.
338
Set the correction value from the standard printing position when facing the product as "+" to adjust to
the left side and "-" to adjust to the right side.
(1) Feed direction
The setting range is from -792 to +792 dots.
•
The length of 1 dot varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
◦
203 dpi : 1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049")
◦
305 dpi : 1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033")
◦
609 dpi : 1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017")
[Daily Checkup] (SOS users only)
Shows the current product information with a QR code. Scan the QR code with a tablet or smartphone,
and send it to the SOS cloud.
NFC connection can be used for Android device to acquire the product's information.
Appears only if you have selected [On-Demand] in the [SOS Mode] menu.
A specialized application is required to scan the QR code or acquire the product's information with
NFC connection.
339
[Network]
If you have selected [Print] in the [Update Screen], press the
button to print the QR code.
To print the QR code, use media of more than 33 mm (1.3") in length and more than 33 mm (1.3") in
width (not including the liner).
[Advanced]
Set the advanced function for the interface.
The setting items are as follows:
ARP Announcement
Set the ARP announcement.
Firewall
Set the functions for the firewall.
[ARP Announcement]
Set the functions for ARP announcement.
The ARP announcement is useful for updating other hosts mapping of a hardware address when the
IP address or MAC address of the sender has changed.
The setting items are as follows:
340
Additional
Enable or disable the additional ARP announcement.
Periodic
Set the periodic timing for ARP announcement.
[Additional]
Set the additional ARP announcement.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the additional ARP announcement. The ARP is sent at 1, 2, 4, 8 and 16 seconds after the
link up/DHCP assignment.
Disabled
Disable the additional ARP announcement. The ARP is only sent at 1 second after the link up/
DHCP assignment.
[Periodic]
Set the interval of the ARP announcement in the range of 0 to 600 seconds.
341
[Network]
Initial setting: 0
[Firewall]
Set the functions for the firewall.
A firewall can improve security. It prevents unauthorized access from external computers or malicious
programs. When the firewall is enabled, only the services and ports that are allowed will be able to
access the product.
•
As a basic policy of filtering, all OUTPUT is allowed (ACCEPT) and both INPUT and
FORWARD are not allowed (DROP).
The setting items are as follows:
Enable
Enable or disable the firewall function.
Allow Services And Ports
Set the service or port to allow communication.
◦
Available only if you have selected [Enabled] in the [Enable] menu.
Custom Settings
Specify the ICMP type or the port number of TCP or UDP to allow communication.
◦
Available only if you have selected [Enabled] in the [Enable] menu.
342
[Enable]
Enable or disable the firewall function.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the firewall function.
Disabled
Disable the firewall function.
[Allow Services And Ports]
Set the service or port to allow communication.
Available only if you have selected [Enabled] in the [Enable] menu.
•
The product becomes accessible only through services or ports that are allowed in
[Allow Services And Ports].
The setting items are as follows:
Data Ports
Enable or disable access through data ports.
343
[Network]
FTP
Enable or disable the functions for FTP.
The setting changes in conjunction with [Enable] in the [FTP] menu.
LPD
Enable or disable the LPD function.
The setting changes in conjunction with [Enable] in the [LPD] menu.
MAILC
When using the AEP (Application Enabled Printing) function, enable or disable port access for the
product's internal e-mail client function.
NTP
Enable or disable the functions for NTP.
The setting changes in conjunction with [Enable] in the [NTP] menu.
Online Services
Selects the mode for SOS or disable SOS.
The setting changes in conjunction with [SOS Mode].
PING
Enable or disable PING access.
SATO All-In-One Tool
Enable or disable the access from SATO All-In-One Tool.
SCP
When using the AEP (Application Enabled Printing) function, enable or disable port access for the
SCP client function.
SNMP Agent
Enable or disable the SNMP Agent function.
The setting changes in conjunction with [Enable] in the [Agent] menu.
WEBC
When using the AEP (Application Enabled Printing) function, enable or disable port access for the
Web client function.
WebConfig
Enable or disable access to the web configuration page.
The below table shows the packet filtering setting for each allowed services and port setting.
[Allow
Services
And Ports]
[TCP Source
Port]
[TCP
Destination
Port]
[UDP
Source
Port]
[UDP
Destination
Port]
[ICMP Type]
[Data Ports] *
-
1024,1025,9100
-
-
-
[FTP]
-
20,21
-
-
-
[LPD]
-
515
53
-
-
[MAILC]
465,587
-
53
-
-
344
[Allow
Services
And Ports]
[TCP Source
Port]
[TCP
Destination
Port]
[UDP
Source
Port]
[UDP
Destination
Port]
[ICMP Type]
[NTP]
-
-
53,123
-
-
[Online
Services]*
443,8883
-
53
-
-
[PING]
-
-
-
-
0,8
[SATO All-InOne Tool]
-
9100
-
161,19541
-
[SCP]
22
-
53
-
-
[SNMP
Agent]
-
-
-
161
-
[WEBC]
80,443,8080
-
53
-
-
[WebConfig]
-
80,443
-
-
-
*The values may vary depending on other settings.
[Online Services] (SOS users only)
Select or disable the SOS (SATO Online Services) mode.
The options are as follows:
Disabled
Disable SOS.
On-Demand
Shows the product information with a QR code. Scan the displayed QR code with a tablet or
smartphone, and send the information to the SOS cloud. This connection allows you to check the
product's operating information via SOS Web.
NFC connection can be used for Android device to acquire the product's information.
A specialized application is required to scan the QR code or acquire the product's information with
NFC connection.
345
[Network]
Real-Time
Sends the product information to the SOS cloud in real-time using a LAN/wireless LAN
connection. This connection allows you to check the product's operating information and to check
or modify the product's settings via SOS Web.
A confirmation screen appears if you select [Real-Time]. To agree with the Terms of Use and
enable the Real-Time mode, press the
button.
Light
Sends the product information to the SOS cloud in real-time using the LAN/wireless LAN
connection. This connection allows you to check the product's operating information via SOS
Web.
•
The setting changes in conjunction with [SOS Mode].
[Custom Settings]
Specify the ICMP type or the port number of TCP or UDP to allow communication.
Available only if you have selected [Enabled] in the [Enable] menu.
The setting items are as follows:
TCP Source Port
Register the TCP source port number to allow communication.
TCP Destination Port
Register the TCP destination port number to allow communication.
UDP Source Port
Register the UDP source port number to allow communication.
UDP Destination Port
Register the UDP destination port number to allow communication.
ICMP Type
Register the ICMP type to allow communication.
346
[TCP Source Port]
Existing Port No.
The port number of the items enabled in [Allow Services And Ports] are shown.
Additional Port No.
Register the TCP source port number to allow communication.
[Additional Port No.]
Register the TCP source port number to allow communication.
The acceptable input values are as follows:
Active port number
An integer from 1 to 65535
Specifying multiple values
Delimit active port numbers using a comma “,”
Specifying a range
Create a range of active port numbers using a colon “:” (Input in the
order of low port number: high port number)
Maximum number of
specifications
21 ports in total by specifying with either numbers or a range
347
[Network]
No setting
Blank
Input Example
Port number
Comments
10000
-
10000,10001,10002,10003
This results in the same ports in both settings to
be allowed.
10000:10003
10000,10001,10002,10003,20000
10000:10003,20000
Blank
This results in the same ports in both settings to
be allowed.
Keep it blank when no setting is needed
[TCP Destination Port]
Existing Port No.
The port number of the items enabled in [Allow Services And Ports] are shown.
Additional Port No.
Register the TCP destination port number to allow communication.
348
[Additional Port No.]
Register the TCP destination port number to allow communication.
The acceptable input values are as follows:
Active port number
An integer from 1 to 65535
Specifying multiple values
Delimit active port numbers using a comma “,”
Specifying a range
Create a range of active port numbers using a colon “:” (Input in the
order of low port number: high port number)
Maximum number of
specifications
21 ports in total by specifying with either numbers or a range
No setting
Blank
Input Example
Port number
Comments
10000
-
10000,10001,10002,10003
This results in the same ports in both settings to
be allowed.
10000:10003
10000,10001,10002,10003,20000
10000:10003,20000
Blank
This results in the same ports in both settings to
be allowed.
Keep it blank when no setting is needed
349
[Network]
[UDP Source Port]
Existing Port No.
The port number of the items enabled in [Allow Services And Ports] are shown.
Additional Port No.
Register the UDP source port number to allow communication.
[Additional Port No.]
Register the UDP source port number to allow communication.
The acceptable input values are as follows:
Active port number
An integer from 1 to 65535
Specifying multiple values
Delimit active port numbers using a comma “,”
Specifying a range
Create a range of active port numbers using a colon “:” (Input in the
order of low port number: high port number)
Maximum number of
specifications
21 ports in total by specifying with either numbers or a range
350
No setting
Blank
Input Example
Port number
Comments
10000
-
10000,10001,10002,10003
This results in the same ports in both settings to
be allowed.
10000:10003
10000,10001,10002,10003,20000
10000:10003,20000
Blank
This results in the same ports in both settings to
be allowed.
Keep it blank when no setting is needed
[UDP Destination Port]
Existing Port No.
The port number of the items enabled in [Allow Services And Ports] are shown.
Additional Port No.
Register the UDP destination port number to allow communication.
351
[Network]
[Additional Port No.]
Register the UDP destination port number to allow communication.
The acceptable input values are as follows:
Active port number
An integer from 1 to 65535
Specifying multiple values
Delimit active port numbers using a comma “,”
Specifying a range
Create a range of active port numbers using a colon “:” (Input in the
order of low port number: high port number)
Maximum number of
specifications
21 ports in total by specifying with either numbers or a range
No setting
Blank
Input Example
Port number
Comments
10000
-
10000,10001,10002,10003
This results in the same ports in both settings to
be allowed.
10000:10003
10000,10001,10002,10003,20000
10000:10003,20000
Blank
This results in the same ports in both settings to
be allowed.
Keep it blank when no setting is needed
352
[ICMP Type]
Existing ICMP Type
The ICMP type number of the items enabled in [Allow Services And Ports] are shown.
Additional ICMP Type
Register the ICMP type number to allow communication.
[Additional ICMP Type]
Register the ICMP type number to allow communication.
The acceptable input values are as follows:
Active ICMP type
An integer from 0 to 43
Specifying multiple values
Delimit active ICMP types using a comma “,”
Maximum number of
specifications
44 ports
No setting
Blank
353
[IEEE1284]
Input Example
ICMP type
Comments
0
-
0,1,2,3
-
Blank
Keep it blank when no setting is needed
[IEEE1284]
Set the IEEE1284 connection.
Appears only if the combo interface board is installed.
The setting items are as follows:
Flow Control
Set the communication protocol.
BCC
Set the BCC check function.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Status5] in the [Flow Control] menu.
354
[Flow Control]
Set the communication protocol.
The options are as follows:
•
[Status4 Multi]
•
[Status5]
•
[None]
[BCC]
Enable or disable the BCC check function.
Appears only if you have selected [Status5] in the [Flow Control] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the BCC check function.
Disabled
Disable the BCC check function.
355
[RS-232C]
[RS-232C]
Set the RS-232C connection.
Appears only if the combo interface board is installed.
The setting items are as follows:
Baudrate
Set the communication speed.
Parameters
Set the data parameters.
Flow Control
Set the communication protocol.
BCC
Set the BCC check function.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [STATUS5] in the [Flow Control] menu.
•
When [Tools] > [Barcode Checker] > [Settings] > [Mode] is set to other than [Disabled],
the following messeage appears on the screen.
"Reader is set for RS232C connection destination. Please check the setting of barcode
checker."
•
When [Tools] > [Barcode Checker] > [Test] > [Interface] is set to [RS-232C Reader],
you cannot change the [RS-232C] menus.
356
[Baudrate]
Set the baudrate (bps).
Available to change only if you have selected [RS-232C] in the [Tools] > [Barcode Checker] > [Test] >
[Interface] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[2400]
•
[4800]
•
[9600]
•
[19200]
•
[38400]
•
[57600]
•
[115200]
[Parameters]
Set the data parameters.
Available to change only if you have selected [RS-232C] in the [Tools] > [Barcode Checker] > [Test] >
[Interface] menu.
The options are as follows:
357
[RS-232C]
Refer to the table below for the parameter configurations.
•
[8-N-1]
•
[8-O-1]
•
[8-E-1]
•
[8-N-2]
•
[8-O-2]
•
[8-E-2]
•
[7-N-1]
•
[7-O-1]
•
[7-E-1]
•
[7-N-2]
•
[7-O-2]
•
[7-E-2]
Parameter Configurations List
Parameters
Data length
Parity
(bit)
Stop bit
(bit)
8-N-1
8
NONE
1
8-O-1
8
ODD
1
8-E-1
8
EVEN
1
8-N-2
8
NONE
2
8-O-2
8
ODD
2
8-E-2
8
EVEN
2
7-N-1
7
NONE
1
7-O-1
7
ODD
1
7-E-1
7
EVEN
1
7-N-2
7
NONE
2
7-O-2
7
ODD
2
7-E-2
7
EVEN
2
358
[Flow Control]
Set the communication protocol.
Available to change only if you have selected [RS-232C] in the [Tools] > [Barcode Checker] > [Test] >
[Interface] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[READY/BUSY Multi]
•
[XON/XOFF Multi]
•
[STATUS4]
•
[STATUS3]
•
[STATUS5]
•
[None]
[BCC]
Enable or disable the BCC check function.
Appears only if you have selected [RS-232C] in the [Tools] > [Barcode Checker] > [Test] > [Interface]
menu and if you have selected [STATUS5] in the [Flow Control] menu.
The options are as follows:
359
[USB]
Enabled
Enable the BCC check function.
Disabled
Disable the BCC check function.
[USB]
Set the USB connection.
The setting items are as follows:
Flow Control
Set the communication protocol.
BCC
Set the BCC check function.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Status5] in the [Flow Control] menu.
Change USB Serial
Set the type of the USB serial number that the product returns.
360
[Flow Control]
Set the communication protocol.
The options are as follows:
•
[Status4]
•
[Status5]
•
[None]
[BCC]
Enable or disable the BCC check function.
Appears only if you have selected [Status5] in the [Flow Control] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the BCC check function.
Disabled
Disable the BCC check function.
361
[Bluetooth]
[Change USB Serial]
Set the type of the USB serial number that the product returns.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Returns the USB serial number (00000000).
This option is suitable when you want to replace the product without adding a new printer driver.
To do so, you need to set this setting to enabled before installing the product.
Disabled
Returns the factory set USB serial number (unique to each product).
This option is suitable when you want to set the printer driver for each product.
•
If two products that have the same USB serial number connected to the same
computer, it may cause the computer to show a blue screen error.
[Bluetooth]
Set the Bluetooth connection.
362
The setting items are as follows:
Enable
Enable or disable the functions for Bluetooth.
Name
Set the device name for the product.
PIN Code
Set the PIN code.
BD Address
Shows the BD address of the product. (You cannot change this address.)
Firm Version
Shows the firmware version of the Bluetooth. (You cannot change this value.)
Host BD Addr
Check the Host BD address.
Authentication
Set the authentication level.
ISI
Set the ISI communication parameter.
ISW
Set the ISW communication parameter.
PSI
Set the PSI communication parameter.
PSW
Set the PSW communication parameter.
CRC Mode
Set the CRC check function.
Flow Control
Set the communication protocol.
363
[Bluetooth]
[Enable]
Enable or disable the functions for Bluetooth.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the Bluetooth function.
Disabled
Disable the Bluetooth function.
[Name]
Set the device name for the product.
You can enter 1 to 53 characters. Alphabets (capital and small letters), numbers and symbols can be
used.
364
[PIN Code]
Set the PIN code.
You can enter 4 to 16 characters for the PIN code. Alphabets (capital and small letters), numbers and
symbols can be used.
[Authentication]
Set the authentication level.
The options are as follows:
None
None
Level 2-1
PIN code authentication, service level, no encryption
Level 2-2
PIN code authentication, service level, encryption
Level 3
PIN code authentication, link level, no encryption
365
[Bluetooth]
Level 4
Secure Simple Pairing compatible, service level, encryption (Can be communicated with devices
that are not compatible with Secure Simple Pairing)
[ISI]
Set the ISI communication parameter.
The setting range is from 18 to 4096.
Set to a value that is higher than the ISW communication parameter setting value.
[ISW]
Set the ISW communication parameter.
The setting range is 0, or from 17 to 4096.
The setting range varies depending on the ISI communication parameter setting value.
Set to a value that is less than the ISI communication parameter setting value.
366
[PSI]
Set the PSI communication parameter.
The setting range is from 18 to 4096.
Set to a value that is higher than the PSW communication parameter setting value.
[PSW]
Set the PSW communication parameter.
The setting range is from 17 to 4096.
The setting range varies depending on the PSI communication parameter setting value.
Set to a value that is less than the PSI communication parameter setting value.
367
[Bluetooth]
[CRC Mode]
Enable or disable the CRC check function.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the CRC check function.
Disabled
Disable the CRC check function.
[Flow Control]
Set the communication protocol.
The options are as follows:
•
[Status3]
•
[Status4 Multi]
•
[None]
368
[NFC]
Sets the NFC connection.
The setting item is as follows:
I/F Enable
Enables or disables the NFC interface.
[I/F Enable]
Enables or disables the NFC interface.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enables the NFC interface.
Disabled
Disables the NFC interface.
369
[Ignore CAN/DLE]
[Ignore CR/LF]
Set whether to ignore the CR/LF code (0x0D / 0x0A) in the received data.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Ignore the CR/LF code.
Disabled
Do not ignore the CR/LF code.
[Ignore CAN/DLE]
Set whether to ignore the CAN/DLE code (0x18 / 0x10) in the received data.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Ignore the CAN/DLE code.
370
Disabled
Do not ignore the CAN/DLE code.
[External I/O]
Use the external (EXT) terminal as an interface between the external device and the product.
Appears if the combo interface board is installed.
The setting items are as follows:
Print Start Signal
Enable or disable the Print Start signal.
Signals
Set the input/output signals.
◦
Appears if you have selected [Enabled] in the [Print Start Signal] menu.
EXT I/O Re-print
Set the reprint function that uses the external terminal.
371
[External I/O]
[Print Start Signal]
Enable or disable the Print Start signal.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the Print Start signal.
Disabled
Disable the Print Start signal.
[Signals]
Set the input/output signals.
Appears only if you have selected [Enabled] in the [Print Start Signal] menu.
The setting items are as follows:
EXT 9PIN
Set the function of the EXT 9PIN output.
EXT Mode
Set the mode of the Print End signal.
372
Inputs
Assign the pin No. to the input signals Print Start and Reprint.
Outputs
Assign the pin No. to output signals.
[EXT 9PIN]
Set the function of the EXT 9PIN output.
The options are as follows:
MODE1
The output signal becomes "Active" only when there is data in print buffer and product is ONLINE.
MODE2
The output signal becomes "Active" when product is ONLINE.
[EXT Mode]
Set the mode of the Print End signal.
The options are as follows:
373
[External I/O]
TYPE1
20 ms "LOW" pulse will be provided after the completion of print and dispense for the Print End
signal (PREND).
TYPE2
20 ms "HIGH" pulse will be provided after the completion of print and dispense for the Print End
signal (PREND).
TYPE3
The Print End signal (PREND) will be "LOW" during label printing and feed forwarding.
TYPE4
The Print End signal (PREND) will be "HIGH" during label printing and feed forwarding.
•
For details, refer to the Timing Charts.
[Inputs]
Assign the pin No. to the input signals Print Start and Reprint.
Press the
/
buttons to highlight the item that you want to change, and press the
buttons to change the pin No.
Press the
button to save the settings and return to the [Signals] menu.
The setting items are as follows:
Start Print
Assign the pin No. for the Print Start signal input.
The options are as follows:
[PIN 5]
Assign Pin 5 to the Print Start signal.
[PIN 7]
Assign Pin 7 to the Print Start signal.
374
/
Reprint
Assign the pin No. for the Reprint signal input.
The options are as follows:
[PIN 5]
Assign Pin 5 to the Reprint signal.
[PIN 7]
Assign Pin 7 to the Reprint signal.
•
You cannot set any inputs using the same pin number. If you attempt to set the same
number, the settings will be shown in red and you cannot save the settings.
[Outputs]
Assign the pin No. to output signals.
Press the
/
buttons to highlight the item that you want to change, and press the
buttons to change the pin No.
Press the
button to save the settings and return to the [Signals] menu.
The setting items are as follows:
Paper End
Assign the pin No. for the Paper End signal output.
Ribbon End
Assign the pin No. for the Ribbon End signal output.
Machine Error
Assign the pin No. for the Machine Error signal output.
Print Done
Assign the pin No. for the Print Done signal output.
Qty
375
/
[External I/O]
Offline
[Qty] is shown if [MODE1] is selected in the [EXT 9PIN] menu.
[Offline] is shown if [MODE2] is selected in the [EXT 9PIN] menu.
Assign the pin No. for the Qty/Offline signal output.
Ribbon Near End
Assign the pin No. for the Ribbon Near End signal output.
Dispenser
Assign the pin No. for the Dispenser signal output.
◦
Use this signal to connect the dispenser unit or linerless cutter kit.
Label Near End
Assign the pin No. for the Label Near End signal output.
The options for each signal output are as follows:
[PIN 1]
Set the selected signal to pin 1.
[PIN 3]
Set the selected signal to pin 3.
[PIN 4]
Set the selected signal to pin 4.
[PIN 6]
Set the selected signal to pin 6.
[PIN 9]
Set the selected signal to pin 9.
[PIN 10]
Set the selected signal to pin 10.
[OFF]
Set the selected signal to off mode.
•
You cannot set any outputs using the same pin number. If you attempt to set the same
number, the settings will be shown in red and you cannot save the settings.
[EXT I/O Re-print]
376
Set the reprint function that uses the external terminal.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the reprint function.
Disabled
Disable the reprint function.
377
[Applications] Menu
[Applications] Menu
The following settings are available in the [Applications] menu:
Protocol
Set the printer language.
SBPL
Set the SBPL printer command.
SZPL
Set the SZPL printer command.
SIPL
Set the SIPL printer command.
STCL
Set the STCL printer command.
SDPL
Set the SDPL printer command.
SEPL
Set the SEPL printer command.
AEP
Set the functions for AEP (Application Enabled Printing).
378
[Protocol]
Set the printer language.
The options are as follows:
AUTO
Automatically analyze the received print data and set the printer language. In [AUTO] mode, the
product can change the language after startup by receiving another language.
SBPL
Set when you use the SBPL printer language or XML.
SZPL
Set when you use the SZPL printer language.
SIPL
Set when you use the SIPL printer language.
SDPL
Set when you use the SDPL printer language.
STCL
Set when you use the STCL printer language.
SEPL
Set when you use the SEPL printer language.
379
[SBPL]
(When [AUTO] is selected in the [Protocol] menu)
•
A message prompting you to restart the product will appear on the Online/Offline
screen if you select [AUTO]. In such a case, reboot the product to apply the settings.
•
Once the printer language is fixed, the name of the printer language will appear on the
Online/Offline screen. The area to show the name of the printer language will remain
blank until the printer language is finalized.
The area remains blank until the
printer language is finalized.
When the print data has been sent in
SBPL.
•
Printer language is finalized with the received print data.
•
When [SBPL] > [Standard Code] in the [Applications] menu is disabled, the [Protocol]
setting will be changed to [SBPL].
[SBPL]
SBPL (SATO Barcode Printer Language) is the common command that controls SATO barcode label
printers.
To use SBPL as a printer command, set the following items:
Show Error
Enable or disable the command error indication.
Standard Code
Set the protocol code.
380
Orientation
Set the layout for printing.
Font Settings
Set the font.
Compatible
Set the compatible code.
[Show Error]
Enable or disable the command error indication when incorrect command or parameter is detected in
the print data.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
The error screen is displayed. The print operation is paused.
Disabled
The error screen is not displayed, but the command error status icon appears in the status bar.
381
[SBPL]
[Standard Code]
Set the protocol code.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Use a standard code.
Disabled
Use a non-standard code.
•
A message prompting you to restart the product will appear on the Online/Offline
screen if you have made any changes. In such a case, reboot the product to apply the
settings. When [AUTO] is selected in the [Protocol] menu while [Disabled] is selected,
the setting will be changed to [Enabled].
[Orientation]
Select the layout for printing the label.
Portrait
Use a portrait layout. (No rotation)
382
Landscape
Use a landscape layout. (90-degree rotation)
Inv. Portrait
Use an inverse portrait layout. (180-degree rotation)
Inv. Landscape
Use an inverse landscape layout. (270-degree rotation)
[Font Settings]
Set the font.
The setting items are as follows:
Zero Slash
Set the type for printing zero.
Kanji
Set the kanji code to be used.
Proportional
Set the character pitch for printing.
Code Page
Set the code page to be used.
€
Set the European currency symbol to the ASCII code.
383
[SBPL]
[Zero Slash]
Set whether to print the number zero (0) with or without a slash (/).
This setting is applied to the following bitmap fonts:
U, S, M, WB, WL, XU, XS, XM, XL, X20, X21, X22, X23, X24
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Print zero with a slash.
Disabled
Print zero without a slash.
[Kanji]
Set the kanji code to be used.
The setting items are as follows:
Kanji Set
Set the kanji code to be used.
Character Code
Set the character code to be used.
384
Kanji Style
Set the font to be used.
[Kanji Set]
Set the kanji code to be used.
The options are as follows:
•
[JP-COMPATIBLE]
•
[JP-JISX0208]
•
[JP-JISX0213]
•
[GB18030]
•
[BIG5]
•
[KSC5601]
[Character Code]
Set the character code to be used.
The options vary depending on the kanji code set in the [Kanji Set]:
•
When set to [JP-COMPATIBLE] or [JP-JISX0208]
◦
[JIS]
385
[SBPL]
◦
[SJIS]
◦
[UTF-16]
◦
[UTF-8]
•
When set to [JP-JISX0213]
◦
[SJIS]
◦
[UTF-16]
◦
[UTF-8]
•
When set to [GB18030]
◦
[GB18030]
◦
[UTF-8]
•
When set to [BIG5]
◦
[BIG5]
◦
[UTF-8]
•
When set to [KSC5601]
◦
[KSC5601]
◦
[UTF-8]
[Kanji Style]
Set the font to be used.
The options are as follows:
•
[Mincho]
•
[Gothic]
386
[Proportional]
Set whether to print each character using a proportional pitch or fixed pitch.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Print each character with a proportional pitch.
Disabled
Print all characters with a fixed pitch.
[Code Page]
Select the code page to be used from the list.
387
[SBPL]
[€]
Set the European currency symbol to the ASCII code.
The setting range is from 00 to ff (hexadecimal).
[Compatible]
Set the compatible code for SBPL.
The setting items are as follows:
M-8400 Compatibility
Enable or disable the M-8400 printer compatibility function.
CODE128(C) Zero Fill
Set whether to allow odd digits and print the barcode with zero-filling at the end of the data when
start code C is used in CODE128.
◦
If [M-8400 Compatibility] is set to [Enabled], this setting is automatically enabled and does not
appear.
Kanji Command
Set the product behavior when the received data includes the Kanji command ESC+K5, ESC+K6
or ESC+K7.
388
Call Font/Logo
Set how to process the character code specified in Recall font & logo command (ESC+RF).
A3 Command Save(S-type)
Set whether to save all values (with or without +/- sign) specified by the Base Reference Point
command ESC+A3 to the product's [Imaging] menu.
PDF417 ECC Level fixed
Set whether to print the PDF417 code with the security level specified by the PDF417 printing
command.
[M-8400 Compatibility]
Enable or disable the M-8400 printer compatibility function.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the M-8400 printer compatibility function.
Disabled
Disable the M-8400 printer compatibility function.
•
Contact your SATO sales representative for more information about the M-8400 printer
compatibility function.
•
If [M-8400 Compatibility] is set to [Enabled], [CODE128(C) Zero Fill] is automatically
enabled and the setting item does not appear.
389
[SBPL]
[CODE128(C) Zero Fill]
Set whether to allow odd digits and print the barcode with zero-filling at the end of the data when start
code C is used in CODE128.
If [M-8400 Compatibility] is set to [Enabled], this setting is automatically enabled and does not appear.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Allow odd digits and print the barcode with zero-filling.
Disabled
Do not allow odd digits. A command error occurs and the barcode will not be printed.
[Kanji Command]
Set the product behavior when the received data includes the Kanji command ESC+K5, ESC+K6 or
ESC+K7.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Change the Kanji commands ESC+K5, ESC+K6 and ESC+K7 in the received data to the proper
commands and print.
◦
ESC+K5: 16x16 dots Kanji in horizontal line with one-byte character
390
◦
ESC+K6: 24x24 dots Kanji in horizontal line with one-byte character
◦
ESC+K7: 22x22 dots Kanji in horizontal line
Disabled
Do not change the Kanji commands ESC+K5, ESC+K6 and ESC+K7 in the received data. The
product behavior when it receives these commands is as follows:
◦
ESC+K5: Print with 40x40 dots Kanji in horizontal line.
◦
ESC+K6: A command error occurs and the data will not be printed.
◦
ESC+K7: A command error occurs and the data will not be printed.
[Call Font/Logo]
Set how to process the character code specified in Recall font & logo command (ESC+RF).
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Character codes are processed in little-endian format.
Disabled
Character codes are processed in big-endian format.
391
[SBPL]
[A3 Command Save(S-type)]
Set whether to save all values (with or without +/- sign) specified by the Base Reference Point
command ESC+A3 to the product's [Imaging] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
All values (with or without +/- sign) specified by the command ESC+A3 are saved to the product's
[Imaging] menu.
Disabled
Only values without +/- sign specified with the command ESC+A3 are saved to the product's
[Imaging] menu. Values with +/- sign are not saved.
[PDF417 ECC Level fixed]
Set whether to print the PDF417 code with the security level specified by the PDF417 printing
command.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Print the PDF417 code with the security level specified by the PDF417 printing command.
392
Disabled
Print the PDF417 code with the security level specified by the PDF417 (or higher) printing
command.
[SZPL]
To use SZPL as a printer command, set the following items:
Label
Set the print position.
Label Rotation
Set the page orientation for label printing.
Caret
Set the caret (^) code.
Delimiter
Set the delimiter (,) code.
Tilde
Set the tilde (~) code.
Clock Format
Set the date format.
Default Font
Select the default font for when printing using a multilingual font contained in the product.
393
[SZPL]
[Label]
Set the print position.
The setting items are as follows:
Shift
Set the shift offset position of the label.
Top
Set the top offset position of the label.
[Shift]
Set the shift offset position of the label.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
-832 to 0 to 832 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
394
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
305 dpi
-1248 to 0 to 1248 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
-2496 to 0 to 2496 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
[Top]
Set the top offset position of the label.
The setting range is from -120 to +120 dots.
•
The length of 1 dot varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
◦
203 dpi : 1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049")
◦
305 dpi : 1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033")
◦
609 dpi : 1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017")
[Label Rotation]
Set the page orientation for label printing.
395
[SZPL]
The label size set in the product is used as a reference for rotation.
The options are as follows:
0 degree
Labels are printed in a portrait orientation.
180 degree
Labels are printed in an inverse-portrait orientation.
[Caret]
Set the caret (^) code.
The setting range is from 0 to 255.
[Delimiter]
Set the delimiter (,) code.
The setting range is from 0 to 255.
396
[Tilde]
Set the tilde (~) code.
The setting range is from 0 to 255.
[Clock Format]
Set the date format.
The options are as follows (January 24, 2017, at 1:45 pm, for example):
•
[(none)]
•
[MM/DD/YY (24-hour clock)] (Example: 01/24/17 (13:45))
•
[MM/DD/YY (12-hour clock)] (Example: 01/24/17 (01:45))
•
[DD/MM/YY (24-hour clock)] (Example: 24/01/17 (13:45))
•
[DD/MM/YY (12-hour clock)] (Example: 24/01/17 (01:45))
397
[SIPL]
[Default Font]
Select a default font from the list for when printing using a multilingual font contained in the product.
[SIPL]
To use SIPL as a printer command, set the following items:
Font Settings
Set the font.
Format Save
Set whether to save the user format data registered at printing in the product.
398
[Font Settings]
Set the font.
The setting items are as follows:
Code Page
Set the code page to be used.
New Font Encoding
Enable or disable new font encoding.
c20 Proportional Pitch
Set the character pitch for printing.
Zero Slash
Set the type for printing zero.
[Code Page]
Select the code page to be used from the list.
399
[SIPL]
[New Font Encoding]
Enable or disable new font encoding.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable new font encoding.
Disabled
Disable new font encoding.
•
Contact your SATO sales representative for more information about the new font.
[c20 Proportional Pitch]
Set whether to print each character using a proportional pitch or fixed pitch.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Print each character with a proportional pitch.
400
Disabled
Print all characters with a fixed pitch.
[Zero Slash]
Set whether to print the number zero (0) with or without a slash (/).
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Print zero with a slash.
Disabled
Print zero without a slash.
[Format Save]
Set whether to save the user format data registered at printing in the product.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Save the user format data registered at printing in the product.
401
[STCL]
Disabled
Do not save the user format data registered at printing in the product. The user format data
remains in the product memory after printing until the product is powered off. You need to register
a user format again after reboot.
[STCL]
To use STCL as a printer command, set the following items:
Command Head
Set the command head.
Font Settings
Set the font.
Rotation
Set the page orientation for label printing.
Ignore Paper Size Command
Set whether to ignore a paper size command in the print data.
300DPI Head Compatibility
When you are using the product with 305 dpi resolution, enable or disable 300DPI Head
Compatibility.
402
[Command Head]
Set the command head.
The setting items are as follows:
Control Code
Set the control code.
1st Byte Code
Set the first byte code.
2nd Byte Code
Set the second byte code.
3rd Byte Code
Set the third byte code.
[Control Code]
Set the control code.
The options are as follows:
403
[STCL]
Auto
Perform the protocol detection automatically.
ESC|LF|NUL
Set the control code to ESC|LF|NUL.
7B|7C|7D
Set the control code to 7B|7C|7D.
Custom
Change the first to third byte codes.
[1st Byte Code]
Set the first byte code.
You can change this only if you have selected [Custom] in the [Control Code] menu.
The setting range is from 0 to 255.
[2nd Byte Code]
Set the second byte code.
You can change this only if you have selected [Custom] in the [Control Code] menu.
The setting range is from 0 to 255.
404
[3rd Byte Code]
Set the third byte code.
You can change this only if you have selected [Custom] in the [Control Code] menu.
The setting range is from 0 to 255.
[Font Settings]
Set the font.
The setting items are as follows:
Zero Slash
Set the type for printing zero.
€
Set the European currency symbol to the ASCII code.
Code Page
Set the code page to be used.
Half-width Symbol
Set whether to print symbols with half-width characters.
405
[STCL]
[Zero Slash]
Set whether to print the number zero (0) with or without a slash (/).
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Print zero with a slash.
Disabled
Print zero without a slash.
[€]
Set the European currency symbol to the ASCII code.
The setting range is from 00 to ff (hexadecimal).
406
[Code Page]
Select the code page to be used from the list.
[Half-width Symbol]
Set whether to print symbols with half-width characters.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Print symbols with half-width characters.
Disabled
Do not print symbols with half-width characters.
407
[STCL]
[Rotation]
Set the page orientation for label printing.
The options are as follows:
0 degree
Labels are printed in portrait orientation.
90 degree
Labels are printed in landscape orientation.
[Ignore Paper Size Command]
Set whether to ignore a paper size command in the print data.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Ignore a paper size command in the print data.
Disabled
Do not ignore a paper size command in the print data.
408
[300DPI Head Compatibility]
When you are using the product with 305 dpi resolution, enable or disable 300DPI Head Compatibility.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable 300DPI Head Compatibility. Print data for a head density of 300 dpi is printed in 305 dpi.
Disabled
Disable 300DPI Head Compatibility.
[SDPL]
To use SDPL as a printer command, set the following items:
Control Code
Set the control code.
Label Rotation
Set the page orientation for label printing.
409
[SDPL]
SOP Emulation
Set the SOP emulation.
Compatible Mode
Set the compatible mode for SDPL.
Right-to-Left print
Set the Right-to-Left printing function.
Receive TimeOut
Set a period of time the product stays in binary data receiving mode.
Blank Item Feed
Set whether to feed a label with nothing printed on it when the product receives label formatting
commands that do not generate any printable image.
Prioritize
Select the settings to be prioritized for the SDPL command.
Format Attribute
Set the format attribute.
Pause Mode
Enable or disable the pause mode.
1 Byte Codepage
Select the code page to be used for one-byte characters.
SDPL Measure Unit
Set the measurement unit.
Scalable Font Style
Set the style of the scalable fonts.
Feedback Character
Enable or disable the <STX>a command.
SOH Commands
Set the SOH commands.
Select where to save the product settings.
•
[Format Attribute], [Pause Mode], [1 Byte Codepage], [SDPL Measure Unit], [Scalable
Font Style], [Feedback Character], [SOH Commands] and [Module Selection] are
available only if [Settings] is selected for the corresponding setting item under the
[Prioritize] menu.
410
[Control Code]
Set the control code.
The setting items are as follows:
Code Type
Set the type of the control code.
SOH
Set the SOH code.
STX
Set the STX code.
CR
Set the CR code.
CNTBY
Set the CNTBY code.
[Code Type]
Set the type of the control code.
411
[SDPL]
The options are as follows:
•
[Standard]
•
[Alternate 1]
•
[Alternate 2]
•
[Custom]
[SOH]
Set the SOH code.
You can change this if you have selected [Custom] in the [Code Type] menu.
The setting range is from 00 to ff (hexadecimal).
[STX]
Set the STX code.
You can change this if you have selected [Custom] in the [Code Type] menu.
The setting range is from 00 to ff (hexadecimal).
412
[CR]
Set the CR code.
You can change this if you have selected [Custom] in the [Code Type] menu.
The setting range is from 00 to ff (hexadecimal).
[CNTBY]
Set the CNTBY code.
You can change this if you have selected [Custom] in the [Code Type] menu.
The setting range is from 00 to ff (hexadecimal).
413
[SDPL]
[Label Rotation]
Set the page orientation for label printing.
The label size set in the product is used as a reference for rotation.
The options are as follows:
0 degree
Labels are printed in a portrait orientation.
90 degree
Labels are printed in a landscape orientation.
180 degree
Labels are printed in an inverse-portrait orientation.
270 degree
Labels are printed in an inverse-landscape orientation.
[SOP Emulation]
Set the SOP emulation.
The options are as follows:
414
•
[Disabled]
•
[Prodigy Plus - 110]
•
[Allegro - 220]
•
[Prodigy - 250]
•
[Auto]
[Compatible Mode]
Set the compatible mode for SDPL.
The setting items are as follows:
TTF
Enable or disable TrueType font compatible mode.
Graphics
Set whether to allow the registration of graphic data even if a line feed code is omitted.
Compression
Set whether to accept graphic data created by a unique compression method.
[TTF]
415
[SDPL]
Enable or disable TrueType font compatible mode.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable TrueType font compatible mode. The bold TrueType fonts are printed in smaller pitch.
Disabled
Disable TrueType font compatible mode.
[Graphics]
Set whether to allow the registration of graphic data even if a line feed code is omitted.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Allow the registration of graphic data even when a line feed code is omitted.
Disabled
Do not allow the registration of graphic data when a line feed code is omitted.
[Compression]
Set whether to accept graphic data created by a unique compression method.
416
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Accepts graphic data created by a unique compression method.
Disabled
Does not accept graphic data created by a unique compression method.
[Right-to-Left print]
Set the Right-to-Left printing function.
The options are as follows:
Disabled
All texts are printed from left to right.
Auto
When an Arabic font is detected, the Arabic text is printed from right to left.
[Receive TimeOut]
Set a period of time the product stays in binary data receiving mode.
417
[SDPL]
When the specified period of type passes, the product exits from binary receiving mode and scans for
SDPL commands.
The setting range is from 0 (off) to 9999 ms.
[Blank Item Feed]
Set whether to feed a label with nothing printed on it when the product receives label formatting
commands that do not generate any printable image.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Feeds a label with nothing printed on it.
Disabled
Does not feed a label with nothing printed on it.
[Prioritize]
Select the settings to be prioritized for each setting item of the SDPL command. You can set whether
to prioritize settings that are done through the product or through commands.
When you select [Settings] for an item, the setting specified in the [SDPL] menu of the product will be
used.
418
The setting items are as follows:
Format Attribute
Select the setting to be prioritized for the format attribute.
Pause Mode
Select the setting to be prioritized for pause mode.
1 Byte Codepage
Select the setting to be prioritized for the 1 byte code page.
SDPL Measure Unit
Select the setting to be prioritized for the measurement unit.
Scalable Font Style
Select the setting to be prioritized for the scalable font style.
Sensor Type
Select the setting to be prioritized for the sensor type.
Feedback Character
Select the setting to be prioritized for the feedback character.
SOH Commands
Select the setting to be prioritized for the SOH commands.
Module Selection
Select the setting to be prioritized for the module selection.
Darkness
Factory Offset
Speed
The option selected in the [Printing] > [Advanced] > [Prioritize] menu is applied to these three
settings and shown on this screen.
[Format Attribute]
419
[SDPL]
Set whether to prioritize the settings that are done through the product or through commands for the
format attribute setting.
The options are as follows:
Commands
Prioritize the settings through commands.
Settings
Prioritize the settings that are done through the product.
[Pause Mode]
Set whether to prioritize the settings that are done through the product or through commands for the
pause mode setting.
The options are as follows:
Commands
Prioritize the settings through commands.
Settings
Prioritize the settings that are done through the product.
420
[1 Byte Codepage]
Set whether to prioritize the settings that are done through the product or through commands for the 1
byte code page setting.
The options are as follows:
Commands
Prioritize the settings through commands.
Settings
Prioritize the settings that are done through the product.
[SDPL Measure Unit]
Set whether to prioritize the settings that are done through the product or through commands for the
measurement unit setting.
The options are as follows:
Commands
Prioritize the settings through commands.
Settings
Prioritize the settings that are done through the product.
421
[SDPL]
[Scalable Font Style]
Set whether to prioritize the settings that are done through the product or through commands for the
scalable font style settings.
The options are as follows:
Commands
Prioritize the settings through commands.
Settings
Prioritize the settings that are done through the product.
[Sensor Type]
Set whether to prioritize the settings that are done through the product or through commands for the
sensor type setting.
The options are as follows:
Commands
Prioritize the settings through commands.
Settings
Prioritize the settings that are done through the product.
422
[Feedback Character]
Set whether to prioritize the settings that are done through the product or through commands for the
feedback character setting.
The options are as follows:
Commands
Prioritize the settings through commands.
Settings
Prioritize the settings that are done through the product.
[SOH Commands]
Set whether to prioritize the settings that are done through the product or through commands for the
SOH Commands settings.
The options are as follows:
Commands
Prioritize the settings through commands.
Settings
Prioritize the settings that are done through the product.
423
[SDPL]
[Module Selection]
Set whether to prioritize the settings that are done through the product or through commands for the
module selection setting.
The options are as follows:
Commands
Prioritize the settings through commands.
Settings
Prioritize the settings that are done through the product.
•
Even if you select [Commands], the settings that are done through the product are
used if no command is sent.
[Format Attribute]
Set the format attribute.
You can change this setting if you have selected [Settings] in the [Prioritize] > [Format Attribute] menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[XOR]
424
•
[Transparent]
•
[Opaque]
•
[Inverse]
[Pause Mode]
Enable or disable the pause mode.
You can change this setting if you have selected [Settings] in the [Prioritize] > [Pause Mode] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the pause mode.
Disabled
Disable the pause mode.
[1 Byte Codepage]
Select the code page to be used for one-byte characters from the list.
You can change this setting if you have selected [Settings] in the [Prioritize] > [1 Byte Codepage]
menu.
425
[SDPL]
[SDPL Measure Unit]
Set the measurement unit.
You can change this setting if you have selected [Settings] in the [Prioritize] > [SDPL Measure Unit]
menu.
The options are as follows:
•
[Inch]
•
[Millimeter]
[Scalable Font Style]
Set the style of the scalable fonts.
You can change this setting if you have selected [Settings] in the [Prioritize] > [Scalable Font Style]
menu.
The setting items are as follows:
Bold
Set whether to use bold.
Italic
Set whether to use italics.
426
[Bold]
Set whether to use bold for the scalable fonts.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Use bold.
Disabled
Do not use bold.
[Italic]
Set whether to use italics for the scalable fonts.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Use italics.
Disabled
Do not use italics.
427
[SDPL]
[Feedback Character]
Enable or disable the <STX>a command.
You can change this setting if you have selected [Settings] in the [Prioritize] > [Feedback Character]
menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the <STX>a command.
Disabled
Disable the <STX>a command.
[SOH Commands]
Set the SOH commands.
You can change this setting if you have selected [Settings] in the [Prioritize] > [SOH Commands]
menu.
The setting items are as follows:
All Commands
Enable or disable all the SOH commands. You can also select to set each command individually.
428
SOH-B Command
Enable or disable the SOH-B command.
◦
Available only if you have selected [Custom] in the [All Commands] menu.
SOH-C Command
Enable or disable the SOH-C command.
◦
Available only if you have selected [Custom] in the [All Commands] menu.
Others
Enable or disable the SOH commands other than the SOH-B and SOH-C commands.
◦
Available only if you have selected [Custom] in the [All Commands] menu.
[All Commands]
Enable or disable all the SOH commands. You can also select to set each command individually.
The options are as follows:
Disabled
Disable all the SOH commands.
Enabled
Enable all the SOH commands.
Custom
Enable or disable each type of the SOH commands individually.
429
[SDPL]
[SOH-B Command]
Enable or disable the SOH-B command.
Available if you have selected [Custom] in the [All Commands] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the SOH-B command.
Disabled
Disable the SOH-B command.
[SOH-C Command]
Enable or disable the SOH-C command.
Available if you have selected [Custom] in the [All Commands] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the SOH-C command.
430
Disabled
Disable the SOH-C command.
[Others]
Enable or disable the SOH commands other than the SOH-B and SOH-C commands.
Available if you have selected [Custom] in the [All Commands] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the SOH commands other than the SOH-B and SOH-C commands.
Disabled
Disable the SOH commands other than the SOH-B and SOH-C commands.
[SEPL]
To use SEPL as a printer command, set the following items:
431
[SEPL]
Home Reference
Adjust the print reference position by specifying the offset position in the horizontal and vertical
directions.
Label Rotation
Set the page orientation for label printing.
Memory Device
Select the product's memory space in which to store forms, graphics and fonts.
Sim. 300 DPI Head
When you are using the product with 305 dpi resolution, enable or disable 300 dpi simulation
mode.
[Home Reference]
Adjust the print reference position by specifying the offset position in the horizontal and vertical
directions.
The setting items are as follows:
Horz. Offset
Specify the offset position in the horizontal direction.
Vert. Offset
Specify the offset position in the vertical direction.
432
[Horz. Offset]
Specify the offset position in the horizontal direction.
The setting range is from 0 to 400 dots.
•
The length of 1 dot varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
◦
203 dpi : 1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049")
◦
305 dpi : 1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033")
◦
609 dpi : 1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017")
[Vert. Offset]
Specify the offset position in the vertical direction.
The setting range is from 0 to 400 dots.
433
[SEPL]
•
The length of 1 dot varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
◦
203 dpi : 1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049")
◦
305 dpi : 1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033")
◦
609 dpi : 1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017")
[Label Rotation]
Set the page orientation for label printing.
The label size set in the product is used as a reference for rotation.
The options are as follows:
0 degree
Labels are printed in a portrait orientation.
180 degree
Labels are printed in an inverse-portrait orientation.
[Memory Device]
Select the product's memory space in which to store forms, graphics and fonts.
434
The options are as follows:
Internal RAM
Use the product's internal RAM. The data will be lost if the product is powered off.
Internal FLASH
Use the product's internal ROM.
Front USB
Use the USB memory connected to the USB connector (Type A) on the front side of the product.
Rear USB
Use the USB memory connected to the USB connector (Type A) on the rear side of the product.
•
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
product. SATO Corporation cannot be held responsible for any product malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
[Sim. 300 DPI Head]
When you are using the product with 305 dpi resolution, enable or disable 300 dpi simulation mode.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable 300 dpi simulation mode. The sizes and positions of objects such as lines, boxes and
barcodes in the print data are automatically adjusted to the equivalent 300 dpi sizes and positions
for printing.
Disabled
Disable 300 dpi simulation mode.
435
[AEP]
[AEP]
Set the functions for AEP (Application Enabled Printing).
AEP mode allows you to use the product as a stand-alone printer by running applications within the
product.
Use the standard application, or install custom applications to the product from a USB memory, All-InOne Tool, WebConfig page, etc.
In AEP mode, you can use USB keyboards and barcode scanners to input data.
The setting items are as follows:
Enable
Enable or disable AEP mode.
Starting Application
Select the application to start at product startup in AEP mode.
Delete Application
Delete installed applications.
Label Rotation
Set whether to rotate the page orientation for label printing.
•
Contact your SATO sales representative for more information about the use of AEP
mode.
436
[Enable]
Enable or disable AEP (Application Enabled Printing) mode.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable AEP mode.
Disabled
Disable AEP mode.
•
A message prompting you to restart the product will appear on the Online/Offline
screen if you have made any changes. In such a case, reboot the product to apply the
settings.
[Starting Application]
Select the application to start at product startup in AEP (Application Enabled Printing) mode.
Select the application using the
/
buttons and press the
437
button to confirm.
[AEP]
[Delete Application]
Delete installed applications from the list.
Select the application to be deleted using the
confirm.
/
buttons and press the
[Label Rotation]
Set whether to rotate the page orientation for label printing.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Rotates the page orientation 180 degrees.
Disabled
Does not rotate the page orientation.
438
button to
[System] Menu
The following settings are available in the [System] menu:
Regional
Set the display language, time zone, calendar (option) and unit.
Notifications
Set the function to notify when to clean and replace parts.
Sound
Set the buzzer sound.
Energy Saving
Set the period before the product enters sleep mode.
LCD Brightness
Set the brightness of the screen.
Show Total Count
Enable or disable the indication of the total print count.
Password
Set the password.
Start on AC
Set whether to power on/off the product by powering on/off the main power source.
439
[Regional]
[Regional]
Set the display language, time zone, calendar (option) and unit.
The setting items are as follows:
Messages
Set the display language of the LCD.
USB Keyboard
Set the language for the USB keyboard connected to the product.
Locale
Set the locale to be used in AEP (Application Enabled Printing) mode.
Unit
Set the unit of length for indication.
Time
Set the time.
•
You can set the time only if you have installed the optional RTC kit.
Date
Set the date.
•
You can set the date only if you have installed the optional RTC kit.
Time Zone
Set the time zone.
Display Language Icon
Set whether to display the [Language] icon on the top screen of the [Settings] menu.
440
[Messages]
Set the display language of the LCD.
Select the display language from the list.
[USB Keyboard]
Set the language for the USB keyboard connected to the product.
Select the USB keyboard layout from Western and Eastern European languages, Japanese, Chinese
and Korean.
•
Japanese, Chinese, and Korean only support a change in the layout of the keyboard.
The IME (Input Method Editor) is not compatible, so you cannot input hiragana,
katakana, or kanji.
441
[Regional]
[Locale]
Set the locale to be used in AEP (Application Enabled Printing) mode.
This setting determines the format of time, dates, numbers, prices, names of weekdays, months, etc.
in AEP applications.
Select the locale from the list.
[Unit]
Set the unit of length for indication.
The options are as follows:
•
[dot]
•
["] (inches)
•
[mm]
442
[Time]
Set the time.
You can set the time only if you have installed the optional RTC kit.
After setting the time and pressing the
Press the
button, the confirmation screen appears.
button to cancel, or press the
443
button to confirm the setting.
[Regional]
[Date]
Set the date.
You can set the date only if you have installed the optional RTC kit.
The setting range is as follows:
2000-01-01 to 2035-12-31
•
The date format is Year - Month - Date.
After setting the date and pressing the
Press the
button, the confirmation screen appears.
button to cancel, or press the
444
button to confirm the setting.
[Time Zone]
Set the time zone.
First select the region from the [Region] list.
Then select the city from the [City] list.
[Display Language Icon]
445
[Notifications]
Set whether to display the [Language] icon on the top screen of the [Settings] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Display the [Language] icon.
Disabled
Do not display the [Language] icon.
If this function is enabled, the [Language] icon is added to the [Settings] menu screen as below. You
can directly access the display language setting screen.
[Notifications]
Set the function to notify when to clean and replace parts.
The setting items are as follows:
Clean Printhead
Notify when the print head needs to be cleaned.
Change Printhead
Notify when the print head needs to be replaced.
446
Change Cutter
Notify when the cutter unit needs to be replaced.
Change Platen
Notify when the platen roller needs to be replaced.
[Clean Printhead]
Notify when the print head needs to be cleaned.
The setting items are as follows:
Clean Printhead
Enable or disable the notification function about when the print head needs to be cleaned.
Cleaning Interval
Set the notification interval about when the print head needs to be cleaned.
Clean Counter
Shows the current print distance.
[Clean Printhead]
Enable or disable the notification function about when the print head needs to be cleaned.
447
[Notifications]
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the notification function.
Disabled
Disable the notification function.
[Cleaning Interval]
Set the notification interval about when the print head needs to be cleaned.
You can change this setting if you have selected [Enabled] in the [Clean Printhead] menu.
The product shows the print distance as a set value. The setting range is from 10 to 1000 meters.
[Change Printhead]
Notify when the print head needs to be replaced.
The setting items are as follows:
Change Printhead
Enable or disable the notification function about when the print head needs to be replaced.
448
Printhead Interval
Set the notification interval about when the print head needs to be replaced.
Printhead Count
Shows the current print distance.
[Change Printhead]
Enable or disable the notification function about when the print head needs to be replaced.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the notification function.
Disabled
Disable the notification function.
[Printhead Interval]
Set the notification interval about when the print head needs to be replaced.
You can change this setting if you have selected [Enabled] in the [Change Printhead] menu.
The product shows the print distance as a set value. The setting range is from 10 to 100 km.
449
[Notifications]
[Change Cutter]
Notify when the cutter unit needs to be replaced.
The setting items are as follows:
Change Cutter
Enable or disable the notification function about when the cutter unit needs to be replaced.
Cutter Life
Set the notification interval about when the cutter unit needs to be replaced.
Cutter Count
Shows the current number of cuts by the cutter.
[Change Cutter]
Enable or disable the notification function about when the cutter unit needs to be replaced.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the notification function.
450
Disabled
Disable the notification function.
[Cutter Life]
Set the notification interval about when the cutter unit needs to be replaced.
You can change this setting if you have selected [Enabled] in the [Change Cutter] menu.
The product shows the cutter count as a set value. The setting range is from 10,000 to 1,000,000 cuts.
[Change Platen]
Notify when the platen roller needs to be replaced.
The setting items are as follows:
Change Platen
Enable or disable the notification function about when the platen roller needs to be replaced.
Platen Interval
Set the notification interval about when the platen roller needs to be replaced.
Platen Count
Shows the current distance the platen roller has fed.
451
[Notifications]
[Change Platen]
Enable or disable the notification function about when the platen roller needs to be replaced.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the notification function.
Disabled
Disable the notification function.
[Platen Interval]
Set the notification interval about when the platen roller needs to be replaced.
You can change this setting if you have selected [Enabled] in the [Change Platen] menu.
The product shows the fed distance as a set value. The setting range is from 10 to 100 km.
452
[Sound]
Set the buzzer sound.
The setting item is as follows:
Error Sound
Set the buzzer volume for the error sound.
Power Off Sound
Set the buzzer volume when powering off the product.
[Error Sound]
Set the buzzer volume for the error sound.
The options are as follows:
Off
Mute the sound.
453
[Sound]
Low
Low volume.
Medium
Medium volume.
High
High volume.
[Power Off Sound]
Set the buzzer volume when powering off the product.
The options are as follows:
Off
Mute the sound.
Low
Low volume.
Medium
Medium volume.
High
High volume.
454
[Energy Saving]
The setting item is as follows:
Sleep Timeout
Set the period before the product enters sleep mode.
[Sleep Timeout]
Set the period before the product enters sleep mode.
The setting range is from 0 to 60 minutes.
•
The sleep function is disabled if you set to 0.
•
This setting is disabled if [Print Start Signal] is set to [Enabled].
455
[Show Total Count]
[LCD Brightness]
Set the brightness of the screen.
The setting range is from 0 to 9.
0 is the darkest and 9 is the brightest.
Press the
button to complete the setting.
•
The product has a built-in energy saving function, which will decrease the brightness of
the screen when you have not operated the product for a period.
[Show Total Count]
Enable or disable the indication of the total print count.
If set to [Enabled], the total print count appears on both the Online and Offline screens.
The number in the brackets to the right of [QTY] on the Online and Offline screens is the total print
count.
The options are as follows:
456
Enabled
Enable the indication of the total print count.
Disabled
Disable the indication of the total print count.
•
Shows the total print count from the time the product is on until it is off.
When you power off the product, the count is reset to [0].
[Password]
The setting items are as follows:
Password Enable
Enable or disable the password setting.
Install Security
Enable or disable the password input for the package file download.
NFC Security
Set whether to show the confirmation message or enable the password input before settings are
written to the product from an Android device with the NFC interface.
Change Password
Change the password.
457
[Password]
[Password Enable]
Enable or disable the password setting.
If you have set the password to [Enabled], the product requires you to enter the password set in the
[Password] screen before you enter the [Settings] menu.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the password setting.
Disabled
Disable the password setting.
•
The default password is 0310. You can change the password in [Password] > [Change
Password] > [level1].
[Install Security]
Enable or disable the password input for installing the pkg file to the product.
If you have enabled the password input, the product requires you to enter the password set in the
[Password] screen before you can download the package file.
458
The options are as follows:
Disabled
No password is required to install a pkg file.
USB
Password is required to install a pkg file from the USB memory.
Always
Password is required to install a pkg file from the USB memory or downloaded from computer.
•
The password used for installing a pkg file can be any passwords set in the [System] >
[Password].
Contact your SATO reseller or technical support center for more information of the pkg
file.
[NFC Security]
Set whether to show the confirmation message or enable the password input before settings are
written to the product from an Android device with the NFC interface.
To use the NFC Security function, the settings must be written from the Android device while the
product is powered off. The confirmation message or password input screen is shown when the
product is powered on.
The options are as follows:
None
No confirmation message is shown and no password is required before the settings are written to
the product.
Confirm
The confirmation message is shown before the settings are written to the product.
Password
You need to enter the password set in the [Password] screen before the settings are written to the
product.
459
[Password]
[Change Password]
Change the password.
You can enter 4 to 32 characters. Alphabets (capital and small letters), numbers and symbols can be
used.
The setting items are as follows:
admin
This is the setting item for factory.
Strictly for SATO authorized personnel use.
manager
The password for accessing the [Service] menu.
Strictly for SATO authorized personnel use.
level1
The password for accessing the [Settings] menu.
rfid
This is the setting item for factory.
Strictly for SATO authorized service personnel use.
•
The [admin], [manager] and [rfid] passwords are for factory and maintenance
personnel. You cannot change these passwords.
460
[Start on AC]
Set whether to power on/off the product by powering on/off the main power source.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Power on/off the product by powering on/off the main power source.
Disabled
Power on/off the product by pressing the
power button of the product.
•
Do not repeatedly power on/off the product.
•
If you power the main power source off and then on again quickly, the product may not
be powered on because it is still in the powering off process. In such a case, press the
power button to power on the product.
•
Do not power off the product during operation, such as when printing or updating.
Doing so could cause a malfunction of the product.
•
Do not disconnect the power cord until the powering off process is completed on the
product.
•
An incorrect power on/off operation may damage the product settings. In such a case,
the product settings are reset to their default values. It is always recommended to use
the power button to allow proper shutdown of the product and ensure changes made to
menu settings are saved appropriately.
461
[Tools] Menu
[Tools] Menu
The following settings are available in the [Tools] menu:
Test Print
Perform a test print.
HEX-Dump
Save the hex dump print data or dump data from the receive buffer to the USB memory.
Reset
Initialize the settings and counters on the product.
Profiles
Save the product's settings as a profile to be loaded as needed.
Service
These are the setting items for service.
Strictly for SATO authorized service personnel use.
Factory
These are the setting items for factory.
Strictly for SATO authorized service personnel use.
Certificates
Set the wireless LAN authentication.
◦
Available only if you have installed the USB memory.
Barcode Checker
Set the barcode check function using a barcode checker.
Clone
Copy the current product settings and data to the USB memory.
462
◦
Available only if you have installed the USB memory.
Support Info
Save various information about the product in a text file to the USB memory.
◦
Available only if you have installed the USB memory.
Logging Function
Save the log data.
Startup Guide
Enable or disable the startup guide.
[Test Print]
Perform a test print.
The setting items are as follows:
Factory
Perform the factory test print.
Configure List
Print the product's settings information.
Configure QR
Print the product's settings information as a QR code.
Paper Sensor
Print the detection result of the media sensor level.
Head Check
Perform the head check print.
463
[Test Print]
[Factory]
Perform the factory test print.
1. Check and set the items as listed on the [Factory] menu.
2. Press the
button to start the test print. Press the
print.
To stop the test print, first pause the print and then press the
button again to pause the
button.
The setting items are as follows:
Label Width
Set the media width used for the test print.
The options are [Large] (101.6 mm (4”) ) and [Small] (50.8 mm (2”)).
Pitch
Set the print position in the vertical direction.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305dpi
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609dpi
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
464
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
When you decrease the setting value, the print position moves in the feed direction (toward the
front part of the media).
When you increase the setting value, the print position moves opposite the feed direction (toward
the end part of the media).
Offset
Set the stop position of the media.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305dpi
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609dpi
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
When you decrease the setting value, the stop position moves in the feed direction (toward the
front part of the media).
When you increase the setting value, the stop position moves opposite the feed direction (toward
the end part of the media).
Darkness Adjust
Fine tune the print darkness of the test print.
0 is the lightest and 99 is the darkest.
•
The value of [Pitch], [Offset] and [Darkness Adjust] set in the [Factory] menu will be
reflected to the same item settings in the [Configure List] menu, [Configure QR] menu,
[Paper Sensor] menu and [Head Check] menu.
465
[Test Print]
[Configure List]
Print the product's settings information.
1. Check and set the items as listed on the [Configure List] menu.
2. Press the
button to start the test print. Press the
print.
To stop the test print, first pause the print and then press the
button again to pause the
button.
The setting items are as follows:
Label Width
Shows the necessary media width of the test print.
The necessary media width is 50.8 mm (2") for [Small].
Label Length
Set the length of one piece of the media used for the test print.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
400 to 1600 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
600 to 2400 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
1200 to 4800 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
466
Pitch
Set the print position in the vertical direction.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
When you decrease the setting value, the print position moves in the feed direction (toward the
front part of the media).
When you increase the setting value, the print position moves opposite the feed direction (toward
the end part of the media).
Offset
Set the stop position of the media.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
When you decrease the setting value, the stop position moves in the feed direction (toward the
front part of the media).
When you increase the setting value, the stop position moves opposite the feed direction (toward
the end part of the media).
Darkness Adjust
Fine tune the print darkness of the test print.
0 is the lightest and 99 is the darkest.
467
[Test Print]
•
The value of [Label Length], [Pitch], [Offset] and [Darkness Adjust] set in the [Configure
List] menu will be reflected to the same item settings in the [Factory] menu, [Configure
QR] menu, [Paper Sensor] menu and [Head Check] menu.
[Configure QR]
Print the product's settings information as a QR code.
1. Check and set the items as listed on the [Configure QR] menu.
2. Press the
button to start the test print. Press the
print.
To stop the test print, first pause the print and then press the
button again to pause the
button.
The setting items are as follows:
Label Width
Shows the necessary media width of the test print.
The necessary media width is 50.8 mm (2") for [Small].
Label Length
Set the length of one piece of the media used for the test print.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
400 to 1600 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
600 to 2400 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
1200 to 4800 dots
468
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
Pitch
Set the print position in the vertical direction.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
When you decrease the setting value, the print position moves in the feed direction (toward the
front part of the media).
When you increase the setting value, the print position moves opposite the feed direction (toward
the end part of the media).
Offset
Set the stop position of the media.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
When you decrease the setting value, the stop position moves in the feed direction (toward the
front part of the media).
When you increase the setting value, the stop position moves opposite the feed direction (toward
the end part of the media).
469
[Test Print]
Darkness Adjust
Fine tune the print darkness of the test print.
0 is the lightest and 99 is the darkest.
•
The value of [Label Length], [Pitch], [Offset] and [Darkness Adjust] set in the [Configure
QR] menu will be reflected to the same item settings in the [Factory] menu, [Configure
List] menu, [Paper Sensor] menu and [Head Check] menu.
[Paper Sensor]
Print the detection result of the media sensor level.
1. Check and set the items as listed on the [Paper Sensor] menu.
2. Press the
button to start the test print. Press the
print.
To stop the test print, first pause the print and then press the
button again to pause the
button.
The setting items are as follows:
Label Width
Shows the necessary media width of the test print.
The necessary media width is 50.8 mm (2") for [Small].
Label Length
Set the length of one piece of the media used for the test print.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
400 to 1600 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
470
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
305 dpi
600 to 2400 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
1200 to 4800 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
Pitch
Set the print position in the vertical direction.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
When you decrease the setting value, the print position moves in the feed direction (toward the
front part of the media).
When you increase the setting value, the print position moves opposite the feed direction (toward
the end part of the media).
Offset
Set the stop position of the media.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
471
[Test Print]
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
When you decrease the setting value, the stop position moves in the feed direction (toward the
front part of the media).
When you increase the setting value, the stop position moves opposite the feed direction (toward
the end part of the media).
Darkness Adjust
Fine tune the print darkness of the test print.
0 is the lightest and 99 is the darkest.
•
The value of [Label Length], [Pitch], [Offset] and [Darkness Adjust] set in the [Paper
Sensor] menu will be reflected to the same item settings in the [Factory] menu,
[Configure List] menu, [Configure QR] menu and [Head Check] menu.
[Head Check]
Perform the head check print.
1. Check and set the items as listed on the [Head Check] menu.
2. Press the
button to start the head check print. Press the
pause the print.
To stop the head check print, first pause the print and then press the
button again to
button.
The setting items are as follows:
Label Width
Set the media width used for the head check print.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
472
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
320 to 832 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
480 to 1248 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
960 to 2496 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
Label Length
Set the length of one piece of the media used for the head check print.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
40 to 240 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
60 to 360 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
120 to 720 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
Pitch
Set the print position in the vertical direction.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
When you decrease the setting value, the print position moves in the feed direction (toward the
front part of the media).
When you increase the setting value, the print position moves opposite the feed direction (toward
the end part of the media).
473
[HEX-Dump]
Offset
Set the stop position of the media.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
-30 to 0 to 30 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
-45 to 0 to 45 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
-90 to 0 to 90 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
When you decrease the setting value, the stop position moves in the feed direction (toward the
front part of the media).
When you increase the setting value, the stop position moves opposite the feed direction (toward
the end part of the media).
Darkness Adjust
Fine tune the print darkness of the head check print.
0 is the lightest and 99 is the darkest.
•
The value of [Label Length], [Pitch], [Offset] and [Darkness Adjust] set in the [Head
Check] menu will be reflected to the same item settings in the [Factory] menu,
[Configure List] menu, [Configure QR] menu and [Paper Sensor] menu.
[HEX-Dump]
Save the hex dump print data or dump data from the receive buffer to the USB memory.
The setting items are as follows:
474
Hex Dump Mode
Enable or disable the Hex Dump mode.
Buffer Dump
Save the receive buffer data to the product.
Log Files
Manage the log files of the product.
[Hex Dump Mode]
Enable or disable the Hex Dump mode.
If you set [Hex Dump Mode] to [Enabled], the product prints the received data and at the same time
creates a file of the received data inside "hexdump/".
When you return the setting to [Disabled], you can check the file on the screen.
475
[HEX-Dump]
•
If you set [Hex Dump Mode] to [Enabled], the icon on the Online/Offline screen
changes.
Hex Dump Mode: Disabled
Hex Dump Mode: Enabled
•
You can save a maximum of 10 received data files for each type of interface.
Depending on the file size, the number of files you can save will be less than 10.
•
The details of the files created in "hexdump/" in the product are as follows:
BT00xx.bin
Received data through Bluetooth.
LAN00xx.bin
Received data through LAN.
LPT00xx.bin
Received data through IEEE1284.
NFC00xx.bin
Received data through NFC.
PIPE00xx.bin
Received data through pipe.
SCI00xx.bin
Received data through RS-232C.
USB00xx.bin
Received data through USB.
WIFI00xx.bin
Received data through wireless LAN.
476
[Buffer Dump]
Save the receive buffer data to the product.
Available if you have set to [Disabled] in the [Hex Dump Mode] menu.
Press the [START] button (
button) on the startup screen to save the data to the product.
Save the receive buffer data to "buff/" in the product.
•
The data files of the receive buffer are created for each type of interface.
•
The details of the files created in "buff/" in the product are as follows:
BT0001.bin
The contents of the receive buffer for Bluetooth.
LAN0001.bin
The contents of the receive buffer for LAN.
LPT0001.bin
The contents of the receive buffer for IEEE1284.
NFC0001.bin
The contents of the receive buffer for NFC.
PIPE0001.bin
The contents of the receive buffer for pipe.
SCI0001.bin
The contents of the receive buffer for RS-232C.
USB0001.bin
The contents of the receive buffer for USB.
WIFI0001.bin
The contents of the receive buffer for wireless LAN.
•
If you perform the [Buffer Dump] again, the existing file will be overwritten.
477
[HEX-Dump]
[Log Files]
The setting items are as follows:
Copy
Copy the log files of the product to the USB memory.
◦
Available only if you have installed the USB memory.
Remove
Delete the log files of the product.
Print
Print a hex dump of the log files of the product.
[Copy]
Copy the log files of the product to the USB memory.
Available only if you have installed the USB memory.
478
•
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
product. SATO Corporation cannot be held responsible for any product malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
The procedure to copy the log files is as follows:
1. Select the file type to copy and press the
◦
button.
buff/
The buffer data saved when you perform the [Buffer Dump].
◦
hexdump/
The received data created through [Hex Dump Mode].
2. Select the file to copy and press the
file name.
button. A check mark appears on the right side of the
3. After you select the file, press the
button to copy the selected file to the USB memory.
•
When [Hex Dump Mode] is set to [Enabled], it may take some time before the files
appear.
479
[HEX-Dump]
[Remove]
Delete the log files of the product.
The procedure to delete the log files is as follows:
1. Select the file type to delete and press the
◦
button.
buff/
The buffer data saved when you perform the [Buffer Dump].
◦
hexdump/
The received data created through [Hex Dump Mode].
2. Select the file to delete and press the
file name.
3. After you select the file, press the
•
button. A check mark appears on the right side of the
button to delete the selected file.
When [Hex Dump Mode] is set to [Enabled], it may take some time before the files
appear.
480
[Print]
Print a hex dump of the log files of the product.
The procedure to print the log files is as follows:
1. Select the file type to print and press the
◦
button.
buff/
The buffer data saved when you perform the [Buffer Dump].
◦
hexdump/
The received data created through [Hex Dump Mode].
2. Select the file to print and press the
button or
button to perform the dump print.
•
Printing the contents of the file may use a lot of media.
•
When [Hex Dump Mode] is set to [Enabled], it may take some time before the files
appear.
481
[Reset]
[Reset]
Initialize the setting values and data saved on the product.
Press
button to show the [Select] menu.
[Select]
Select the items to be initialized.
The items are as follows:
Data
Initialize the data saved on the product.
Data & Settings
Initialize the data and setting values on the product.
Settings
Initialize the setting values on the product.
482
[Data]
Initialize the data saved on the product.
The data to be initialized are the fonts and graphics registered in the product.
When you select [Data], the confirmation screen appears.
Press the
button to cancel or
button to perform the initialization.
The product will reboot after the initialization.
•
Normally, it is not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing so could change the
print conditions.
[Data & Settings]
Initialize the data and setting values on the product.
Select the setting items to be initialized.
The options are as follows:
User Reset
Initialize the data and setting values.
User Reset (-Interface)
Initialize the data and setting values that are not included in the [Interface] menu.
483
[Reset]
Factory Reset
Initialize to the status after factory shipment.
Factory Reset (-Interface)
Initialize the items that are not included in the [Interface] menu to the status after factory
shipment.
Interface
Initialize the data and setting values in the [Interface] menu.
Printing
Initialize the data and setting values in the [Printing] menu.
Select the item to be initialized using the
show the confirmation screen.
Press the
button to cancel or
/
buttons and then press the
button to
button to perform the initialization.
The product will reboot after the initialization.
•
The data to be initialized are the fonts and graphics registered in the product.
[Settings]
484
Select the setting items to be initialized.
The options are as follows:
User Reset
Initialize the setting values.
User Reset (-Interface)
Initialize the setting values that are not included in the [Interface] menu.
Factory Reset
Initialize to the status after factory shipment.
Factory Reset (-Interface)
Initialize the items that are not included in the [Interface] menu to the status after factory
shipment.
Interface
Initialize the setting values in the [Interface] menu.
Printing
Initialize the setting values in the [Printing] menu.
Select the item to be initialized using the
show the confirmation screen.
Press the
button to cancel or
/
buttons and then press the
button to
button to perform the initialization.
After initialization, if a message prompting you to restart the product appears on the Online/Offline
screen, reboot the product to apply the settings.
485
[Profiles]
[Profiles]
Maintain the customized profile of the product settings.
The name of the last loaded profile appears in the parentheses.
The setting items are as follows:
Delete
Delete the profile of the product.
◦
Not available if no profile is saved.
Load
Load the profile of the product.
◦
Not available if no profile is saved.
Save
Save the current product settings as a new profile.
Start with
Select the profile to be loaded at product startup.
◦
Not available if no profile is saved.
486
[Delete]
Delete the profile of the product.
The procedure to delete the profile is as follows:
1. Select the profile to be deleted using the
2. Press the
/
button or press the
buttons.
button to confirm.
The profile name is deleted from the list.
[Load]
Load the profile of the product.
The procedure to load the profile is as follows:
1. Select the profile to be loaded using the
2. Press the
button or press the
/
buttons.
button to confirm.
A check mark appears on the right side of the loaded profile name. And the name of the loaded
profile appears on the [Profiles] menu in the parentheses.
487
[Profiles]
[Save]
Save the current product settings as a new profile.
The screen shows a list of the profiles saved in the product. If no profile is saved, the screen shows an
empty list.
To save the current product settings as a new profile, press the
of the profile.
button and enter the name
You can enter a maximum of 32 characters. You can use alphabets (capital and small letters),
numbers and symbols.
Press the
button to confirm.
The new profile name appears on the list and is loaded.
488
[Start with]
Select the profile to be loaded at product startup.
The procedure to load the profile at product startup is as follows:
1. Select the profile to be loaded at product startup using the
2. Press the
button or the
/
buttons.
button to confirm.
[Certificates]
Install certificates used for Wi-Fi authentication and for HTTPS.
Available only if you have installed the USB memory.
•
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
product. SATO Corporation cannot be held responsible for any product malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
The setting items are as follows:
489
[Certificates]
HTTPS
Installs the HTTPS certificates from the USB memory.
Wi-Fi Root CA
Installs the Wi-Fi Root CA certificates from the USB memory.
Wi-Fi Client
Installs the Wi-Fi client certificates from the USB memory.
Wi-Fi Private Key
Installs the Wi-Fi private key from the USB memory.
EAP-FAST PAC File
Installs the EAP-FAST PAC file from the USB memory.
The procedure to install the certificates and PAC files is as follows:
1. Save the certificate files to the USB thumb drive memory’s root folder.
Acceptable file extensions are as follows:
◦
.pem, .crt, .cer, .der for Root CA and client certificate in PEM or DER format
◦
.pfx and .p12 for client certificates in PKCS #12 format
◦
.prv and .key for private keys in PEM/PKCS#8 format
◦
.pac for PAC files
2.
3.
4.
5.
Insert the USB memory into the USB connector (Type A).
Go to the [Settings] > [Tools] > [Certificates] menu.
Select the certificate you want to install. Refer to the item description above.
Select the certificate file from the list.
490
[Barcode Checker]
Set the barcode check function.
By connecting a barcode checker to the product, you can check the barcodes after printing.
The setting items are as follows:
Test
Set up the barcode checker.
◦
Available only if you have connected the barcode checker.
Settings
Set the barcode check function.
•
This function cannot be used in the following conditions:
◦
When the print mode is tear-off mode
◦
When the product is in AEP mode
•
Use the optional barcode checker stand kit to mount the barcode checker to the
product. For details, refer to the Barcode Checker Stand Kit Installation Manual that
came with the barcode checker stand kit.
491
[Barcode Checker]
[Test]
Set up the barcode checker.
Available only if you have connected the barcode checker.
The setting items are as follows:
Reader Name
Shows the barcode checker connected to the product.
Reading Test
Perform a test read with the connected barcode checker.
Interface
Set the RS-232C interface usage.
[Reading Test]
Perform a test read with the connected barcode checker.
Available only if you have connected the barcode checker.
Set a label with barcodes within the scanning range of the barcode checker, and then press the
button to start reading.
492
If reading is successful, the code type and read data are displayed. The data is displayed only up to 23
bytes from the beginning.
If the reading is unsuccessful, or if the displayed read result is not correct, adjust the position of the
barcode checker by operating the barcode checker stand. For details on how to use the barcode
checker stand, refer to the Barcode Checker Stand Kit Installation Manual that came with the barcode
checker stand kit.
[Interface]
Set the RS-232C interface usage.
The options are as follows:
RS-232C
Use the RS-232C interface for communicating with computers.
RS-232C Reader
Select this when you connect the KEYENCE barcode checkers for the barcode check function.
•
A message prompting you to restart the product will appear on the Online/Offline
screen if you have made any changes. In such a case, reboot the product to apply the
settings.
493
[Barcode Checker]
[Settings]
Set the barcode check function.
The setting items are as follows:
Mode
Select the check mode or disable the barcode check function.
Set No. of Barcodes
Select the method to specify the number of barcodes per label.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Readable] in the [Mode] menu.
Barcodes per Label
Specify the number of barcodes per label when you include barcodes which are not created by
barcode commands.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Readable] in the [Mode] menu. Available only if you have
selected [Settings] in the [Set No. of Barcodes] menu.
Start Position
Adjust the position at which the barcode check starts (position of the barcode checker at which
reading starts).
VOID Print
Set whether to print error marks on the media when a barcode reading error or barcode
comparison error occurs.
Retry Count
Set how many times the product will try to print and check the same barcode after VOID printing
when a barcode reading error or barcode comparison error occurs.
◦
Appears only if you have selected [Enabled] in the [VOID Print] menu.
Host Notification
Set whether to return the barcode check results to the host from which the print data is sent.
494
Logs
Manage the barcode check log data saved in the product.
[Mode]
Select the check mode or disable the barcode check function.
The options are as follows:
Disabled
Disable the barcode check function.
Readable
Check if the printed barcodes are readable.
To include barcodes that are not created by barcode commands (such as graphic data or
preprinted barcodes) as the target of the barcode readability check, select [Settings] in [Set No. of
Barcodes], and specify the number of barcodes per label in [Barcodes per Label].
Comparison
Check if the read results of the printed barcodes match the barcode data in the print data. This
mode is for barcodes created by barcode commands.
495
[Barcode Checker]
[Set No. of Barcodes]
Select the method to specify the number of barcodes per label.
Appears only if you have selected [Readable] in the [Mode] menu.
The options are as follows:
Commands
Set barcodes created by barcode commands as the target of the barcode readability check.
Settings
Include barcodes that are not created by barcode commands (such as graphic data or preprinted
barcodes) as the target of the barcode readability check.
You need to specify the number of barcodes per label in [Barcodes per Label].
[Barcodes per Label]
Specify the number of barcodes per label when you include barcodes which are not created by
barcode commands as the target of the barcode readability check.
Appears only if you have selected [Readable] in the [Mode] menu. Available only if you have selected
[Settings] in the [Set No. of Barcodes] menu.
The setting range is from 1 to 10.
496
•
When excluding first barcode(s) from the check target by setting [Start Position],
specify the number of barcodes without the excluded barcodes.
[Start Position]
Adjust the position at which the barcode check starts (position of the barcode checker at which reading
starts).
The barcode checker starts reading each media after the specified length passes from the printing
start position.
This setting can be used to exclude first barcode(s) from the check target when multiple barcodes are
printed on each media.
The setting range varies depending on the print resolution of the product.
The setting range is as follows:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
10 to 20000 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
305 dpi
15 to 18000 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
30 to 9600 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
497
[Barcode Checker]
[VOID Print]
Set whether to print error marks on the media when a barcode reading error or barcode comparison
error occurs.
6 x 6 mm (0.24" x 0.24") error marks are printed within the width of the print data image and in a length
of up to 30 mm (1.18") from the trailing end of the label. The length varies depending on the image
length of the print data and the operation mode.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
If a reading error or comparison error occurs, the product prints error marks on the label without
pausing.
After VOID printing, the product prints and checks the same label until it reaches the number of
retries specified in [Retry Count]. If the error still occurs after the specified number of retries are
done, the product pauses after VOID printing, and shows an error message on the display.
Disabled
If a reading error or comparison error occurs, the product pauses and shows an error message on
the display.
498
•
The VOID Print function is not supported in dispenser and linerless modes.
•
The VOID Print function is not available when the length of the print data is less than 8
mm (0.31").
•
The VOID printing length becomes 4 mm (0.16") shorter when the media sensor type is
set to [Gap].
•
The VOID printing length becomes 1 mm (0.04") shorter when the media sensor type is
set to [I-Mark].
•
The backfeed amount of VOID printing is 30.0 mm (1.18"). However, if the image
length printed on the label to be checked is less than 30.0 mm (1.18"), the backfeed
amount will be the same as the image length.
•
When [VOID Print] is set to [Enabled], VOID printing is forcibly done if a comparison
error occurs, even when no cutting is performed in cutter mode.
[Retry Count]
Set how many times the product will try to print and check the same barcode after VOID printing when
a barcode reading error or barcode comparison error occurs.
Appears only if you have selected [Enabled] in the [VOID Print] menu.
The setting range is from 0 to 10.
As long as the error continues to occur, the label is reprinted up to the number of times specified in this
setting.
For example, if you set it to 0, if the error occurs while checking the first label, the product pauses and
shows an error message after VOID printing. If set to 5, if the error continues to occur until the 6th
label, the product pauses after VOID printing for the 6th label, and shows an error message.
499
[Barcode Checker]
[Host Notification]
Set whether to return the barcode check results to the host from which the print data is sent.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Return the barcode check result of each label to the host as follows:
◦
When the check is successful: <STX>BV, OK<ETX>
◦
When the check is unsuccessful: <STX>BV, NG<ETX>
Disabled
Do not return the barcode check results to the host.
[Logs]
Manage the barcode check log data saved in the product.
Available only if there is barcode check log data in the product.
Note that new log data overwrites on older log data when the log file reaches its maximum size (1
MB).
500
The setting items are as follows:
Copy
Copy the barcode check log data to the USB memory.
◦
Available only if you have installed the USB memory.
Remove
Remove the barcode check log data.
Format and Contents of the Barcode Check Log Data
The barcode check log data is created in the following format:
Format ID
Description
YYYY
1
Year of the date when the barcode check was performed
MM
1
Month of the date when the barcode check was performed
DD
hh
mm
ss
Day of the date when the barcode check was performed
1
1
Hour of the time when the barcode check was performed
Minute of the time when the barcode check was performed
1
Second of the time when the barcode check was performed
1
ZZZ
1
Time zone
TTTTTTT
The total number of printed labels after the product is powered on.
*When the total number of printed labels becomes greater than an 8-digit
number, the output digit will increase.
IR
The number of read data received after reaching the position at which the
check starts.
*When the check result is "IGNORED", this shows "00".
SRSR
Size of read data (bytes)
drdr...
Read data
RRRRRRR
Check result
SUCCESS
•
In readable mode, this means everything is correct.
•
In comparison mode, this means that the read data and
print data match.
501
[Barcode Checker]
Format ID
Description
FAILURE
IGNORED
IC
•
In readable mode, this means that the barcode checker
could not read the number of printed barcode data.
•
In comparison mode, this means that the read data and
print data do not match.
This means that the data is read during a period other
than from the start to the end of checking, while the
product is active.
The amount of print data as a check target
*If the check result is "IGNORED", this becomes "--".
SCSC
Size of print data (bytes)
*If the check result is "IGNORED", this becomes "----".
dcdc...
Print data
*If the check result is "IGNORED", nothing is output.
1
If the optional RTC kit is not installed, the system time will be output.
[Copy]
Copy the barcode check log data to the USB memory.
Available only if there is barcode check log data in the product and if you have installed the USB
memory.
•
Press the
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
product. SATO Corporation cannot be held responsible for any product malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
button to copy the log data to the USB memory.
502
[Remove]
Delete the barcode check log file.
Available only if there is barcode check log data in the product.
Press the
button to delete the log data.
[Clone]
Copy the current product settings and the installed data to the USB memory.
Available only if you have installed the USB memory.
•
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
product. SATO Corporation cannot be held responsible for any product malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
This function is useful to transfer the settings of a product you are replacing to continue using them in
a new product, or if you are setting up multiple products with the same settings.
The options are as follows:
503
[Support Info]
Excl. LAN/Wi-Fi/IP
Copy the product settings and data, excluding network information, to the USB memory. This is
useful when you set up multiple products, that are already connected to a network, with the same
settings.
Incl. LAN/Wi-Fi
Copy the product settings and data, including network information (excluding the IP address), to
the USB memory. This is useful when you set up multiple products to be connected to the same
network with the same settings.
Incl. LAN/Wi-Fi/IP
Copy the product settings and data, including network information (including the IP address), to
the USB memory. This is useful when transferring the settings of a product you are replacing to
continue using them in a new product.
[Support Info]
Save various information about the product, such as attached options, serial number, application
versions and settings configuration, in a text file (.txt) to the USB memory.
Available only if you have installed the USB memory.
•
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
product. SATO Corporation cannot be held responsible for any product malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
By selecting [Support Info] and pressing the
USB memory.
button, the support information is saved to the
504
After saving is complete, the saved location is displayed.
Press the
button to complete.
[Logging Function]
Save the log data.
The setting items are as follows:
Enabled
Enable or disable the logging function.
Save
Save the log data to the USB memory.
Remove
Delete the log data.
505
[Logging Function]
[Enabled]
Enable or disable the logging function.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the logging function. When this function is enabled, the log data is saved when powering
off the product.
Disabled
Disable the logging function.
•
When this function is enabled, log data is saved when powering off, so it may take
some time to power off the product. Wait until the product is powered off.
•
While the log data is being saved, a red message that says "Log Saving" appears on
the screen.
•
The product stores log data for the last five times the product was powered off.
•
The types of log data that are saved are as follows:
◦
Key events
◦
Analysis status
◦
System logs and settings
◦
Shared memory (including receive buffer)
◦
Operational logs for the barcode scanner
506
[Save]
Save the log data to the USB memory.
Available only if there is log data in the product and if you have installed the USB memory.
•
Press the
Be sure to perform a virus check on the USB memory before connecting it to the
product. SATO Corporation cannot be held responsible for any product malfunctions
caused by a virus spread via USB memory.
button to copy the log data to the USB memory.
•
The saved log data is strictly for the use of SATO authorized service personnel.
[Remove]
Press the
button to delete the log data.
507
[Startup Guide]
[Startup Guide]
The startup guide is a function to help you through the initial product settings (such as setting date and
time, and loading the ribbon and media).
Enable or disable the startup guide.
The options are as follows:
Enabled
Enable the startup guide.
Disabled
Disable the startup guide.
If you have selected [Enabled], the startup guide appears when you power on the product.
508
[Information] Menu
The following settings are available in the [Information] menu:
Help
Shows the guidance video.
Build Version
Shows the firmware version.
Applications
Shows various application versions.
Installation Log
Shows the installation log data.
◦
Appears only if there is log data in the product.
Print Module
Shows the print module information.
Counters
Shows the counter information.
IPv4 Address
Shows the IPv4 address.
IPv6 Address
Shows the IPv6 address.
◦
Does not appear when Wi-Fi Direct is active.
LAN MAC
Shows the MAC address of the LAN.
509
[Help]
◦
Appears only if the LAN interface is selected.
Wi-Fi MAC
Shows the MAC address of the wireless LAN.
◦
Appears only if the optional wireless LAN is installed and the Wi-Fi interface is selected.
Wi-Fi Region
Shows the region information of the wireless LAN.
◦
Appears only if the optional wireless LAN is installed and the Wi-Fi interface is selected.
Wi-Fi Status
Shows the status of the wireless LAN.
◦
Appears only if the optional wireless LAN is installed and the Wi-Fi interface is selected.
Wi-Fi Direct
Shows the connection information of Wi-Fi Direct.
◦
Appears only if connected using Wi-Fi Direct.
Wi-Fi Versions
Shows the version of the wireless LAN.
◦
Appears only if the optional wireless LAN is installed and the Wi-Fi interface is selected.
[Help]
Shows the guidance video.
You can view the video for loading the media and ribbon, the cleaning method and replacement
method of consumables.
510
The list of videos are as follows:
Install Paper
Shows the video for loading the media.
Install Ribbon
Shows the video for loading the ribbon.
Replace Paper
Shows the video for replacing the media.
Replace Ribbon
Shows the video for replacing the ribbon.
Replace Head
Shows the video for replacing the print head.
Replace Platen
Shows the video for replacing the platen roller.
Cleaning
Shows the video of the cleaning method.
[Install Paper]
Shows the video for loading the media.
The items are as follows:
Roll
Shows the video for loading the media roll.
Fanfold
Shows the video for loading the fan-fold media.
511
[Help]
[Roll]
Shows the video for loading the media roll.
The items are as follows:
Standard
Shows the video for loading the media roll to a standard product.
Cutter
Shows the video for loading the media roll to a product installed with a cutter.
Linerless
Shows the video for loading the media roll to a product installed with a linerless cutter kit.
Dispenser
Shows the video for loading the media roll to a product installed with a dispenser.
Dispenser with Rewinder
Shows the video for loading the media roll to a product installed with a dispenser and liner
rewinder.
[Fanfold]
Shows the video for loading the fan-fold media.
512
The items are as follows:
Standard
Shows the video for loading the fan-fold media to a standard product.
Cutter
Shows the video for loading the fan-fold media to a product installed with a cutter.
[Replace Paper]
Shows the video for replacing the media.
The items are as follows:
Roll
Shows the video for replacing the media roll.
Fanfold
Shows the video for replacing the fan-fold media.
[Roll]
Shows the video for replacing the media roll.
513
[Help]
The items are as follows:
Standard
Shows the video for replacing the media roll in a standard product.
Cutter
Shows the video for replacing the media roll in a product installed with a cutter.
Linerless
Shows the video for replacing the media roll in a product installed with a linerless cutter kit.
Dispenser
Shows the video for replacing the media roll in a product installed with a dispenser.
Dispenser with Rewinder
Shows the video for replacing the media roll in a product installed with a dispenser and liner
rewinder.
[Fanfold]
Shows the video for replacing the fan-fold media.
The items are as follows:
Standard
Shows the video for replacing the fan-fold media in a standard product.
Cutter
Shows the video for replacing the fan-fold media in a product installed with a cutter.
514
[Build Version]
Shows the information and version of the product.
Name
Shows the name of the build version.
Date
Shows the build date.
Checksum
Shows the checksum of the build version.
Kernel Version
Shows the kernel version.
Boot Version
Shows the boot version.
[Kernel Version]
Shows the kernel version of the product.
515
[Applications]
[Boot Version]
Shows the boot version of the product.
The items are as follows:
Disks
Shows the Disks.
Warp!!-mode
A checked box means enabled. An unchecked box means disabled.
Date
Shows the build date of the boot version.
[Applications]
Shows the versions of the applications installed in the product, such as printer languages.
516
[Installation Log]
Show or clear the installation log data in the product.
The setting items are as follows:
RPM log
Shows the RPM log data.
System Restore
Shows the system restore log data.
Press the
button (CLEAR) to clear the selected log data.
•
This screen does not appear if there is no log data in the product.
[RPM log]
Shows a list of RPM log files containing three sections: installed, updated and obsolete.
The RPM log file is created after installing a pkg-file containing rpm-files.
517
[Print Module]
[System Restore]
Shows the system restore log.
The system restore log file is created after installing a pkg-file that caused a state in which the
product's operator panel cannot be operated.
[Print Module]
Shows information about the print module on the product.
The items are as follows:
Boot
Shows the Boot firmware version.
Main
Shows the Main firmware version.
518
[Boot]
Name
Shows the Boot firmware version.
Release Date
Shows the Boot firmware release date.
Checksum
Shows the Boot firmware checksum.
[Main]
Name
Shows the Main firmware version.
Release Date
Shows the Main firmware release date.
Checksum
Shows the Main firmware checksum.
519
[Counters]
[Counters]
Shows information about the counters on the product.
The setting items are as follows:
Head
Shows information about the head counter on the product.
Cutter
Shows the current number of cuts.
•
Only SATO authorized service personnel are permitted to clear the counter.
[Head]
Shows information about the head counter on the product.
Life
Shows the current print distance.
Head 1
520
Head 2
Head 3
The current print distance is shown in [Head 1]. When you replace the print head and the counter
is cleared, the value of [Head 2] appears in [Head 3] and the value of [Head 1] appears in [Head
2]. [Head 1] will start to count from 0 again.
[IPv4 Address]
Shows the IPv4 address.
[IPv6 Address]
Shows the IPv6 address.
•
When Wi-Fi Direct is active, this IPv6 address screen does not appear.
521
[Wi-Fi MAC]
[LAN MAC]
Shows the MAC address of the LAN.
Appears only if LAN is the active interface.
[Wi-Fi MAC]
Shows the MAC address of the wireless LAN.
Appears only if you have installed the optional wireless LAN and Wi-Fi is the active interface.
522
[Wi-Fi Region]
Shows the region information of the wireless LAN.
Appears only if you have installed the optional wireless LAN and Wi-Fi is the active interface.
[Wi-Fi Status]
Shows the status of the wireless LAN.
Appears only if you have installed the optional wireless LAN and Wi-Fi is the active interface.
523
[Wi-Fi Versions]
[Wi-Fi Direct]
Shows the connection information of Wi-Fi Direct.
Appears only if Wi-Fi Direct is the active interface and you are connected using Wi-Fi Direct.
[Wi-Fi Versions]
Shows the version of the wireless LAN.
Appears only if you have installed the optional wireless LAN and Wi-Fi is the active interface.
524
Configuring the Product Settings from a Web Browser
Accessing to the Web Configuration Page
The product can be operated through a web configuration page using any browser.
With an Ethernet LAN or WLAN connection, users can remotely get information from the product or
configure the product's settings.
•
You need the product's IP address to access the web configuration page. The
product's IP address can be checked in [Settings] > [Information] > [IPv4 Address].
•
If the product's [Settings] > [Interface] > [Network] > [Advanced] > [Firewall] > [Enable]
menu is set to [Enabled], [Settings] > [Interface] > [Network] > [Advanced] > [Firewall] >
[Allow Services And Ports] > [WebConfig] must be set to [Enabled].
1. Open up the browser and enter the product's URL.
If the product's IP address is 192.168.143.123, enter the following URL: https://192.168.143.123
When a security certificate is prompted, you must acknowledge and click Continue.
The web configuration page for the product appears. On the upper right (1) of each page, the
model name, current resolution and MAC address are shown.
2. Log in to view the [Settings] and [Tools] pages.
You can view [Dashboard] and [Certificates] pages without logging in.
a. Click [Login] (2).
525
Accessing to the Web Configuration Page
b. Select [settings] for the user, enter the password, and click [Login].
The default user is [settings], and the default password is "0310".
3. Click on the page (3) you want to view.
526
Dashboard
[Dashboard] is the initial page for the web configuration page. Each section shows specific information
or the current status of the product.
•
You can view the [Dashboard] page without logging in.
(1) [Printer Status]
Shows the current state (online, offline, error) and current status icons.
(2) [Printing]
Shows the print speed, darkness, sensor, print mode and backfeed setting.
(3) [Device]
Shows the model, current resolution and options that are installed.
(4) [Network]
Shows the current IP address and MAC address of the active interface.
(5) [System]
Shows the current firmware version, uptime, SNMP contact, name and location.
(6) [Wi-Fi]
Shows the current Wi-Fi setting.
•
This information is shown only if Wi-Fi is available and active.
527
Dashboard
(7) [Wi-Fi Strength]
Shows the current Wi-Fi communication strength.
•
If the product is P2P GO, the Wi-Fi Strength will not be shown.
528
Settings
Settings equivalent to the product's Settings mode can be done on the browser.
•
Login is required to view the [Settings] page. Click [Login] to log in before opening the
[Settings] page.
The default user is [settings], and the default password is "0310".
(1) [Printing]
You can do the settings equivalent to [Settings] > [Printing] in the Settings mode.
(2) [Interface]
You can do the settings equivalent to [Settings] > [Interface] in the Settings mode.
(3) [Applications]
You can do the settings equivalent to [Settings] > [Applications] in the Settings mode.
(4) [System]
You can do the settings equivalent to [Settings] > [System] in the Settings mode.
(5) [Tools]
You can do the settings equivalent to [Settings] > [Tools] in the Settings mode.
(6) [Information]
You can do the settings equivalent to [Settings] > [Information] in the Settings mode.
529
Settings
The screen below is the example of [Printing] page.
•
If a message prompting you to restart the product appears at the top of the page, click
[Reboot printer] to reboot the product to apply the settings.
530
Tools
Various settings and operations can be performed in this page: installing certificates for authentication,
checking the log, and test printing.
•
Login is required to view the [Tools] page. Click [Login] to log in before opening the
[Tools] page.
The default user is [settings], and the default password is "0310".
(1) [Upload]
You can do the setting equivalent to [Settings] > [Tools] > [Certificates] in the Settings mode.
Install certificates used for Wi-Fi authentication and for HTTPS.
Click [Browse] of the certificate you want to install.
Select the certificate file from the list and click [Upload], and the authentication file will be
installed.
(2) [Clone]
You can do the setting equivalent to [Settings] > [Tools] > [Clone] in the Settings mode. Copy the
current product settings and the installed data.
(3) [Install Package]
Refer to "Section 2.5 Downloading Firmware" of the CL4NX Plus service manual.
(4) [Logs]
List all log files in the log directory. Users can click to download the file.
(5) [Reset]
You can do the setting equivalent to [Settings] > [Tools] > [Reset] in the Settings mode. Initialize
the setting values and data saved on the product.
(6) [Passwords]
You can do the setting equivalent to [Settings] > [System] > [Password] > [Change Password] in
the Settings mode. Change the passwords for the product.
531
Tools
(7) [Test Print]
You can do the setting equivalent to [Settings] > [Tools] > [Test Print] in the Settings mode.
Perform a test print.
(8) [Support Info]
You can do the setting equivalent to [Settings] > [Tools] > [Support Info] in the Settings mode. You
can also get screenshots of the current product display and an image of the last label printed.
(9) [Reboot]
Reboot the product.
532
Certificates
Shows the root certificate authority and client certificates installed on the product.
•
The client certificate that is a PFX (PKCS #12) file will not be shown.
533
Outputting with General-purpose Software
Various Ways to Output
Outputting with General-purpose Software
Labels can be easily output by using software, such as the NiceLabel series.
•
NiceLabel series
This software has multiple functions and is easy to operate so you can create and print labels
with richly versatile layouts.
•
For details of the products, contact your SATO sales representative.
534
Outputting and Controlling with Dedicated Command
A variety of labels and tags can be printed from simple formats to complex formats by sending the
SBPL (SATO Barcode Printer Language) command to the product.
In addition, you can print characters, barcodes, and graphics in various styles by combining multiple
SBPL commands. There are many functions for modifying the printed items, such as enlarging fonts,
specifying a print direction, ruled line, and black and white reverse printing.
For programming references, contact your SATO sales representative or technical support center.
535
Controlling the Product with External Signal
Controlling the Product with External Signal
By using the external signal (EXT) interface, you can connect the product to an external device and
print. With the control signal, you can control print operations; such as monitoring the condition of the
product, starting printing, and reprinting.
536
Adjusting the Product
Printable Area
The printable area of the product is as follows:
(1) Frame
(2) Print head
(3) Media feed direction
(4) Printable area (Standard)
(5) Printable area (Left-justify)
537
Media Sensor Positions and Media Stop Positions
Media Sensor Positions and Media Stop Positions
The media stop positions with the media sensor and various operation modes are as follows:
(1) Media stop position in dispenser mode
(2) Media stop position in cutter mode
(3) Media stop position in tear-off mode
(4) Print head
(5) Media feed direction
(6) Gap sensor
(7) I-mark sensor
538
(8) Frame
539
Printing Operations
Flow of Printing Operations
Printing Operations
Printing operations vary depending on the combination of the following settings.
•
Print Mode
•
Enabled/disabled media sensor
•
With/without pulse input (from external signal (EXT) interface)
•
Enabled/disabled head check
540
Operations in Continuous Mode
Operation 1: Continuous Mode Without Pulse Input (Head Check Disabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
541
Operation 2: Continuous Mode Without Pulse Input (Head Check Enabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
542
Operation 3: Continuous Mode with Pulse Input (Head Check Disabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
543
Operation 4: Continuous Mode with Pulse Input (Head Check Enabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
544
Operations in Tear-Off Mode
Operation 5: Tear-Off Mode Without Pulse Input (Head Check Disabled)
Operation
*1 After printing, if the period specified in Option Waiting Time <TW> (initial value: 0 ms) has passed
and if there is no print data remaining, the product will feed the media to the position for manual
cutting.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
545
Operations in Tear-Off Mode
Timing Chart (When <TW> is 0)
Timing Chart (When <TW> is 500)
546
Operation 6: Tear-Off Mode Without Pulse Input (Head Check Enabled)
Operation
*1 After printing, if the period specified in Option Waiting Time <TW> (initial value: 0 ms) has passed
and if there is no print data remaining, the product will feed the media to the position for manual
cutting.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
547
Timing Chart (When <TW> is 0)
Timing Chart (When <TW> is 500)
548
Operation 7: Tear-Off Mode with Pulse Input (Head Check Disabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
549
Operation 8: Tear-Off Mode with Pulse Input (Head Check Enabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
550
Operations in Cutter Mode
Operation 9: Cutter Mode, No Backfeed, and Without Pulse Input (Head Check
Disabled)
Operation
*1 Because backfeeding is not done, the media in the head area becomes non-printable.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
551
Operations in Cutter Mode
Timing Chart
552
Operation 10: Cutter Mode, No Backfeed, and Without Pulse Input (Head Check
Enabled)
Operation
*1 Because backfeeding is not done, the media in the head area becomes non-printable.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
553
Operation 11: Cutter Mode, Backfeed After Printing, and Without Pulse Input (Head
Check Disabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
554
Operation 12: Cutter Mode, Backfeed After Printing, and Without Pulse Input (Head
Check Enabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
555
Operation 13: Cutter Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and Without Pulse Input (Head
Check Disabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
556
Operation 14: Cutter Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and Without Pulse Input (Head
Check Enabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
557
Operation 15: Cut & Print Mode Without Pulse Input (Head Check Disabled)
Operation
*1 After printing, if the next data is received, printing will be done and the media will be cut on the cut
position.
*2 After printing, if the next data is not received and the waiting period for Eject Cut has passed, Eject
Cut will be performed.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
558
Timing Chart
559
Operation 16: Cut & Print Mode Without Pulse Input (Head Check Enabled)
Operation
*1 After printing, if the next data is received, printing will be done and the media will be cut on the cut
position.
*2 After printing, if the next data is not received and the waiting period for Eject Cut has passed, Eject
Cut will be performed.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
560
Timing Chart
561
Operation 17: Cutter Mode, No Backfeed, and with Pulse Input (Head Check
Disabled)
Operation
*1 Because backfeeding is not done, the media in this area is not printable.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
562
Operation 18: Cutter Mode, No Backfeed, and with Pulse Input (Head Check
Enabled)
Operation
*1 Because backfeeding is not done, the media in this area is not printable.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
563
Operation 19: Cutter Mode, Backfeed After Printing, and with Pulse Input (Head
Check Disabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
564
Operation 20: Cutter Mode, Backfeed After Printing, and with Pulse Input (Head
Check Enabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
565
Operation 21: Cutter Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and with Pulse Input (Head
Check Disabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
566
Operation 22: Cutter Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and with Pulse Input (Head
Check Enabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
567
Operations in Dispenser Mode
Operations in Dispenser Mode
Operation 23: Dispenser Mode, No Backfeed, and with Sensor Input (Head Check
Disabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the product does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
*2 Because backfeeding is not done, the media in this area is non-printable.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
568
Operation 24: Dispenser Mode, No Backfeed, and with Sensor Input (Head Check
Enabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the product does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
*2 Because backfeeding is not done, the media in this area is non-printable.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
569
Operation 25: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed After Printing, and Without Pulse Input
(Head Check Disabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the product does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
570
Operation 26: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed After Printing, and Without Pulse Input
(Head Check Enabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the product does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
571
Operation 27: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and Without Pulse Input
(Head Check Disabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the product does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
572
Operation 28: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and Without Pulse Input
(Head Check Enabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the product does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
573
Operation 29: Dispenser Mode, No Backfeed, and with Pulse Input (Head Check
Disabled)
Operation
*1 Because backfeeding is not done, the media in this area is non-printable.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
574
Operation 30: Dispenser Mode, No Backfeed, and with Pulse Input (Head Check
Enabled)
Operation
*1 Because backfeeding is not done, the media in this area is non-printable.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
575
Operation 31: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed After Printing, and with Pulse Input (Head
Check Disabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
576
Operation 32: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed After Printing, and with Pulse Input (Head
Check Enabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the Gap sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
577
Operation 33: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and with Pulse Input
(Head Check Disabled)
Operation
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
578
Operation 34: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and with Pulse Input
(Head Check Enabled)
Operation
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
579
Operation 35: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed After Printing, with Pulse Input, and with
the Dispenser Completion Signal (Head Check Disabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the product does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
Timing Chart
580
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
*2 After backfeed, the PREND signal is outputted.
581
Operation 36: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed After Printing, with Pulse Input, and with
the Dispenser Completion Signal (Head Check Enabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the product does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
582
*2 After backfeed, the PREND signal is outputted.
583
Operation 37: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, with Pulse Input, and with
the Dispenser Completion Signal (Head Check Disabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the product does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
584
Operation 38: Dispenser Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, with Pulse Input, and with
the Dispenser Completion Signal (Head Check Enabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the product does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
585
Operations in Linerless Mode
Operations in Linerless Mode
Operation 39: Linerless Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and Without Pulse Input
(Head Check Disabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the product does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
*2 The backfeed speed becomes 2 inches/sec immediately after powering on the product, immediately
after backing from the sleep mode, or after 60 minutes or more from the last printing.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the I-mark sensor is used.
586
Timing Chart
587
Operation 40: Linerless Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and Without Pulse Input
(Head Check Enabled)
Operation
*1 The dispenser sensor confirms the dispensing condition and the product does not perform the next
operation until the label is dispensed.
*2 The backfeed speed becomes 2 inches/sec immediately after powering on the product, immediately
after backing from the sleep mode, or after 60 minutes or more from the last printing.
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the I-mark sensor is used.
588
Timing Chart
589
Operation 41: Linerless Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and with Pulse Input (Head
Check Disabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the I-mark sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
590
Operation 42: Linerless Mode, Backfeed Before Printing, and with Pulse Input (Head
Check Enabled)
Operation
•
The figure above shows the reference position when the I-mark sensor is used.
Timing Chart
*1 Keep the PRIN signal until the PREND signal is outputted.
591
Operations When the Barcode Check Function Is Enabled
Operations When the Barcode Check Function Is Enabled
Operation 50: Continuous Mode When the Barcode Check Function Is Enabled
592
Operation 51: Cutter Mode (Cutting Every Label) When the Barcode Check Function
Is Enabled
593
Operation 52: Cutter Mode (Cutting According to the Specified Number of Labels,
No Cutting) When the Barcode Check Function Is Enabled
594
Operation 53: Cut & Print Mode When the Barcode Check Function Is Enabled
*1 Do not print barcodes/2D codes on the area between the print head and the cut position.
595
Operation 54: Dispenser Mode When the Barcode Check Function Is Enabled
596
Operations When the Media Sensor Is Disabled
Operation 55: Media Sensor Disabled
When the media sensor is disabled, media stops at the specified print end line.
597
About the Base Reference Point
Adjusting the Base Reference Point
About the Base Reference Point
The base reference point is the point at which one determines the print position and stop/cut/
dispensing position.
The base reference point differs depending on the operation mode or media sensor you use.
Continuous Mode/Tear-off Mode
I-mark Label
Gap Label
(1) Feed direction
(1) Feed direction
(2) Print and stop position
(2) Print and stop position
Cutter Mode
I-mark Label
Gap Label
(1) Feed direction
(1) Feed direction
(2) Cut position
(2) Print and cut position
(3) Print position
598
Dispenser Mode
I-mark Label
Gap Label
(1) Feed direction
(1) Feed direction
(2) Dispensing position
(2) Print and dispensing position
(3) Print position
Linerless Mode
I-mark Linerless Label
(1) Feed direction
(2) Cut position
(3) Print position
(4) Non-printable zone (5 mm / 0.2")
599
Adjusting the Print Position
Adjusting the Print Position
Set the [Pitch] in the [Printing] > [Advanced] > [Adjustments] menu to adjust the print position.
•
The above reference position (print position) is the stop position when the media
sensor type is set to Gap.
1. When the product is in Online mode, press the
change to Offline mode.
2. Press the
button on the operator panel to
button to show the [Settings] menu.
600
3. Select [Printing] using the
/
buttons, and then press the
4. Select the [Advanced] > [Adjustments] > [Pitch] menu using the
and then press the
button.
/
buttons,
button.
The [Pitch] screen appears.
5. Change the setting value. Press the
and then press the
/
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
-30 to +30 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
-45 to +45 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
/
buttons to select a number
button to enter the number to the text box.
The setting range is as follows:
305 dpi
/
-90 to +90 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
601
Adjusting the Print Position
6. Press the
button to save the setting value.
7. Press the
button to change to Offline mode.
8. Press the
button again to change to Online mode.
You can print to check the adjusted print position.
602
Adjusting the Media Stop Position
Set the [Offset] in the [Printing] > [Advanced] > [Adjustments] menu to adjust the media stop position.
•
The above cut reference position for printing indicates the stop position when the
media sensor type is set to Gap.
•
You can also adjust when the operation mode is specified to Tear-off or Dispenser.
1. When the product is in Online mode, press the
change to Offline mode.
2. Press the
button on the operator panel to
button to show the [Settings] menu.
603
Adjusting the Media Stop Position
3. Select [Printing] using the
/
buttons, and then press the
4. Select the [Advanced] > [Adjustments] > [Offset] menu using the
and then press the
button.
/
buttons,
button.
The [Offset] screen appears.
5. Change the setting value. Press the
and then press the
/
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
-30 to +30 dots
(1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
-45 to +45 dots
(1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
609 dpi
/
buttons to select a number
button to enter the number to the text box.
The setting range is as follows:
305 dpi
/
-90 to +90 dots
(1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
604
6. Press the
button to save the setting value.
7. Press the
button to change to Offline mode.
8. Press the
button again to change to Online mode.
You can print to check the adjusted stop position.
605
Notes on the Stop/Cut Position of Different Media
Notes on the Stop/Cut Position of Different Media
Stop Position of the Label in Dispenser Mode
The regular position is to let the label stay about 2 ± 1 mm (0.08" ± 0.04") on the liner.
(1) Feed direction
(2) Dispenser bar
(3) Stop position
Cut Position When Using the Label in Cutter Mode
The regular cut position is between labels (only cut on the liner).
When you cut the label, the glue adheres to the blade of the cutter and the blade will decrease the
performance of the cutter. Adjust the cut position so as not to cut the label.
(1) Media feed direction
(2) Cut position (I-mark sensor)
(3) Cut position (Gap sensor)
(4) Label
(5) Liner
606
Cut Position When Using the Media with Perforated Line in Cutter Mode
Adjust the cut position so as not to cut the media on the perforated line and on the area near side from
the perforated line (the area is shown in the figure below).
When the media is cut on the area not to be cut, it could cause a paper jam or damage.
(1) Feed direction
(2) Perforated line
(3) Cut position
607
Adjusting the Print Darkness
Adjusting the Print Quality
Adjusting the Print Darkness
The adjustment procedure for the print darkness is as follows:
•
You can fine tune the print darkness by setting the [Darkness Adjust] in the [Printing] >
[Advanced] > [Adjustments] menu.
•
When the [Printing] > [Advanced] > [Prioritize] menu has been set to [Commands]
and the print darkness is specified by command, the data will be printed with the print
darkness specified by the command.
•
While the print job is paused, the [Adjustments] menu will appear instead of the
[Settings] menu and you can adjust the print darkness.
1. When the product is in Online mode, press the
mode.
2. Press the
button to change to Offline
button to show the [Settings] menu.
608
3. Press the
/
buttons to select [Printing], and then press the
4. Press the
/
buttons to select [Darkness], and then press the
The [Darkness] screen appears.
5. Press the
/
buttons to select a value.
The setting range is from 1 to 10. 1 is the lightest and 10 is the darkest.
609
button.
button.
Adjusting the Print Darkness
6. Press the
button or
button to save the setting value.
7. Press the
button to change to Offline mode.
8. Press the
button again to change to Online mode.
You can print to check the print quality.
610
Adjusting the Print Speed
The adjustment of the print speed not only changes the speed of printing but also affects the print
quality.
The setting range of the print speed varies depending on the following print resolution:
Resolution
CL4NX Plus
203 dpi
2 to 14 ips (inches/sec) (50.8 to 355.6 mm/sec)
(8 dots/mm)
305 dpi
(12 dots/mm)
609 dpi
2 to 6 (inches/sec) (50.8 to 152 mm/sec)
(24 dots/mm)
•
When the [Printing] > [Advanced] > [Prioritize] menu has been set to [Commands] and
the print speed is specified by command, the data will be printed with the print speed
specified by the command.
•
While the print job is paused, the [Adjustments] menu will appear instead of the
[Settings] menu and you can adjust the print speed.
•
If the optional linerless cutter kit is installed to CL4NX Plus, the setting range is 2 to 6
(inches/sec) (50.8 to 152 mm/sec) regardless of the printing resolution.
1. When the product is in Online mode, press the
mode.
2. Press the
button to change to Offline
button to show the [Settings] menu.
611
Adjusting the Print Speed
3. Press the
/
buttons to select [Printing], and then press the
4. Press the
/
buttons to select [Speed], and then press the
The [Speed] screen appears.
5. Press the
6. Press the
/
buttons to select a value.
button or
button to save the setting value.
612
button.
button.
7. Press the
button to change to Offline mode.
8. Press the
button again to change to Online mode.
You can print to check the print quality.
613
Adjusting the Product's Buzzer Volume
Adjusting the Product's Buzzer Volume
The adjustment procedure for the buzzer volume when an error occurs is as follows:
1. When the product is in Online mode, press the
mode.
2. Press the
3. Press the
button to change to Offline
button to show the [Settings] menu.
/
buttons to select [System], and then press the
614
button.
4. Press the
/
buttons to select [Sound] > [Error Sound], and then press the
button.
The [Error Sound] screen appears.
5. Press the
/
buttons to set the volume.
The options are as follows:
[Off]
Mute the sound.
[Low]
Low volume.
[Medium]
Medium volume.
[High]
High volume.
6. Press the
button or
button to save the setting.
615
Print Head Balance
Adjusting the Head Pressure Balance
Print Head Balance
Print head balance refers to the equalization of pressure between the print head and the platen roller.
If the print head balance is out of adjustment, the printed image will be darker on one side of the media
than the other and the media will be prone to travel in the direction of greater pressure.
Setting the Criteria of the Head Pressure Balance
The criteria of the head pressure balance is set to adapt to the using media.
•
Set the head pressure according to the media thickness, including the liner.
•
Set the pressure balance according to the media width ( if necessary).
616
Head Pressure Setting
Set the head pressure according to the media thickness, including the liner.
1. Open the top cover of the product.
2. Find the adjustment dials (1) on the top of the print head assembly.
3. Turn the adjustment dials (1) according to the media thickness and set the head
pressure.
Media Thickness
(mm (inch))
Adjustment Dials
0.060 - 0.200 (0.0024" - 0.0079")
(Left and Right)
0.200 - 0.268 (0.0079" - 0.011")
to
(Left and Right)
Reference
Thin paper/normal label, etc.
Thick paper/tag, etc.
•
The factory default settings of both Left and Right dials are
•
The thickness of the media includes the liner.
.
After adjusting the head pressure, perform actual printing and if media feeding starts to shift to the
right side when facing the product, adjust the pressure balance referring to the Pressure Balance
Setting.
617
Pressure Balance Setting
Pressure Balance Setting
After adjusting the head pressure, if media feeding starts to shift to the right side when facing the
product, adjust the pressure balance referring to this procedure.
Set the pressure balance according to the media width to be used.
1. Open the top cover of the product.
2. Find the adjustment dials (1) on the top of the print head assembly.
3. Turn the adjustment dials (1) according to the media width and set the pressure
balance.
The table below shows an example of when the head pressure is Left
.
Media Width (mm (inch))
25 - 54 (0.98" 2.13")
54 - 83 (2.13" 3.27")
83 - 131 (3.27" 5.16")
Adjustment Dials
Left
Left
Left
Right
Right
Right
•
The factory default settings of both Left and Right dials are
•
The dial setting values in the table are only for reference, and the values may vary
depending on the media type. Be sure to check if the print quality is stable by actually
printing.
618
.
Configuring Optional Barcode Check Function
Basic Specifications of the Barcode Check Function
The barcode check function does a reading check of a barcode printed by this product to prevent the
distribution of labels with defective barcodes. You can use this function by installing the supported
barcode checkers to the product.
The basic specifications of the barcode check function are as follows:
Item
Specification
Supported Barcode
Checkers
•
IDEC/DATALOGIC (USB connection)
◦
WB1F-100S1S (for 1D barcodes)
◦
GFS4170 (for 1D barcodes)
◦
GFS4470 (for 1D barcodes/2D codes)
•
KEYENCE (RE-232C connection)
◦
BL-1301 (for 1D barcodes)
◦
SR-710 (for 1D barcodes/2D codes)
Refer to the manual of the barcode checker for its settings and
supported barcodes.
Supported Commands
SBPL/SZPL/SIPL/STCL/SDPL/SEPL
•
Supported Print Modes
AEP is not supported.
Continuous/Cutter/Cut & Print/Dispenser/Linerless
•
Not available in Tear-Off mode.
•
The Void Print function is not available in Dispenser/
Linerless mode.
Print Speed/Print
Darkness
The optimal print speed and print darkness for secure reading vary
depending on various conditions, such as the barcode type and label
layout. Be sure to perform a test read carefully and determine the
settings.
Printable Area
Same as the product specifications. However, there are following
restrictions:
(Barcode Readable Area)
619
Basic Specifications of the Barcode Check Function
Item
Specification
Continuous mode
Barcodes printed within the range of 11 mm (0.43") from the trailing
end of the label cannot be read because it is blocked by the print
head and ribbon adjustment plate.
(1) Media feed direction
(2) Ribbon adjustment plate
(3) Print head
(4) Readable area (for the minimum media pitch)
(5) Unreadable area
(6) Minimum media pitch
Cutter/Cut & Print mode
Barcodes printed within the following area cannot be read because it
is blocked by the cutter cover.
◦
Cutter (cutting every label): 25 mm (0.98") from the trailing end of
the label
(1) Media feed direction
(2) Cutter cover
(3) Cut position
(4) Print head
(5) Readable area (for the minimum media pitch)
(6) Unreadable area
(7) Minimum media pitch
◦
Cutter (cutting according to the specified number of labels)/ Cut &
Print: 44 mm (1.73") from the trailing end of the label
620
Item
Specification
(1) Media feed direction
(2) Cutter cover
(3) Cut position
(4) Print head
(5) Readable area (for the minimum media pitch)
(6) Unreadable area
(7) Minimum media pitch
Cut & Print mode
Do not print a 2D code or serial barcode (90° or 270° orientation in
relation to the media feed direction) within the following area as it
may cause a white void.
◦
18 to 23 mm (0.70" to 0.90") from the front end of the label (cut
position)
(1) Media feed direction
(2) Cutter cover
(3) Cut position
(4) Print head
(5) Range in which white voids occur
621
Basic Specifications of the Barcode Check Function
Item
Specification
Linerless mode
Barcodes printed within a range of 25 mm (0.98") from the trailing
end of the label cannot be read as it is blocked by the cutter cover.
(1) Media feed direction
(2) Cutter cover
(3) Cut position
(4) Print head
(5) Readable area (for the minimum media pitch)
(6) Unreadable area
(7) Minimum media pitch
Usable Media
Sizes
Media
width
Same as the product specifications.
Media
Pitch
The minimum size is different from the product specifications.
Continuous mode
◦
203 dpi: 20 to 2497 mm (0.79" to 98.30") (with liner: 23 to 2500 mm
(0.90" to 98.42"))
◦
305 dpi: 20 to 1497 mm (0.79" to 58.94") (with liner: 23 to 1500 mm
(0.90" to 59.05"))
◦
609 dpi: 20 to 397 mm (0.79" to 15.63") (with liner: 23 to 400 mm
(0.90" to 15.75"))
Cutter mode (cutting every label)
◦
203 dpi: 35 to 2497 mm (1.38" to 98.30") (with liner: 38 to 2500 mm
(1.50" to 98.42"))
◦
305 dpi: 35 to 1497 mm (1.38" to 58.94") (with liner: 38 to 1500 mm
(1.50" to 59.05"))
◦
609 dpi: 35 to 397 mm (1.38" to 15.63") (with liner: 38 to 400 mm
(1.50" to 15.75"))
Cutter (cutting according to the specified number of labels)/Cut &
Print mode
622
Item
Specification
◦
203 dpi: 54 to 2497 mm (2.13" to 98.30") (with liner: 57 to 2500 mm
(2.24" to 98.42"))
◦
305 dpi: 54 to 1497 mm (2.13" to 58.94") (with liner: 57 to 1500 mm
(2.24" to 59.05"))
◦
609 dpi: 54 to 397 mm (2.13" to 15.63") (with liner: 57 to 400 mm
(2.24" to 15.75"))
Linerless mode
◦
Usable Media Types
Readable
Barcode
Orientations
38 to 120 mm (1.50" to 4.72")
Same as the product specifications. If the label color is silver or
laminated, however, it makes it difficult for the barcode checker to read
the barcode, as the light of the barcode checker may cause a reflection
on the label surface. Be sure to do a test read carefully in advance.
1D
Barcode
Checker
(1) Media feed direction
2D
Code
Checker
(1) Media feed direction
Place the barcode within the size of the visual field. Do a test read
carefully in advance.
623
Basic Specifications of the Barcode Check Function
Item
Recommended
Barcode Sizes
Specification
1D
Narrow bar: 0.25 mm (0.01") or greater
Barcode
• 203 dpi: 2 dots or more
•
305 dpi: 3 dots or more
•
609 dpi: 6 dots or more
Refer to the specifications of each barcode checker.
2D
Code
Cell size: 0.25 mm (0.01") or greater
•
203 dpi: 2 dots or more
•
305 dpi: 3 dots or more
•
609 dpi: 6 dots or more
Refer to the specifications of each barcode checker.
The size of the visual field conforms to the specifications of the
barcode checker.
Available Code Formats
The barcode check function supports the following code formats. Check the specifications of the
barcode checker to ensure compatibility with the available code types.
Code Type
Available code formats
1D Barcodes
CODABAR(NW-7)
CODE39, CODE93, CODE128
JAN/EAN-13/8
UPC-A/UPC-E
ITF
Industrial 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5
MSI
GS1-128
POSTNET
IMB (USPS)
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Truncated
GS1 DataBar Limited
GS1 DataBar Expanded
GS1 DataBar Stacked
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
2D Codes
PDF417
624
Code Type
Available code formats
Micro PDF417
Maxi Code
QR Code
Micro QR Code
Data Matrix
Aztec Code
Combined Symbols
JAN/EAN-13/8(CC-A/CC-B)
UPC-A/UPC-E(CC-A/CC-B)
GS1-128(CC-A/CC-B/CC-C)
GS1 DataBar(CC-A/CC-B)
•
To use the comparison mode, create barcodes by using barcode commands. If a
barcode such as graphic data (BMP image, etc.) or a preprinted barcode is placed
within the barcode readable area, this mode may not function correctly.
•
In readable mode, you can include barcodes that are not created by barcode
commands (such as graphic data or preprinted barcodes) as the check target. To do
this, select [Settings] in [Set No. of Barcodes], and specify the number of barcodes
per label in [Barcodes per Label]. However, there may be a case that those barcodes
cannot be read by scanners thus this mode does not function correctly.
625
Operational Settings for the Barcode Checker and Installation
Setting Up the Barcode Checker
Operational Settings for the Barcode Checker and Installation
To use the barcode check function, perform necessary operational settings for the supported barcode
checker and then install it to the product.
Operational Settings for the Barcode Checker
Set up the barcode checker either by using the application software provided by its manufacturer or by
reading the barcodes for setting changes printed on the barcode checker's manual. For details, refer to
the manual.
•
Settings common to all supported barcode checkers
Limit the barcode types you permit the barcode checker to read as much as possible. If a lot
of barcode types are permitted, a longer decode time is required. This can cause the barcode
checker to fail to read the printed barcode.
•
GFS4170, GFS4470
◦
Select USB-COM. The product cannot detect the barcode checker when connected with other
settings.
•
GFS4470
◦
To shorten laser lighting time, it is recommended to set the reading mode to "On Line" or "Serial
On Line".
◦
If multiple barcodes are captured at once when using the default barcode checker settings, only
the first set of decoded barcode data is sent. You can change the settings to decode and send all
the captured barcodes. However, if this is done, combined symbols cannot be read.
◦
When printing barcodes in a narrow range, allow enough time for decoding (parameter: DETM),
otherwise not all of the results of the decoded captured barcodes will be sent.
◦
Because postal barcodes consist of bars and spaces with equal intervals, they may be read as a
different barcode type. When checking postal barcodes, it is recommended to set other barcode
types to be unreadable.
•
KEYENCE barcode checkers (BL-1301, SR-710)
Set the barcode checker's interface settings to either (1) or (2).
If the barcode checker set to (1) is connected, the product will change the settings to (2).
Settings
(1)
(2)
Baud rate
9600 bps
115200 bps
Data length
7 bits
8 bits
Parity
Even
Even
Stop bit length
1 bit
1 bit
Barcode Checker Installation
Mount the barcode checker to the optional barcode checker stand kit and connect it to the product.
626
For details on how to install the barcode checker, refer to the Barcode Checker Stand Kit Installation
Manual that came with the barcode checker stand kit.
•
Because the KEYENCE barcode checkers (BL-1301, SR-710) use an RS-232C
connection, an optional scanner connection cable is required.
•
When replacing media or ribbon, remove the barcode checker stand kit from the
product. When doing this, first turn the switch of the magnetic base stand to OFF and
remove the barcode checker stand. For details on how to use the barcode checker
stand, refer to the Barcode Checker Stand Kit Installation Manual.
Changing How the RS-232C Interface is Used (When Using the KEYENCE Barcode
Checkers)
When using one of the KEYENCE barcode checkers (BL-1301, SR-710), modify the barcode
checker's operational settings so that it can communicate with the product, and then connect it to
the product. After connecting the barcode checker to the product, change the [Interface] setting of
the RS-232C interface to [RS-232C Reader] on the product. With this setting, the product can detect
the barcode checker and automatically connect with it according to the barcode checker's interface
settings.
1. After connecting the barcode checker, press the
power button on the operator
panel until the LED lights up in blue to power on the product.
2. When the product is in Online mode, press the
change to Offline mode.
3. Press the
button on the operator panel to
button to show the [Settings] menu.
627
Changing How the RS-232C Interface is Used (When Using the KEYENCE Barcode Checkers)
4. Press the
/
buttons to select [Tools], and then press the
5. Press the
/
buttons to select [Barcode Checker] > [Test] > [Interface], and
then press the
6. Press the
7. Press the
/
button.
buttons to select [RS-232C Reader].
button to save the setting value.
628
button.
8. Press the
button to change to Offline mode.
9. Power the product off, and then on again.
When the product is powered on, the barcode checker is also powered on automatically.
•
When the barcode checker is powered on, it emits a laser light. Be sure to keep the
laser away from your eyes.
•
When using GFS4170, it keeps emitting a laser light while the product is powered on.
To turn off the laser light, power off the product.
Once the connection between the product and the barcode checker is complete, the barcode
checker icon appears on the status bar of the display.
Do a test read with the barcode checker to confirm that it functions correctly.
•
If the product cannot detect the barcode checker, check if the operational settings of
the barcode check are appropriate.
Doing a Test Read with the Barcode Checker
Prepare a label on which the barcode data you use is printed by this product.
After performing operational settings of the barcode checker and then connecting it to the product,
perform a test read from the product's [Settings] menu to confirm that the barcode checker functions
correctly.
1. After connecting the barcode checker, press the
power button on the operator
panel until the LED lights up in blue to power on the product.
When the product is powered on, the barcode checker is also powered on automatically.
629
Doing a Test Read with the Barcode Checker
•
When the barcode checker is powered on, it emits a laser light. Be sure to keep the
laser away from your eyes.
•
When using GFS4170, it keeps emitting a laser light while the product is powered on.
To turn off the laser light, power off the product.
Once the connection between the product and the barcode checker is complete, the barcode
checker icon appears on the status bar of the display.
2. When the product is in Online mode, press the
change to Offline mode.
3. Press the
button on the operator panel to
button to show the [Settings] menu.
630
4. Press the
/
buttons to select [Tools], and then press the
5. Press the
/
buttons to select [Barcode Checker] > [Test], and then press the
button.
button.
6. Confirm that the type of connected barcode checker is displayed on the right side
of [Reader Name].
631
Doing a Test Read with the Barcode Checker
7. Press the
button.
/
buttons to select [Reading Test], and then press the
8. Set a label with barcodes within the scanning range of the barcode checker.
9. Press the
button to start reading the barcodes.
If reading is successful, the barcode type and data read are displayed on the screen. Only the first
23 bytes of data are displayed.
If reading is unsuccessful, or the displayed results of the read are not correct, adjust the position
of the barcode checker by using the barcode checker stand. For details on how to use the barcode
checker stand, refer to the Barcode Checker Stand Kit Installation Manual that came with the
barcode checker stand kit.
•
If the product cannot detect the barcode checker, check if the operational settings for
the barcode checker are appropriate.
632
Enabling the Barcode Check
Selecting the Barcode Check Mode
The barcode check function has a readable mode and a comparison mode. You can switch the mode
or disable the function from the product's [Settings] menu.
1. When the product is in Online mode, press the
change to Offline mode.
2. Press the
3. Press the
button on the operator panel to
button to show the [Settings] menu.
/
buttons to select [Tools], and then press the
633
button.
Selecting the Barcode Check Mode
4. Press the
/
buttons to select [Barcode Checker] > [Settings] > [Mode], and
then press the
5. Press the
/
button.
buttons to select the mode for the barcode check function.
[Disabled]
Disable the barcode check function.
[Readable]
Enable readable mode.
[Comparison]
Enable comparison mode. This mode is for barcodes created by barcode commands.
6. Press the
button to save the setting value.
634
•
When the readable mode or comparison mode is set, a barcode reader connection
error occurs if the barcode checker is not connected at product startup or at the start of
printing.
•
Even if the readable mode or comparison mode is set, the barcode check is not done
for print data that does not include any barcode data. Normal printing is done for that
data.
•
In the readable mode, to include barcodes that are not created by barcode commands
(such as graphic data or preprinted barcodes) as the check target, select [Settings] in
[Set No. of Barcodes], and specify the number of barcodes per label in [Barcodes per
Label].
•
When [VOID Print] is enabled, you can identify a defective label by printing error marks
on it.
•
The log data of barcode check results is saved on the product and can be copied to
the USB memory from the [Logs] menu. By enabling [Host Notification], you can also
return check results to the host from which the print data is sent.
Contents of the Check for Readable Mode and Comparison Mode
The barcode check function has readable mode and comparison mode. The contents of the check for
each mode are as follows.
•
You can check multiple barcodes on one label. Though the number of barcodes on
one label is not limited, a reading error occurs when the total size of the barcode data
exceeds 200 Kb.
•
In the readable mode, you can include barcodes that are not created by barcode
commands (such as graphic data or preprinted barcodes) as the check target, but
you need to specify the number of barcodes per label in advance. Select [Settings] in
[Set No. of Barcodes], and specify the number of barcodes per label in [Barcodes per
Label].
•
Reading of barcodes starts after the label length specified in [Start Position] passes. In
modes where the product backfeeds before printing, the product backfeeds first, and
then feeds the length of the start position.
Readable mode
This mode checks if the printed barcodes are readable. The readability is determined by whether the
number of barcodes the barcode checker reads matches the number of barcodes in the print data.
635
Contents of the Check for Readable Mode and Comparison Mode
•
The reading is considered to be successful if the number of barcodes the barcode checker reads
reaches the number of barcodes in the print data. The product prints the next label.
*1 Even if the number of barcodes the barcode checker reads exceeds the number of barcodes
in the print data, it is considered to be successful.
•
A reading error occurs if the number of barcodes in the print data is not read within the printing
period from start to finish and the timeout period (up to 2 seconds).
Comparison mode
This mode checks if the read results of the printed barcodes match the barcode data in the print data.
•
The reading is considered to be successful if the read results of the printed barcodes match the
barcode data in the print data. The product prints the next label.
636
•
A comparison error occurs if the read results of the printed barcodes do not match the barcode
data in the print data.
•
A reading error occurs if the number of barcodes in the print data is not read within the printing
period from start to finish and the timeout period (up to 2 seconds), even if the read results of the
printed barcodes do not match the barcode data in the print data.
637
Restrictions for the Barcode Check Function
Restrictions for the Barcode Check Function
Common Restrictions for the Barcode Check Function
•
When the product is powered on while the barcode checker is connected, the barcode
checker is also powered on and emits a laser light. Be sure to keep the laser away
from your eyes.
•
The reading accuracy of barcodes or 2D codes is affected by label conditions (label curl,
print quality, etc.) and the usage environment (ambient light, temperature, humidity, etc.), and
readability is not guaranteed. Be sure to do a test read with the barcode checker you will use in
advance.
•
The types of paper that can be used are the same as the product specifications. If the label color
is silver or laminated, however, it makes it difficult for the barcode checker to read the barcode,
as the light of the barcode checker may cause a reflection on the label surface. Be sure to do a
test read carefully in advance.
•
Design the label layout so that barcodes or 2D codes do not remain within the scanning range
of the barcode checker at the completion of printing. If the barcode of the previous label remains
in the scanning range at the start of the next printing, the barcode checker may read the same
barcode twice. The image below is when in continuous mode. As the stop position differs
depending on the product’s print mode and commands, be sure to check your label layout
carefully in advance.
(1) Media feed direction
(2) Print head position
•
Barcodes printed within the following range from the print end position cannot be read and a
reading error inevitably occurs. As the following table is only for a reference, be sure to do a test
read carefully in advance.
Print modes
Ranges to be avoided
Continuous
Approximately 11 mm (0.43") from the print end position
Cutter
Cutting every label
Approximately 25 mm (0.98") from the print end position
638
Print modes
Ranges to be avoided
Cutting according to the specified number of labels
Approximately 44 mm (1.73") from the print end position
Cut & Print
Approximately 44 mm (1.73") from the print end position
Dispenser
No restriction
Linerless
Approximately 25 mm (0.98") from the print end position
•
The barcode check is not performed if the position at which the check starts is detected after the
label feeding begins to stop. Define the label layout and position at which the check starts by
keeping in mind that the distance required for stopping is proportional to the print speed.
•
Printed barcodes or 2D codes can be read only with a size at which their entire pattern is within
the scanning range of the barcode checker. A reading error may occur depending on the print
position.
•
This function cannot be controlled through the use of external signals (EXT).
•
The barcode check function for GS1-128 barcodes is supported by the 1.10.0 version firmware
build or later. When using GS1-128, configure the barcode checker to enable the data output
format for GS1-128. When CODE128 and GS1-128 are used together with a BL-1301 barcode
checker, do the settings in each setting bank. At that time, assign to GS1-128 a number that is
smaller than the setting bank of CODE128.
•
When powering on the product, do not connect or disconnect the barcode checker. The product
may not operate properly.
•
Setting the decoding number for BL-1301 and WB1F-100S1S barcode checkers cannot be done
from the product by the 1.10.0 version firmware build or later. If a barcode reading error occurs,
change the count settings for reading (BL-1301: Decode match count / WB1F-100S1S: Verify
count). Also, when using the optional barcode checker stand kit, exclude barcode types other
than those to be checked. If any barcode type other than those to be checked is set, a decreased
reading speed or misreading other barcode types may occur.
•
The barcode data that can be read for 1 item is up to 200 bytes per barcode and up to 200 Kb in
total.
Restrictions When Using GF4170
•
It keeps emitting a laser light while the product is powered on. To turn off the laser light, power off
the product.
Restrictions When Using GFS4470
•
By the double-reading prevention function, the barcode checker may not read barcodes that are
printed successively if they are within the readable area. Adjust the print position so that same
barcodes are not within the readable area.
•
When printing composite symbols that use GS1 DataBar, the read data and print data never
match if the barcode data is 16 digits or less. A comparison error occurs in comparison mode.
•
Though "\" (0x5C) specified in MAXI code, print data should be read as "\\" in the specifications.
However, it may not be read as such, depending on the following data. For example, "\A"
specified in print data should be read as "\\A" in the specifications, but it is actually read as only
"A".
Restrictions When Using WB1F-100S1S
•
Multiple barcodes cannot be read at the same time.
639
Restrictions for the Barcode Check Function
•
When NUL (0x00) is included in CODE128 print data, only the data before NUL is recognized
as reading data, and NUL and the data after NUL are ignored. A comparison error occurs in
comparison mode. In readable mode, a reading error occurs only if NUL is specified at the
beginning of the print data.
640
Initializing the Product
Procedures for Initializing
Initializing the Data Saved on the Product
Initialize the data saved on the product.
The data to be initialized are the fonts and graphics registered in the product.
•
It is generally not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing so could change the
print conditions.
1. Press the
button in Online mode.
The product changes to Offline mode.
641
Initializing the Data Saved on the Product
2. Press the
button.
The product changes to Settings mode.
3. Select [Tools] using the
4. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The item list appears.
642
5. Select [Reset] using the
6. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The [Select] screen appears.
7. Select [Data] using the
8. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The confirmation screen appears.
643
Initializing the Setting Values and Data on the Product
9. Press the
Press the
button to perform the initialization.
button to cancel the initialization.
The initialization is performed.
When the initialization is complete, the product reboots.
Initializing the Setting Values and Data on the Product
Initialize the data and setting values on the product.
•
It is generally not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing so could change the
print conditions.
•
The data to be initialized are the fonts and graphics registered in the product.
1. Press the
button in Online mode.
The product changes to Offline mode.
644
2. Press the
button.
The product changes to Settings mode.
3. Select [Tools] using the
4. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The item list appears.
645
Initializing the Setting Values and Data on the Product
5. Select [Reset] using the
6. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The [Select] screen appears.
7. Select [Data & Settings] using the
8. Press the
/
button.
The item list appears.
646
buttons.
9. Select the setting items to be initialized using the
/
buttons.
[User Reset]
Initialize the data and setting values.
[User Reset (-Interface)]
Initialize the data and setting values that are not included in the [Interface] menu.
[Factory Reset]
Initialize to the status after factory shipment.
[Factory Reset (-Interface)]
Initialize the items that are not included in the [Interface] menu to the status after factory
shipment.
[Interface]
Initialize the data and setting values in the [Interface] menu.
[Printing]
Initialize the data and setting values in the [Printing] menu.
10. Press the
button.
The confirmation screen appears.
647
Initializing the Setting Values on the Product
11. Press the
Press the
button to perform the initialization.
button to cancel the initialization.
The initialization is performed.
When the initialization is complete, the product reboots.
Initializing the Setting Values on the Product
Initialize the setting values on the product.
•
It is generally not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing so could change the
print conditions.
1. Press the
button in Online mode.
The product changes to Offline mode.
648
2. Press the
button.
The product changes to Settings mode.
3. Select [Tools] using the
4. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The item list appears.
649
Initializing the Setting Values on the Product
5. Select [Reset] using the
6. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The [Select] screen appears.
7. Select [Settings] using the
8. Press the
/
buttons.
button.
The item list appears.
650
9. Select the setting items to be initialized using the
/
buttons.
[User Reset]
Initialize the setting values.
[User Reset (-Interface)]
Initialize the setting values that are not included in the [Interface] menu.
[Factory Reset]
Initialize to the status after factory shipment.
[Factory Reset (-Interface)]
Initialize the items that are not included in the [Interface] menu to the status after factory
shipment.
[Interface]
Initialize the setting values in the [Interface] menu.
[Printing]
Initialize the setting values in the [Printing] menu.
10. Press the
button.
The confirmation screen appears.
651
Initializing the Setting Values on the Product
11. Press the
Press the
button to perform the initialization.
button to cancel the initialization.
The initialization is performed.
If a message prompting you to restart the product appears on the Online/Offline screen, reboot the
product to apply the settings.
652
List of Initial Values
[Printing] Menu
The initial value refers to the setting value of the product when it was shipped from the factory. If you
reset the product, the setting values of the product will change back to the factory default values. The
table below shows the initial value of each setting item and type of reset that changes the value back
to the initial value.
•
Normally, it is not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing an initialization removes
all the product's settings that the customer changed.
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Label Length]
203 dpi
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
20000 dots
305 dpi
18000 dots
609 dpi
9600 dots
[Label Width]
203 dpi
832 dots
305 dpi
1248 dots
609 dpi
2496 dots
[Auto Measure]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Printing Mode]
Use Ribbon
Yes
Yes
[Ribbon Near End]
Enabled
Yes
Yes
[Speed]
203 dpi
Yes
Yes
6 ips
305 dpi
6 ips
609 dpi
4 ips
653
[Printing] Menu
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
Yes
Yes
Linerless mode
4 ips
[Sensor Type]
Gap
None (When [Print Mode] is
[Linerless])
[Micro Label Print Mode]
[Micro Label Print Mode]
Disable
Yes
Yes
[Auto Label Length Detection]
Enable
Yes
Yes
[Label Length Averaging Count]
3
Yes
Yes
[Label Length]
203 dpi
Yes
Yes
320 dots
305 dpi
480 dots
609 dpi
960 dots
[Auto-mode]
Enabled
Yes
Yes
[Print Mode]
Tear-Off (If no option is installed)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Cutter (If cutter unit is installed)
Dispenser (If dispenser unit is
installed)
Linerless (If linerless cutter kit is
installed)
[Backfeed]
Before (If [Print Mode] is set to
[Tear-Off] or [Linerless])
After (If [Print Mode] is set to
[Dispenser], [Cutter] or [Cut &
Print])
None (If [Print Mode] is set to
[Continuous])
[Eject Cut]
Off
Yes
Yes
[Darkness Range]
A
Yes
Yes
[Darkness]
5
Yes
Yes
[Imaging]
654
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Vertical]
0 dot
Yes
Yes
[Horizontal]
0 dot
Yes
Yes
Gap + I-Mark
-
-
[GAP Levels]
Value adjusted by the factory.
No
No
[GAP Slice Level]
Auto
No
No
[I-Mark Levels]
Value adjusted by the factory.
No
No
[I-Mark Slice Level]
Auto
No
No
[Head Check]
Off
Yes
Yes
[Head Check Mode]
Always
Yes
Yes
[Every Page]
1
Yes
Yes
[Check Media Size]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Offset]
0 dot
No
No
[Pitch]
0 dot
No
No
[Pitch Offset]
0 dot
No
No
[Darkness Adjust]
50
No
No
[Start Online]
Enabled
Yes
Yes
[Feed After Error]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Feed At Power On]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Finisher Feed]
0 dot (Standard)
Yes
Yes
[Paper End]
Using I-mark
Yes
Yes
[Head Base Position]
Standard
Yes
Yes
[Prioritize]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[Reprint]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Print End Position]
0 dot
Yes
Yes
[Advanced]
[Calibrate]
[Auto-calibration]
1
[Adjustments]
655
[Interface] Menu
Setting Item
[Label Near End]
1
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
Disabled
Yes
Yes
Auto-calibration is not available for linerless models.
[Interface] Menu
The initial value refers to the setting value of the product when it was shipped from the factory. If you
reset the product, the setting values of the product will change back to the factory default values. The
table below shows the initial value of each setting item and type of reset that changes the value back
to the initial value.
•
Normally, it is not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing an initialization removes
all the product's settings that the customer changed.
Setting Item
Initial
Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Mode]
DHCP
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[DHCP]
-
-
-
[IP Address]
0.0.0.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Netmask]
255.255.255.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Gateway]
0.0.0.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[DNS]
0.0.0.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Mode]
Disable
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[DHCP]
-
-
-
[IP Address]
::
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Network]
[Settings]
[LAN]
[IPv4]
[IPv6]
656
Setting Item
Initial
Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Prefix Length]
64
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Gateway]
::
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[DNS]
::
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Enabled]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Server]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Exclude]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Mode]
DHCP
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[DHCP]
-
-
-
[IP Address]
0.0.0.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Netmask]
255.255.255.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Gateway]
0.0.0.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[DNS]
0.0.0.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Mode]
Disable
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[DHCP]
-
-
-
[IP Address]
::
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Prefix Length]
64
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Proxy]
[Wi-Fi]
[IPv4]
[IPv6]
657
[Interface] Menu
Setting Item
Initial
Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Gateway]
::
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[DNS]
::
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Enabled]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Server]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Exclude]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Button (PBC)]
-
-
-
[PIN]
-
-
-
[Proxy]
[Wi-Fi Protected Setup]
[Wi-Fi Direct]
[Device Name]
SATO_PRINTER
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Connect]
-
-
-
[Start Group]
-
-
-
[Remove Group]
-
-
-
[Disconnect]
-
-
-
[SSID]
DIRECT- xxSATO_PRINTER
-
[IP Address]
x.x.x.x
-
-
[Passphrase]
xxxxxxx
-
-
[SSID]
SATO_PRINTER
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Hidden SSID]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Mode]
Ad-hoc
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
658
Setting Item
Initial
Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Channel]
6
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Security]
None
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Authentication]
Open
System
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Key Index]
1
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Key #1]-[Key #4]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[WPA Authentication]
Personal
(PSK)
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[PSK]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[EAP Conf.]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[EAP Mode]
FAST
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Inner Method]
MSCHAPv2 Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Username]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Password]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Anon. Outer ID]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Verify Server Cert.]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Private Key P/W]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[PAC Auto Provisioning]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[WEP Conf.]
[WPA Conf.]
[EAP Conf.]
659
[Interface] Menu
Setting Item
Initial
Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
Auto
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Port1]
1024
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Port2]
1025
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Port3]
9100
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Flow Control]
Status4
ENQ
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[TCP Connection Queue]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Legacy Status for Port 9100]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[ENQ Reply Delay]
0 ms
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Status4 Cyclic Response]
500 ms
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[BCC]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Enable]
Disabled
No
Yes
[Error]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Time Server IP]
0.0.0.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Enable]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[DNS Lookup]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[PAC P/W]
[Interface]
[Services]
[Ports]
[NTP]
[LPD]
660
Setting Item
Initial
Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Enable]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[FTP Timeout]
300 sec
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[sysContact]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[sysName]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[sysLocation]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
meters
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[SNMP Version]
1|2c|3
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Community]
public
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[User]
rouser
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[User Security]
None
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Authentication Protocol]
MD5
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Authentication Passphrase]
mypasswordYes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Privacy Protocol]
DES
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Privacy Passphrase]
mypasswordYes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[FTP]
[SNMP]
[prtMarkerCounterUnit]
[Agent]
[Enable]
[Read-Only]
[Read-Write]
661
[Interface] Menu
Setting Item
Initial
Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[SNMP Version]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Community]
private
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[User]
rwuser
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[User Security]
None
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Authentication Protocol]
MD5
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Authentication Passphrase]
mypasswordYes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Privacy Protocol]
DES
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Privacy Passphrase]
mypasswordYes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Enable]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[SNMP Version]
1
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[IP Version]
4
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Destinations]
1
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Destination 1]
0.0.0.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Destination 2]
0.0.0.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Destination 3]
0.0.0.0
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Community]
trapcom
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[User]
trapuser
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Traps]
662
Setting Item
Initial
Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Engine ID]
Hex
Yes/
string
Interface
generated
from
MAC
address
Yes/
Interface
[Security]
None
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Authentication Protocol]
MD5
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Authentication Passphrase]
mypasswordYes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Privacy Protocol]
DES
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Privacy Passphrase]
mypasswordYes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[SOS Mode]
Disabled
No
No
[Allow Remote Control]
Always
No
No
[MQTT Protocol]
MQTT
No
No
[Add Device]
-
-
-
[Copy Log Files]
-
-
-
-
No
No
[Type]
Disabled
No
No
[Counter]
Head
No
No
[Meters]
10,000
No
No
[Last Update]
0.0 km
No
No
[Next Update]
10.0 km
No
No
[Current Value]
0.0 km
No
No
[Online Services]
[Contact Information]
[Phone Number]
[Periodic Notification]
[Head]
663
[Interface] Menu
Setting Item
Initial
Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Cuts]
100,000
No
No
[Last Update]
0
No
No
[Next Update]
100,000
No
No
[Current Value]
0
No
No
[Notifications]
1
No
No
[Weekday]
Monday
No
No
[Day]
1
No
No
[Time 1]
00:00
No
No
[Time 2]
00:00
No
No
[Time 3]
00:00
No
No
[Time]
00:00
No
No
Normal
No
No
[Vertical]
0
No
No
[Horizontal]
0
No
No
-
-
-
[Additional]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Periodic]
Off
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Cutter]
[Update Screen]
[QR code offset]
[Daily Checkup]
[Advanced]
[ARP Announcement]
[Firewall]
[Enable]
[Allow Services And Ports]
[Data Ports]
664
Setting Item
Initial
Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[FTP]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[LPD]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[MAILC]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[NTP]
Disabled
No
Yes
[Online Services]
Disabled
No
No
[PING]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[SATO All-In-One Tool]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[SCP]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[SNMP Agent]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[WEBC]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[WebConfig]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Existing Port No.]
-
-
-
[Additional Port No.]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Existing Port No.]
-
-
-
[Additional Port No.]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Existing Port No.]
-
-
-
[Additional Port No.]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Custom Settings]
[TCP Source Port]
[TCP Destination Port]
[UDP Source Port]
665
[Interface] Menu
Setting Item
Initial
Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Existing Port No.]
-
-
-
[Additional Port No.]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Existing ICMP Type]
-
-
-
[Additional ICMP Type]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Flow Control]
Status4
Multi
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[BCC]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Baudrate]
115200
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Parameters]
8-N-1
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Flow Control]
STATUS4
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[BCC]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Flow Control]
Status4
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[BCC]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Change USB Serial]
Disabled
No
Yes/
Interface
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[UDP Destination Port]
[ICMP Type]
[IEEE1284]
[RS-232C]
[USB]
[Bluetooth]
[Enable]
SATO
Yes/
Yes/
PRINTER_xxxxxxxxxxxx
Interface
Interface
[Name]
666
Setting Item
Initial
Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
(BD
address)
[PIN Code]
0000
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[BD Address]
xxxxxxxxxxxx
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Firm Version]
spp3_vX.YYYes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Host BD Addr]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Authentication]
None
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[ISI]
2048
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[ISW]
18
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[PSI]
2048
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[PSW]
18
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[CRC Mode]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Flow Control]
Status4
Multi
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[I/F Enable]
Enabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Ignore CR/LF]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Ignore CAN/DLE]
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[NFC]
[External I/O]
[Print Start Signal]
[Signals]
667
[Applications] Menu
Setting Item
Initial
Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[EXT 9PIN]
MODE1
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[EXT Mode]
TYPE4
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Start Print]
PIN 5
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Reprint]
PIN 7
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Paper End]
PIN 1
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Ribbon End]
PIN 3
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Machine Error]
PIN 4
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Print Done]
PIN 6
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Offline]/[Qty]
PIN 9
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Ribbon Near End]
PIN 10
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Dispenser]
OFF
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Label Near End]
OFF
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
Disabled
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Inputs]
[Outputs]
[EXT I/O Re-print]
[Applications] Menu
The initial value refers to the setting value of the product when it was shipped from the factory. If you
reset the product, the setting values of the product will change back to the factory default values. The
table below shows the initial value of each setting item and type of reset that changes the value back
to the initial value.
•
Normally, it is not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing an initialization removes
all the product's settings that the customer changed.
668
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Protocol]
AUTO
Yes
Yes
[Show Error]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Standard Code]
Enabled
Yes
Yes
[Orientation]
Portrait
Yes
Yes
Enabled
Yes
Yes
GB18030
Yes
Yes
GB18030
Yes
Yes
Gothic
Yes
Yes
[Proportional]
Enabled
Yes
Yes
[Code Page]
858
Yes
Yes
[€]
d5
Yes
Yes
[M-8400 Compatibility]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[CODE128(C) Zero Fill]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Kanji Command]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Call Font/Logo]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[A3 Command Save(S-type)]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[PDF417 ECC Level fixed]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Shift]
0 dot
Yes
Yes
[Top]
0 dot
Yes
Yes
[Label Rotation]
0 degree
Yes
Yes
[Caret]
94 (^)
Yes
Yes
[SBPL]
[Font Settings]
[Zero Slash]
[Kanji]
[Kanji Set]
[Character Code]
[Kanji Style]
[Compatible]
[SZPL]
[Label]
669
[Applications] Menu
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Delimiter]
44 (,)
Yes
Yes
[Tilde]
126 (~)
Yes
Yes
[Clock Format]
(none)
Yes
Yes
[Default Font]
(none)
Yes
Yes
[Code Page]
1252
Yes
Yes
[New Font Encoding]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[c20 Proportional Pitch]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Zero Slash]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Format Save]
Enabled
Yes
Yes
[Control Code]
Auto
Yes
Yes
[1st Byte Code]
27
Yes
Yes
[2nd Byte Code]
10
Yes
Yes
[3rd Byte Code]
0
Yes
Yes
[Zero Slash]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[€]
d5
Yes
Yes
[Code Page]
850
Yes
Yes
[Half-width Symbol]
Enabled
Yes
Yes
[Rotation]
0 degree
Yes
Yes
[Ignore Paper Size Command]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[300DPI Head Compatibility]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[SIPL]
[Font Settings]
[STCL]
[Command Head]
[Font Settings]
[SDPL]
[Control Code]
670
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Code Type]
Standard
Yes
Yes
[SOH]
01
Yes
Yes
[STX]
02
Yes
Yes
[CR]
0D
Yes
Yes
[CNTBY]
5E
Yes
Yes
[Label Rotation]
0 degree
Yes
Yes
[SOP Emulation]
Auto
Yes
Yes
[TTF]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Graphics]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Compression]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Right-to-Left print]
Auto
Yes
Yes
[Receive TimeOut]
0 (Off)
Yes
Yes
[Blank Item Feed]
Enabled
Yes
Yes
[Format Attribute]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[Pause Mode]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[1 Byte Codepage]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[SDPL Measure Unit]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[Scalable Font Style]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[Sensor Type]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[Feedback Character]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[SOH Commands]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[Module Selection]
Commands
Yes
Yes
[Darkness]
-
Yes
Yes
[Factory Offset]
-
Yes
Yes
[Speed]
-
Yes
Yes
[Compatible Mode]
[Prioritize]
671
[Applications] Menu
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Format Attribute]
XOR
Yes
Yes
[Pause Mode]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[1 Byte Codepage]
CP 850
Yes
Yes
[SDPL Measure Unit]
Inch
Yes
Yes
[Bold]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Italic]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
Enabled
Yes
Yes
[All Commands]
Enabled
Yes
Yes
[SOH-B Command]
Enabled
Yes
Yes
[SOH-C Command]
Enabled
Yes
Yes
[Others]
Enabled
Yes
Yes
A
Yes
Yes
[Horz. Offset]
0 dot
Yes
Yes
[Vert. Offset]
0 dot
Yes
Yes
[Label Rotation]
0 degree
Yes
Yes
[Memory Device]
Internal FLASH
Yes
Yes
[Sim. 300 DPI Head]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Enable]
Disabled
No
Yes
[Starting Application]
Standard
No
Yes
[Scalable Font Style]
[Feedback Character]
[SOH Commands]
[Module Selection]
[SEPL]
[Home Reference]
[AEP]
(/rom/standalone/
sa.lua)
[Delete Application]
-
-
-
[Label Rotation]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
672
[System] Menu
The initial value refers to the setting value of the product when it was shipped from the factory. If you
reset the product, the setting values of the product will change back to the factory default values. The
table below shows the initial value of each setting item and type of reset that changes the value back
to the initial value.
•
Normally, it is not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing an initialization removes
all the product's settings that the customer changed.
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Messages]
English, US
Yes
Yes
[USB Keyboard]
English, US
Yes
Yes
[Locale]
English, US
Yes
Yes
[Unit]
dot
Yes
Yes
[Time]
00:00
No
No
[Date]
(2000-01-01)
No
No
[Time Zone]
-
Yes
Yes
Europe
Yes
Yes
London
Yes
Yes
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Clean Printhead]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Cleaning Interval]
400 m
Yes
Yes
[Change Printhead]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Printhead Interval]
100 km
Yes
Yes
[Change Cutter]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Cutter Life]
1000 K cuts
Yes
Yes
[Regional]
[Region]
[City]
[Display Language Icon]
[Notifications]
[Clean Printhead]
[Change Printhead]
[Change Cutter]
673
[Tools] Menu
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Change Platen]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Platen Interval]
100 km
Yes
Yes
[Error Sound]
Medium
Yes
Yes
[Power Off Sound]
Medium
Yes
Yes
60 min
Yes
Yes
[LCD Brightness]
7
No
Yes
[Show Total Count]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Password Enable]
Disabled
No
Yes
[Install Security]
Disabled
No
Yes
[NFC Security]
None
Yes
Yes
No
No
[Change Platen]
[Sound]
[Energy Saving]
[Sleep Timeout]
[Password]
[Change Password]
[admin]
-
No
No
[manager]
6677
No
No
[level1]
0310
No
No
[rfid]
-
No
No
Disabled
No
Yes
[Start on AC]
[Tools] Menu
The initial value refers to the setting value of the product when it was shipped from the factory. If you
reset the product, the setting values of the product will change back to the factory default values. The
table below shows the initial value of each setting item and type of reset that changes the value back
to the initial value.
•
Normally, it is not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing an initialization removes
all the product's settings that the customer changed.
674
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Label Width]
Large
Yes
Yes
[Pitch]
0 dot
No
No
[Offset]
0 dot
No
No
[Darkness Adjust]
50
No
No
[Label Width]
Small
-
-
[Label Length]
203 dpi
Yes
Yes
[Test Print]
[Factory]
[Configure List]
800 dots
305 dpi
1200 dots
609 dpi
2400 dots
[Pitch]
0 dot
No
No
[Offset]
0 dot
No
No
[Darkness Adjust]
50
No
No
[Label Width]
Small
-
-
[Label Length]
203 dpi
Yes
Yes
[Configure QR]
800 dots
305 dpi
1200 dots
609 dpi
2400 dots
[Pitch]
0 dot
No
No
[Offset]
0 dot
No
No
[Darkness Adjust]
50
No
No
[Paper Sensor]
675
[Tools] Menu
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Label Width]
Small
-
-
[Label Length]
203 dpi
Yes
Yes
800 dots
305 dpi
1200 dots
609 dpi
2400 dots
[Pitch]
0 dot
No
No
[Offset]
0 dot
No
No
[Darkness Adjust]
50
No
No
203 dpi
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
[Head Check]
[Label Width]
832 dots
305 dpi
1248 dots
609 dpi
2496 dots
[Label Length]
203 dpi
120 dots
305 dpi
180 dots
609 dpi
360 dots
[Pitch]
0 dot
No
No
[Offset]
0 dot
No
No
[Darkness Adjust]
50
No
No
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[HEX-Dump]
[Hex Dump Mode]
[Reset]
[Profiles]
676
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Delete]
-
-
-
[Load]
-
-
-
[Save]
-
-
-
[Start with]
-
Yes
Yes
[Certificates]
-
Yes/
Interface
Yes
[Reader Name]
-
-
-
[Reading Test]
-
-
-
[Interface]
RS-232C
Yes/
Interface
Yes/
Interface
[Mode]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Set No. of Barcodes]
Command
Yes
Yes
[Barcodes per Label]
1
Yes
Yes
[Start Position]
203 dpi
Yes
Yes
[Barcode Checker]
[Test]
[Settings]
72 dots
305 dpi
108 dots
609 dpi
216 dots
[VOID Print]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Retry Count]
0
Yes
Yes
[Host Notification]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Copy]
-
-
-
[Remove]
-
-
-
Excl. LAN/Wi-Fi/IP
-
-
[Logs]
[Clone]
677
[Information] Menu
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Support Info]
-
-
-
[Enabled]
Disabled
Yes
Yes
[Save]
-
-
-
[Remove]
-
-
-
Enabled
No
Yes
[Logging Function]
[Startup Guide]
[Information] Menu
The initial value refers to the setting value of the product when it was shipped from the factory. If you
reset the product, the setting values of the product will change back to the factory default values. The
table below shows the initial value of each setting item and type of reset that changes the value back
to the initial value.
•
Normally, it is not necessary to perform the initialization. Doing an initialization removes
all the product's settings that the customer changed.
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[Help]
-
-
-
[Build Version]
-
-
-
[Applications]
-
-
-
[Installation Log]
-
-
-
[Print Module]
-
-
-
[Counters]
-
-
-
[Head]
-
-
-
[Life]
Measured value
No
No
[Head 1]
Measured value
No
Yes
[Head 2]
Measured value
No
Yes
[Head 3]
Measured value
No
Yes
0
No
Yes
0.0.0.0
-
-
[Cutter]
[IPv4 Address]
678
Setting Item
Initial Value
User
Reset
Factory
Reset
[IPv6 Address]
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
-
-
679
Cleaning
Maintenance
Cleaning the Product
Cleaning
A dirty print head or platen roller not only affects the print quality but also causes errors. Use a
cleaning kit or cleaning sheet to clean the product regularly.
•
Do not power on or off the product, connect or disconnect the power cord while your
hands are wet. Doing so could cause an electric shock.
•
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet before you begin cleaning.
The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing. Wait until the product cools
down.
•
Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury.
•
Be careful not to touch the cutter blade when cleaning the product.
•
Use a cotton swab or cotton cloth from a cleaning kit for cleaning. Do not clean with a
hard object. Doing so could cause damage.
•
Before cleaning, remove the media and ribbon.
CAUTION (if installed with linerless cutter kit)
•
Open the print head if the product is not used for printing for more than one day. Paper
jam might occur in the next printing if the print head is closed for a long period with
linerless label loaded.
•
When loading linerless label, make sure that the front end of the media extends about
3 cm (1.18") out the media discharge outlet.
•
The cleaning kit and cleaning sheet are optional. Contact your SATO reseller or
technical support center to purchase the options.
680
Cleaning the Print Head and Platen Roller
Cleaning Intervals
Clean the product at the following regular intervals.
•
•
The below cleaning intervals are only for reference. Clean the product when necessary
even if you are not at a regular interval.
After you print one media roll or print media for 150 meters (492.1 feet).
Use the cleaning kit to clean following parts:
◦
Print head
◦
Platen roller
◦
Media sensors
◦
Media guide
•
After you print six media rolls or print media for 900 meters (2952.8 feet).
Use the cleaning sheet to clean the following parts:
◦
Print head
Use the cleaning kit to clean following parts:
◦
Media route
◦
Ribbon route
Cleaning interval for the optional linerless cutter kit is as follows:
•
After you print one media roll or whenever there is any glue residue or paper dust on the media
route.
Use the cleaning kit to clean following parts:
◦
Print head
◦
Media guide
◦
Media sensors
◦
Guide rollers
•
There is no need of cleaning the linerless platen roller unless it is significantly soiled.
Cleaning Using the Cleaning Kit
The cleaning procedure using the cleaning kit is as follows:
681
Cleaning Using the Cleaning Kit
•
Never use organic solvents, such as thinner and benzine to clean the product.
•
For details on the cleaning kit, refer to the manual attached to the cleaning kit.
1. Make sure that the product is powered off, and disconnect the power cord from the
AC outlet.
2. Open the top cover.
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
3. Push the head lock lever (1) towards the rear to unlock the print head.
•
The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing. Be careful not to touch it, to
avoid being burned.
•
Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury.
4. Remove the media and ribbon if they are already loaded.
682
5. Clean the dirt on the print head (2), platen roller (3) and ribbon roller (4) using a
cotton swab dabbed with cleaning liquid.
6. Tilt the sensor guide lock (5) down and pull out the media sensor guide (6).
7. Clean the bottom of the media sensor guide using the cotton cloth dabbed with
cleaning liquid.
683
Cleaning the Optional Linerless Cutter Kit
8. Clean the media sensor (7) using the cotton cloth dabbed with cleaning liquid.
9. Return the media sensor guide to its original position and tilt the sensor guide lock
up to the locked position.
Cleaning the Optional Linerless Cutter Kit
If the optional linerless cutter kit is installed, follow the procedure below to clean the product:
1. Clean the media guide (1) and inner surface (2) that is in contact to the label edge
using the cotton cloth dabbed with cleaning liquid.
684
2. Clean the guide rollers (3) using the cotton cloth dabbed with cleaning liquid.
Rotate the guide rollers to clean the whole areas of them.
Cleaning Using the Cleaning Sheet
The cleaning procedure using the cleaning sheet is as follows:
1. Make sure that the product is powered off, and disconnect the power cord from the
AC outlet.
2. Open the top cover.
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
3. Push the head lock lever (1) towards the rear to unlock the print head.
•
The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing. Be careful not to touch it, to
avoid being burned.
•
Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury.
685
Cleaning Using the Cleaning Sheet
4. Remove the media and ribbon if they are already loaded.
5. Place the cleaning sheet (2) between the print head and the platen roller.
•
Align the rough side of the cleaning sheet adjacent to the print head.
6. Press the print head down until you lock the head lock lever in place.
7. Using two hands, pull the cleaning sheet away from the product.
686
8. After you pull out the cleaning sheet, repeat steps 5 through 7, two or three more
times.
When no more dirt appears on the cleaning sheet after you have pulled it out, stop repeating these
steps.
9. Push the head lock lever (1) towards the rear to unlock the print head.
10. Use a cotton swab to clean the dirt on the print head (3).
687
Replacing the Print Head
Replacing Consumable Parts
Replacing the Print Head
You can easily remove and replace a damaged or worn print head.
•
Do not power on or off the product, connect or disconnect the power cord while your
hands are wet. Doing so could cause an electric shock.
•
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet before you replace the print head.
•
Wear gloves before replacing the print head, to prevent damage to the print head.
1. Make sure that the product is powered off, and disconnect the power cord from the
AC outlet.
2. Open the top cover.
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
3. Push the head lock lever (1) towards the rear to unlock the print head.
•
The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing. Be careful not to touch it, to
avoid being burned.
•
Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury.
4. Remove the media and ribbon if they are already loaded.
688
5. Press the lever (2) to remove the print head (3).
6. Disconnect all the connectors (4) from the defective print head (3).
In total, there are two connectors for CL4NX Plus.
7. Connect all the connectors (4) to the new print head.
•
Handle the print head with care. Do not contaminate or scratch the sensitive print head
surface.
8. Install the new print head.
Install the print head so that it is locked with a click sound.
9. Load the media and ribbon back if you remove them in step 4.
689
Replacing the Platen Roller
Replacing the Platen Roller
You can easily remove and replace a damaged or worn platen roller.
•
Do not power on or off the product, connect or disconnect the power cord while your
hands are wet. Doing so could cause an electric shock.
•
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet before you replace the platen roller.
Guideline to Replace the Platen Roller
The platen roller has a striped marking on the left side. When the striped marking started to fade off, it
indicates that you should replace the platen roller.
•
This is only a general guideline. The condition in which the platen roller wears out
varies depending on the used media. In any cases, replace the worn platen roller when
it affected the printing quality of the product.
1. Make sure that the product is powered off, and disconnect the power cord from the
AC outlet.
2. Open the top cover.
•
Open the top cover fully to prevent accidental drop of the cover.
3. Push the head lock lever (1) towards the rear to unlock the print head.
•
The print head and its surroundings are hot after printing. Be careful not to touch it, to
avoid being burned.
•
Touching the edge of the print head with your bare hand could cause injury.
690
4. Lift the lever (2) in the direction A to unlock the platen roller (3), and then pull out
the platen roller (3) in the direction B.
5. Install the new platen roller.
a. Make sure that the tab (4) on the left driving end of the platen roller is pointing upward. Push the
platen roller in the direction C so that the tab (4) is fixed in the groove (5) at the driving side.
691
Replacing the Platen Roller
b. Next, make sure that the tab (6) on the right driven end of the platen roller is pointing upward.
Push the platen roller again in the direction C so that the tab (6) is fixed in the groove (7) at the
driven side.
6. Turn the lever (2) back to lock the platen roller.
692
Operating the Notification Screen of SOS (SATO Online
Services) (SOS users only)
Operating the Notification Screen of the SOS (SATO Online Services)
On-Demand Mode (SOS users only)
In the SOS (SATO Online Services) function, the product information is sent to the SOS cloud and
monitored and managed.
The status icon
and the notification screen appear at the time specified when [SOS Mode] is set
to [On-Demand] in the [Interface] > [Network] > [Services] > [Online Services] menu and [Periodic
Notification] is enabled on the product. A QR code with the product information is displayed on the
notification screen. You can send the product information to the SOS cloud by scanning the QR code
with a tablet or a smartphone.
The following shows how to operate the notification screen.
The soft key function changes according to the setting of [Update Screen].
When [Update Screen] Is Set to [Normal]
By pressing the
button, the display returns to the Offline screen without resetting the QR
code for periodic notification.
The status icon remains
By pressing the
to the Offline screen.
.
button, the QR code for periodic notification is reset and the display returns
The status icon changes to
.
693
Operating the Notification Screen of the SOS (SATO Online Services) On-Demand Mode (SOS users only)
When [Update Screen] Is Set to [Print]
By pressing the
to the Offline screen.
button, the QR code for periodic notification is reset and the display returns
The status icon changes to
By pressing the
•
.
button, the QR code for periodic notification is printed.
QR codes can also be displayed from [Daily Checkup].
694
Operating the Date and Time Settings Notification Screen of SOS (SATO
Online Services) (SOS users only)
To use the SOS (SATO Online Services) function, date and time settings of the product and the SOS
server must be matched. A notification screen appears when there is a problem with the date and time
settings and the product cannot connect to SOS. Follow the steps on the screen and set the date and
time correctly.
1. Press the
button on the notification screen.
Clear the NTP server connection problem when the NTP function is enabled. The notification
screen appears every 15 seconds until the NTP server connection problem is cleared.
The date and time setting screen appears when the NTP function is disabled or the optional RTC
kit is installed. Proceed to step 2.
2. Set the correct date and press the
Select the digit for input using the
/
/
button.
buttons and select the number to input using the
buttons.
695
Operating the Date and Time Settings Notification Screen of SOS (SATO Online Services) (SOS users only)
3. Set the correct time and press the
Select the digit for input using the
/
/
button.
buttons and select the number to input using the
buttons.
•
SOS will not operate if you cancel the date and time settings by pressing the
button on the notification screen. To display the notification screen again, reboot the
product or change the setting of [On-Demand]/[Real-Time] in [SOS Mode] a few times
to reboot the SOS function.
696
SOS (SATO Online Services) Application (SOS users only)
When the SOS (SATO Online Services) mode is enabled on the product, a QR code is displayed on
the screen at the time of the error outbreak or the timing that is set to perform periodic notification. By
scanning the QR code with a tablet or a smartphone, you can check how to clear the error according
to the current product information in the QR code. You can also contact your SATO technical support
center directly from this specialized application by phone or e-mail.
NFC connection can be used for Android device to acquire the product's information.
For instructions on installing and using the SOS application, refer to the SOS Application User's
Manual.
https://www.sato-sos.com/en/support/#sos_use_manual
697
When an Error Message Appears
When You Are in Trouble
When an Error Message Appears
Error Message 1001 (Machine Error)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Power off the product.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
A defect has occurred in the product.
Countermeasure
Power the product off and then on again.
Powering On/Off the Product
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
698
Error Message 1003 (Parity Error)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE) or
button, or adjust the settings.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
RS-232C settings are incorrect.
Countermeasure (1)
Set the interface settings of the product again.
RS-232C
Cause (2)
The RS-232C cable is not connected correctly.
Countermeasure (2)
Power off the product, connect the RS-232C cable correctly, and then power on the product
again.
Powering On/Off the Product
RS-232C Interface Connection (Standard)
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
699
Error Message 1004 (Overrun Error)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE) or
button, or adjust the settings.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
RS-232C settings are incorrect.
Countermeasure (1)
Set the interface settings of the product again.
RS-232C
Cause (2)
The RS-232C cable is not connected correctly.
Countermeasure (2)
Power off the product, connect the RS-232C cable correctly, and then power on the product
again.
Powering On/Off the Product
RS-232C Interface Connection (Standard)
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
700
Error Message 1005 (Framing Error)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE) or
button, or adjust the settings.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
RS-232C settings are incorrect.
Countermeasure (1)
Set the interface settings of the product again.
RS-232C
Cause (2)
The RS-232C cable is not connected correctly.
Countermeasure (2)
Power off the product, connect the RS-232C cable correctly, and then power on the product
again.
Powering On/Off the Product
RS-232C Interface Connection (Standard)
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
701
Error Message 1006 (Buffer Overflow)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE) or
button, or adjust the settings.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
The size of the received data from the host exceeds the size of the receive buffer.
Countermeasure (1)
Change the settings on the host so that data that exceeds the size of the receive buffer cannot be
sent.
Cause (2)
The interface settings between the product and the host are incorrect.
Countermeasure (2)
Set the interface settings of the product and host again.
Interface Menu
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
702
Error Message 1007 (Head Open)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Lock the print head.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
◦
The print head is unlocked.
◦
The sensor for detecting the open/close status of the print head is defective.
Countermeasure
Unlock the print head once, and then lock it again.
1. Push the head lock lever (1) towards the rear.
2. Press the print head down until the head lock lever is locked.
703
Cause and Countermeasure
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
704
Error Message 1008 (Out of Paper)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Load the media and open/close the print head, or press the
button.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
The media is not loaded.
Countermeasure (1)
Load the media.
Loading the Media
Cause (2)
The media is not loaded correctly.
Countermeasure (2)
Load the media correctly.
Loading the Media
Cause (3)
The media sensor level is not set correctly.
Countermeasure (3)
Adjust the media sensor level.
Calibrate
Cause (4)
The media has jammed.
705
button (OFFLINE) or the
Cause and Countermeasure
Countermeasure (4)
Remove the jammed media.
Refer to the video for loading the media, for the media path, and for the operation of each part
inside the product.
Loading the Media
Cause (5)
The media sensor is not operating correctly.
◦
The media sensor is dirty, or there is a label attached to it.
◦
The media sensor has poor sensitivity.
Countermeasure (5)
Clean the media sensor.
Cleaning Using the Cleaning Kit
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
706
Error Message 1009 (Ribbon End)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Load the ribbon correctly and close the print head, or press the
button.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
The ribbon is not loaded.
Countermeasure (1)
Load the ribbon.
Loading Ribbon
Cause (2)
The ribbon is not loaded correctly.
Countermeasure (2)
Load the ribbon and the media correctly.
Loading Ribbon
Loading the Media
Cause (3)
There is no ribbon.
Countermeasure (3)
Load a new ribbon.
Loading Ribbon
707
button (OFFLINE) or
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (4)
The ribbon sensor is not operating correctly.
◦
The ribbon sensor is dirty.
◦
The ribbon sensor has poor sensitivity.
Countermeasure (4)
Power the product off and then on again.
Powering On/Off the Product
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
708
Error Message 1010 (Media Error)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Open/close the print head, or press the
button (OFFLINE) or the
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
The media size of the print data and the actual media size are different.
Countermeasure (1)
Check the media size of the print data and the actual media size again.
If this does not solve the problem, power the product off and then on again.
Cause (2)
The media size of the print data is longer than the actual media size.
Countermeasure (2)
Check the print data.
If this does not solve the problem, power the product off and then on again.
Cause (3)
The media is fed a longer distance due to an incorrect sensor level.
Countermeasure (3)
Adjust the media sensor level.
Calibrate
If this does not solve the problem, power the product off and then on again.
709
button.
•
The media error appears when [Check Media Size] in [Advanced] under the [Printing]
menu is set to [Enabled].
Check Media Size
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
710
Error Message 1012 (Head Error)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Power off the product, or change print head check conditions.
To forcibly clear the head error and resume printing, press and hold the
until the progress bar on the blue line of the button reaches to the right end.
button (DISMISS)
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
The print elements are worn out.
Countermeasure (1)
Power off the product, or change the print head check conditions to only check for missing
elements in barcodes and try to adjust missing elements to white bars.
Powering On/Off the Product
Head Check
Cause (2)
The print head is defective.
Countermeasure (2)
Replace the print head.
Replacing the Print Head
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
•
Regarding labels output after a head error, use your own barcode scanner to read and
check the printed barcodes.
711
Error Message 1013 (USB R/W Error)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Connect the USB memory and then disconnect it, or press the
button (OFFLINE) or the
button.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
The USB memory is disconnected while writing.
Countermeasure (1)
Connect the USB memory.
Cause (2)
The copy area in the USB memory is not sufficient.
Countermeasure (2)
Make sure that the USB memory has sufficient copy area.
Cause (3)
Writing to the USB memory fails.
Countermeasure (3)
Replace the USB memory.
Cause (4)
The USB memory is not formatted.
Countermeasure (4)
Format the USB memory to a FAT32 format.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
712
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
713
Error Message 1014 (USB Memory Full)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Connect the USB memory with sufficient space, or press the
button.
button (OFFLINE) or
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
The space in the USB memory is not sufficient.
Countermeasure
Delete unwanted data from the USB memory.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
714
Error Message 1015 (Cutter Error)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (FEED).
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
A media jam has occurred in the cutter unit.
Countermeasure (1)
Remove the jammed media from the cutter unit.
Refer to the video for loading the media, for the media path, and for the operation of each part
inside the product.
•
Be careful not to cause injury with the cutter blade when removing the media.
Loading the Media with the Optional Cutter Unit
If the error is not solved, power the product off and then on again.
Cause (2)
The cutter blade does not return to the specified position.
Countermeasure (2)
Press the
button (FEED) to move the cutter blade back to the specified position.
If the error is not solved, power the product off and then on again.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
715
Error Message 1016 (Cutter Cover Open)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Close the cutter.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
The cutter-open lever is open.
Countermeasure (1)
Close and lock the cutter-open lever.
Loading the Media with the Optional Cutter Unit
Cause (2)
The cutter unit is defective.
Countermeasure (2)
Power the product off and then on again.
Powering On/Off the Product
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
716
Error Message 1017 (SBPL Command Error)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (CANCEL) or
button.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
Incorrect command or parameter in the print data.
For details of the error, check the "Caaa: <bb>: cc" part at the bottom of the screen.
◦
Caaa: position of error occurrence
◦
<bb>: error command name
◦
cc: error content
How to See the Command Error Information
Countermeasure
Check the print data.
If this does not solve the problem, power the product off and then on again.
•
The command error appears when [Show Error] in [SBPL] under the [Applications]
menu is set to [Enabled].
Show Error
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
717
How to See the Command Error Information
•
Location of error occurrence
"Caaa" in the command error message shows the location of command error.
The number of ESC commands from ESC+A is shown in "aaa".
Note that the ESC+A command is not included in the number of ESC commands, which can be
shown up to 999.
When a command error is detected by the Horizontal Print Position <H> command.
------: [ESC]A
C001: [ESC]V100
C002: [ESC]H99999
C003: [ESC]L0202
C004: [ESC]M,ABCDEF
C005: [ESC]Q1
C006: [ESC]Z
In this case, C002 is the location of the error.
•
Error command name
The command name is shown in "<bb>". Error is detected in the command name.
◦
A one-byte command name is left aligned
•
Error description
The cause of command error appears in "cc" in the error message ("Caaa:<bb>:cc").
Description ("cc")
Cause
Invalid command
Analyzed improper command.
Invalid parameter
Received improper parameter.
Command table read
error
Failed to read the command table.
Invalid graphic data/
custom designed data
Analyzed improper graphic and custom designed data.
Invalid registration
area
•
Specified memory area (card slot) is inappropriate.
•
Tried to write to a write-protected media.
This number is
already registered.
Number specified by registration command has already been taken.
Over registration area
limit
Exceeded the registration area. (Memory full)
Data is not registered
Data, such as form overlay, is not registered.
718
Description ("cc")
Cause
Printing position is out
of printable area
The specified print start position is outside the printable area.
Barcode image is out
of printable area
The printing image is outside the printable area. (Barcode only)
719
Error Message 1020 (Calendar Error)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Change the calendar (option) settings, press the
off the product.
button (OFFLINE) or
button, or power
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
The date and time of the calendar (option) are incorrect.
Countermeasure
Power the product off and then on again, and check the print data.
Powering On/Off the Product
If that does not resolve the problem, check whether the RTC kit is attached properly, or if the RTC
PCB needs to be replaced. Contact your SATO technical support center.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
720
Error Message 1021 (BCC Check Error)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (CANCEL) or
button.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
The BCC code of the data to be sent (one item) is incorrect.
Countermeasure
Check the data to be sent and interface settings.
◦
button: Continue printing from the print data where the BCC error occurred.
◦
Cancel button: Cancel the print data where the BCC error occurred, and continue printing from
the next item.
◦
Send the SUB command: Clear the BCC error and continue printing from where it stopped.
◦
Send the CAN command: Cancel the print data where the BCC error occurred and continue
printing from the next item.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
721
Error Message 1022 (Print Head Overheated)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Stop the operation of the product and wait for the temperature to fall.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
The temperature of the product has exceeded its allowed value.
Countermeasure
Stop the operation of the product and wait for the temperature to fall.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
722
Error Message 1023 (NTP Error)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE) or change the calendar setting.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
Could not connect to the time server and set the date and time.
Countermeasure
◦
Confirm that the address of the time server is correct.
Time Server IP
◦
Confirm that there is a connection to the time server.
◦
If RTC kit is attached, the date and time can be set manually and operation resumed without
NTP functionality.
Regional
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
723
Error Message 1024 (Head Density Changed)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Check the message that appeared on the screen.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
The print head is not installed.
Countermeasure (1)
Install the print head.
Replacing the Print Head
Cause (2)
A new print head with a different resolution has been installed.
Countermeasure (2)
Install a print head with the same resolution as the old print head.
Replacing the Print Head
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
724
Error Message 1028 (Gap Not Found)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE) or open/close the print head.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
Meandering media.
Countermeasure (1)
Load the media correctly.
Loading the Media
Cause (2)
A label is attached to the media sensor.
Countermeasure (2)
Clean the media sensor.
Cleaning Using the Cleaning Kit
Cause (3)
The media sensor type is incorrect.
Countermeasure (3)
Set the media sensor type which is compatible with the media you use.
Media Sensor Type
Cause (4)
The media sensor level is incorrect.
Countermeasure (4)
Adjust the media sensor level.
725
Cause and Countermeasure
Calibrate
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
726
Error Message 1035 (I-mark Not Found)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE) or open/close the print head.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
Meandering media.
Countermeasure (1)
Load the media correctly.
Loading the Media
Cause (2)
A label is attached to the media sensor.
Countermeasure (2)
Clean the media sensor.
Cleaning Using the Cleaning Kit
Cause (3)
The media sensor type is incorrect.
Countermeasure (3)
Set the media sensor type which is compatible with the media you use.
Media Sensor Type
Cause (4)
The media sensor level is incorrect.
Countermeasure (4)
Adjust the media sensor level.
727
Cause and Countermeasure
Calibrate
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
728
Error Message 1046 (EAP Authentication Error (EAP Failure))
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Change the Wi-Fi settings or press the
button (OFFLINE).
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
EAP Authentication failure.
Countermeasure
Use the correct Wi-Fi settings.
EAP Conf.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
729
Error Message 1047 (EAP Authentication Error (EAP Timeout))
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE).
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
EAP Authentication failure.
Countermeasure
Use the correct Access Point (AP) and authentication server settings.
EAP Conf.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
730
Error Message 1050 (Bluetooth Error)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Check the message that appeared on the screen.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
Bluetooth module is defective.
Countermeasure
Repair of the Bluetooth module is required. Contact your SATO technical support center.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
731
Error Message 1058 (CRC Check Error)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (CANCEL) or
button (PRINT).
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
◦
CRC has not been added to the data.
◦
CRC does not match.
Countermeasure
Check transmitted data and interface settings.
◦
button (PRINT): Continue printing from the print data where the CRC error occurred.
◦
button (CANCEL): Cancel the print data where the CRC error occurred and continue
printing from the next item.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
732
Error Message 1066 (Paper Jam)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Unlock the print head and load the media again.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause (1)
The media has jammed.
Countermeasure (1)
Remove the jammed media.
Refer to the video for loading the media, for the media path, and for the operation of each part
inside the product.
Loading the Media
Cause (2)
The media is not loaded correctly.
Countermeasure (2)
Load the media correctly.
Loading the Media
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
733
Error message 1075 (NFC Error)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE).
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
The NFC module is not operating correctly.
Countermeasure
A replacement of the NFC module is required. Contact your SATO technical support center.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
734
Error message 1076 (Invalid Command in NFC)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE).
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
A command error occurs and the settings are not saved correctly.
Countermeasure
Check the command.
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
735
Error Message 1077 (Barcode Reader Connection Error)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Connect the barcode checker, or press the
button (OFFLINE).
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
◦
Could not check the connection of the barcode checker.
◦
Communication between the barcode checker and the product fails.
Countermeasure
Check the barcode checker, and connect it correctly.
If you do not use the barcode check function, disable the barcode check mode.
Mode
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
736
Error Message 1078 (Barcode Reading Error)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE) or
button (CANCEL).
•
Press the
button (OFFLINE) to change to Offline mode while keeping the print job.
•
Press the
button (CANCEL) to cancel the print job and change to Offline mode.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
Could not read the barcode correctly.
Countermeasure
◦
Check the layout for printing.
◦
Check the barcode checker position and its settings.
Configuring Optional Barcode Check Function
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
737
Error Message 1079 (Barcode Reading Error (Checking Start Position
Abnormality))
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
job.
button (OFFLINE). The product changes to Offline mode while keeping the print
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
A value larger than the loaded media length is specified for checking start position.
Countermeasure
◦
Check the layout for printing.
◦
Set a value smaller than the loaded media length for checking start position.
Start Position
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
738
Error Message 1080 (Barcode Comparison Error)
When there is an error with the product, the error message appears on the screen.
Check the cause and countermeasure, and then take appropriate action.
To clear the error:
Press the
button (OFFLINE) or
button (CANCEL).
•
Press the
button (OFFLINE) to change to Offline mode while keeping the print job.
•
Press the
button (CANCEL) to cancel the print job and change to Offline mode.
Cause and Countermeasure
Cause
The read result of the barcode does not match the print data.
Countermeasure
◦
Check the layout for printing.
◦
Check the barcode checker position and its settings.
Configuring Optional Barcode Check Function
Contact your SATO technical support center if the error cannot be resolved.
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
739
Error Message Indication and Operating Procedure When the SOS (SATO Online Services) Is Enabled (SOS users only)
Error Message Indication and Operating Procedure When the
SOS (SATO Online Services) Is Enabled (SOS users only)
The SOS (SATO Online Services) icon appears in the error message when SOS is enabled.
If you select the SOS icon, a QR code containing the error information and the contact telephone
number appears.
•
Press the
•
If the icon of the guidance videos also appears, select the SOS icon using the
button.
button, and then press the
/
button.
A screen with QR code, phone number, serial number, and error number appears after selecting the
SOS icon and pressing the
button.
740
The menu for the specialized application for SOS appears after scanning the QR code with a tablet
device or smartphone. NFC connection can be used for Android device to acquire the product's
information. A specialized SOS application is required to scan the QR code or acquire the product's
information with NFC connection.
Press the
button to return to the error message screen.
741
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
Contact Information for When You Are in Trouble
Service and Support Page of Your Nearest SATO Office
Access the following site and select your country from the list. Check the information on the displayed
page.
http://www.satoworldwide.com/service-and-support.aspx
Contact Us
Access the following site to send us your questions or comments.
https://www.satoworldwide.com/contact-us.aspx
742
Product Specifications
Specifications
Hardware
Dimensions and Weight
Item
CL4NX Plus
Width
271 mm (10.67") (Excludes projection)
Height
321 mm (12.64") (Excludes projection)
Depth
457 mm (18.00") (Excludes projection)
Weight
Approximately 15.1 kg (33.28 lbs.) (Excludes media, ribbon and options)
Power Supply
Item
CL4NX Plus
Input Voltage
AC 100 - 240 V ±10% (Full-range)
Frequency
50 / 60 Hz
Power Consumption
At peak
180 W / 190 VA (Print ratio 30%)
Standby
20 W / 40 VA
Processing
Item
CL4NX Plus
Flash ROM
CPU1
2 GB
CPU2
4 MB
SDRAM
CPU1
256 MB
743
Hardware
Item
CL4NX Plus
CPU2
64 MB
User Registration Area
Maximum 679 MB
Receive Buffer
Buffer full
2.95 MB
Buffer near full
Occurrence: 2MB, Release: 1 MB
Operation
Item
CL4NX Plus
LCD
TFT color 3.5-inch (88.9 mm)
LED
STATUS
Blue/Red
Display Language
English / German / French / Spanish / Italian / Portuguese / Brazilian
Portuguese / Czech / Danish / Dutch / Finnish / Greek / Hungarian /
Norwegian / Polish / Romanian / Russian / Slovak / Swedish / Turkish /
Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional) / Korean / Japanese / Arabic /
Thai / Vietnamese / Persian / Indonesian / Hindi / Bulgarian
Environmental Conditions (Without Media and Ribbon)
Item
CL4NX Plus
Operating
Temperature
Continuous/Cutter/Tear-off mode
0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)
Dispenser/Linerless mode
5 to 35 °C (41 to 95 °F)
Storage Temperature
-20 to 60 °C (-4 to 140 °F)
Operating Humidity
Continuous/Dispenser/Cutter/Tear-off mode
30 to 80% RH (Non-condensing)
Linerless mode
30 to 75% RH (Non-condensing)
744
Item
CL4NX Plus
Storage Humidity
30 to 90% RH (Non-condensing)
Print
Item
CL4NX Plus
Print Method
Direct thermal and thermal transfer
Print Speed
203/305 dpi
2 to 14 inches/sec (50.8 to 355.6 mm/sec)
* Maximum is 10 inches/sec (254 mm/sec) in dispenser mode.
609 dpi
2 to 6 inches/sec (50.8 to 152 mm/sec)
Linerless mode
2 to 6 inches/sec (50.8 to 152 mm/sec)
Resolution (Head
Density)
Non-printable Area
•
203 dpi (8 dots/mm)
•
305 dpi (12 dots/mm)
•
609 dpi (24 dots/mm)
Pitch direction (Excludes liner)
Top
1.5 mm (0.06")
Bottom
1.5 mm (0.06")
Width direction (Excludes liner)
Left
1.5 mm (0.06")
Right
1.5 mm (0.06")
Printable Area
203 dpi
Length 2500 mm (98.42")
x Width 104 mm (4.09")
305 dpi
Length 1500 mm (59.05")
x Width 104 mm (4.09")
745
Hardware
Item
CL4NX Plus
609 dpi
Length 400 mm (15.75")
x Width 104 mm (4.09")
Print End Position
203 dpi (1 dot = 0.125 mm (0.0049"))
1 to 20000 dots
305 dpi (1 dot = 0.083 mm (0.0033"))
1 to 18000 dots
609 dpi (1 dot = 0.042 mm (0.0017"))
1 to 9600 dots
Print Darkness
Darkness level
1 to 10
Darkness range
A
Sensors
Item
CL4NX Plus
I-mark (Reflective
Type)
Position and sensitivity
Gap (Transmissive
Type)
Position and sensitivity
Head Open
Fixed
Paper End Sensor
Detect with I-mark sensor or Gap sensor
Label Near End
Fixed
Ribbon End/Ribbon
Near End
Fixed
Dispenser
Fixed
Adjustable
Adjustable
•
Cutter
If linerless cutter kit or dispenser unit is installed.
Fixed
•
If cutter unit or linerless cutter kit is installed.
746
•
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
747
USB Interface
Interface
Supported Interfaces
For data communication with the host, the product supports the following interfaces.
Standard
•
USB Interface (Type B)
•
LAN Interface (Ethernet)
•
Bluetooth Interface
•
NFC Interface
•
USB Interface (Type A) x 2
•
RS-232C Interface (DB 9 pins, female)
•
IEEE1284 Interface (Amphenol 36 pins)
•
External Signal (EXT) Interface (Amphenol 14 pins)
Option
•
Wireless LAN Interface
•
Do not connect or disconnect the interface cables (or use a switch box) with power
supplied to either the product or host. This may cause damage to the interface circuitry
in the product or host and is not covered by warranty.
•
Wireless LAN is an optional interface.
•
You cannot use the wireless LAN interface and LAN interface at a time.
•
You can set the interface settings of the product through [Interface] in the [Settings]
menu.
USB Interface
This interface complies with the USB2.0 standard.
Install the USB driver to the computer before use.
Basic Specifications
Connector
USB Type B connector
Protocol
Status4, Status5
748
Basic Specifications
Power Supply
BUS Power through cable
Pin Assignments
Pin No.
Description
1
VBus
2
-Data
3
+Data
4
GND
Cable Specifications
Cable Connector
USB Type B connector
Cable Length
5 m (16.4 feet) or less
•
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LAN Interface
Basic Specifications
Connector
RJ-45 Receptacle
Protocol
•
Status3
•
Status4
•
Status5
•
IPv4
•
IPv6
•
IPv4
•
IPv6
•
IPv4
IP Address
Subnet Mask / Prefix Length
Gateway Address
749
NFC Interface
Basic Specifications
•
IPv6
Cable Specifications
Cable
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Category 5
Cable Length
100 m (328 feet) or less
Software Specifications
Supported Protocol
TCP/IP
Network Layer
IP, ICMP
Session Layer
TCP
Application Layer
LPD, FTP, DHCP, HTTP/HTTPS, SNMP, NTP
•
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Bluetooth Interface
This interface complies with the Bluetooth3.0+EDR standard.
Basic Specifications
Signal Level
Class 2
Communication Distance
10 m (32.8 feet)
Profile
Serial Port Profile
Security Level
None, level 2-1, 2-2, level 3, level 4
PIN Code
1 to 16 characters consisting of ASCII code (20H, 21H, 23H to 7EH)
Disconnect Timeout (LMP
Layer)
60 seconds
•
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
NFC Interface
This interface complies with the NFC Forum Type 2 Tag.
750
•
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
RS-232C Interface
This interface complies with the RS-232C standard.
Basic Specifications
Asynchronous ASCII
Half-duplex communication
Bi-directional communication
Data Transmission Rate
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps
Transmission Form
Start, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7, b8, Stop
•
"b8" will be omitted if using 7 bit oriented.
Data Length
7 or 8 bits (Selected)
Stop Bit
1 or 2 bits (Selected)
Parity Bit
ODD, EVEN, NONE (Selected)
Codes Used
ASCII Character Codes
7 bits
Graphics
8 bits
Control Codes
STX (02H), ETX (03H), ACK (06H), NAK (15H)
Connector
DB-9 Female or equivalent
Signal Level
High = +5 to +12 V, Low = -5 to -12 V
Protocol
READY/BUSY, XON/XOFF, STATUS3, STATUS4, STATUS5
751
IEEE1284 Interface
Connector Pin Specifications
Pin
No.
I/O
Description
1
-
Data Carrier Detect
2
Input
Receive Data
3
Output
Transmit Data
4
Output
Data Terminal Ready
5
Reference
Signal Ground
6
Input
Data Set Ready
7
Output
Request To Send
8
Input
Clear To Send
9
-
Not connected
Cable Specifications
Cable Connector
DB-9 Male or equivalent
Cable Length
5 m (16.4 feet) or less
•
When using the READY/BUSY control, make sure that the product is in power on
mode before you send the data from the host.
•
With communication protocols, such as XON/XOFF, STATUS3, STATUS4 or STATUS5,
a receive buffer full error will occur when the received data is more than the receive
buffer size (2.95 MB). Send data that is less than 2.95 MB while monitoring the status
of the product.
•
A parity error will be detected if this error occurs after the reception of ESC+A.
•
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
IEEE1284 Interface
This interface complies with the IEEE1284 standard.
Basic Specifications
Connector
Amphenol 36 pins, female
Signal Level
High-level
+2.4 to +5.0 V
Low-level
+0.0 to +0.4 V
752
Basic Specifications
Receive Mode
Single-item buffer, Multi-item buffer
Connector Pin Specifications
Pin
No.
I/O
Description
1
Input
STROBE
2-9
Input
DATA 1 - DATA 8
DATA1
LSB
DATA8
MSB
10
Output
ACK
11
Output
BUSY
12
Output
PAPER EMPTY/PAPER ERROR
13
Output
SELECT
14
Input
AUTO FEED
15
-
Not in use
16
-
LOGIC Ground
17
-
Frame Ground
18
-
+5 V
19
-
STROBE RETURN
20-27
-
DATA 1 - DATA 8 RETURN
28
-
ACK RETURN
29
-
BUSY RETURN
753
External Signal (EXT) Interface
Connector Pin Specifications
Pin
No.
I/O
Description
30
-
PAPER EMPTY RETURN
31
Input
INITIALIZE
32
Output
FAULT
33-35
-
Not in use
36
Input
SELECT INPUT
Cable Specifications
Cable Connector
Amphenol 36 pins, male
Cable Length
1.5 m (5 feet) or less
•
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
External Signal (EXT) Interface
Basic Specifications of External Signal (EXT) Interface
This interface is designed to connect the product with other peripherals.
Basic Specifications
Connector
Centronics IDC Type 14 pins (Female)
Signal Levels
High-level
+4.2 to +5.0 V
Low-level
+0.0 to +0.7 V
754
Connector Pin Specifications of External Signal (EXT) Interface
Pin
No.
I/O
1
Output
Description
Electric Conditions
(Voltage, Current (Max))
Paper End
Withstand voltage 50 V
Outputs a low signal when the paper end is Sink current 50 mA
detected.
2
-
GND
-
Reference Signal Ground
3
Output
Ribbon End
Withstand voltage 50 V
Outputs a low signal when the ribbon end
is detected.
4
Output
Machine Error
Sink current 50 mA
Withstand voltage 50 V
Outputs a low signal when an error such as Sink current 50 mA
the head open error is detected.
5
Input
Print Start signal (PRIN)
High: high impedance
Prints one media when a low signal is
detected.
6
Output
Print Done/Print End signal (PREND)
Outputs a signal when the media print is
completed.
7
Input
Reprint signal (PRIN2)
Input
Withstand voltage 50 V
Sink current 50 mA
High: high impedance
Prints the previously printed content again
when a low signal is detected.
8
Low: more than -15 mA, 0 V
External power supply
Low: more than -15 mA, 0 V
5V
755
External Signal (EXT) Interface
Pin
No.
I/O
Description
9
Output
Electric Conditions
(Voltage, Current (Max))
Offline
Withstand voltage 50 V
Outputs a low signal when the product is in Sink current 50 mA
Offline mode.
10
Output
Ribbon Near End
Withstand voltage 50 V
Outputs a high signal when the ribbon near Sink current 50 mA
end is detected.
11
-
-
-
12
-
+24 V ± 10%
2A
13
-
Vcc +5 V
500 mA
14
-
-
-
*
Output
Wait signal for dispense completion
Outputs a low signal when the dispense is
completed.
Withstand voltage 50 V
Sink current 50 mA
You can set the pin number for output
through the [Settings] > [Interface] >
[External I/O] > [Signals] > [Outputs] menu.
*
Output
Label Near End signal
Withstand voltage 50 V
Outputs a high signal when the label near
end is detected.
Sink current 50 mA
You can set the pin number for output
through the [Settings] > [Interface] >
[External I/O] > [Signals] > [Outputs] menu.
•
You can set the external signal (EXT) type (TYPE1 to TYPE4) for Print Done output
signal of pin No. 6. Refer to the [EXT Mode] screen of the [Settings] > [Interface] >
[External I/O] > [Signals] menu for details.
•
You can set the pin number for input and output through the [Settings] > [Interface] >
[External I/O] > [Signals] > [Inputs] and [Outputs] menu.
•
The Print Done signal of pin No. 6 is not outputted when 0 is specified in the number of
cuts in the command specifying the number of cuts during the cutter operation.
756
Timing Chart of the EXT Input Signal
Item
Input Waveform
Print Start
Reprint (No
Print Start
Signal)
Reprint
(With Print
Start Signal)
•
Keep the print start signal (PRIN) to "Low" until the print end signal (Print done) is
outputted. For maintaining the print start signal (PRIN), refer to the Maintaining the
Print Start Signal (PRIN).
•
Keep the output reprint signal (PRIN2) for more than 10 ms. When signal is outputted
for shorter than 10 ms, and reprint signal is not acknowledged, the product does not
perform reprinting.
757
External Signal (EXT) Interface
Maintaining the Print Start Signal (PRIN)
Item
Input Waveform
Print Start
Print End
(PREND)
Signal
•
Rise or fall time (T1) of Print Done signal is less than 150 ns. You have to consider the time when
outputting the signal from the connected devices.
•
When the print start signal and reprint signal are outputted simultaneously, the print start signal is
enabled and the product does not perform reprinting.
•
The reprint signal is valid only from the time of the print operation end (QTY=0) until the next print
data reception. Other than that, the product does not perform reprinting.
Timing Chart of the EXT Output Signal
Standard Specification
758
Item
Output Waveform
Basic
Operation
Paper End
Ribbon End
759
External Signal (EXT) Interface
Item
Output Waveform
Machine
Error
Ribbon
Near End/
Label Near
End
Offline
760
Timing Chart of the Wait Signal for Dispense Completion
Item
Output Waveform
Backfeed
After Print
Backfeed
Before Print
1. When the wait signal for dispense completion is enabled, note that the output timing of the print
end signal (print done) differs between Backfeed After Print and Backfeed Before Print.
a. In Backfeed After Print, the print end signal (print done) is output after the label waiting for
dispense is removed and the product backfeeds to the print start position.
b. In Backfeed Before Print, the print end signal (print done) is output after the product feeds the
label to the dispense position.
2. "Printed 1 piece" includes the operation of the product feeding the label to the dispense position
after printing.
Wireless LAN Interface
This interface complies with the IEEE802.11a/b/g/n standard.
•
Before using wireless LAN near medical devices and facilities, consult your system
administrator.
761
Wireless LAN Interface
Basic Specifications
Protocol
Status3, Status4, Status5
IP Address
•
IPv4
•
IPv6
•
IPv4
•
IPv6
•
IPv4
•
IPv6
Subnet Mask / Prefix Length
Gateway Address
Data Transfer Method
802.11a
Max 54 Mbps
802.11n
Max 135 Mbps
802.11b
Max 11 Mbps
802.11g
Max 54 Mbps
•
Frequency Band
These are the logical values based on the wireless
LAN specifications and are not the actual data transfer
speeds.
•
2.4 GHz (2.412 to 2.472 GHz)
•
5 GHz (5.180 to 5.825 GHz)
Communication Channel
The number of channels you can set varies depending on the
region where you use the product.
SSID
Any alphanumeric character (Maximum 32)
Authentication
•
Open System
•
Shared Key
•
WPA/WPA2
•
Perform the RADIUS server authentication using 802.1x (EAPTLS, EAP-LEAP, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP, EAP-FAST protocol)
•
None
•
WEP (64 bits/128 bits)
•
TKIP (WPA-PSK, WPA-802.1x)
•
AES (WPA2-PSK, WPA2-802.1x)
•
Infrastructure
Encryption
Communication Mode
762
Basic Specifications
•
Ad Hoc
Software Specifications
Supported Protocol
TCP/IP
Network Layer
IP, ICMP
Session Layer
TCP
Application Layer
LPD, FTP, DHCP, HTTP/HTTPS, SNMP, NTP
•
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
763
Built-in Functions
Built-in Functions
Item
CL4NX Plus
Built-in Functions
•
Status return
•
Graphic
•
Sequential number
•
Form overlay
•
Character modification
•
Black/white inversion
•
Ruled line
•
Dump list
•
Format registration
•
Outline font
•
Outline modification
•
Zero slash switching
•
Guidance video
•
LCD display in 31 languages
•
Cleaning notification
•
Calendar (Optional)
•
Barcode check (Optional)
•
Password lock
•
Logo, font download
•
LCD turns off
•
Standby
•
Total print count indication
•
Reprint
•
Power on in Online mode
•
Feed after error
•
Feed at power on
•
Command error indication
•
Non-standard mode
•
Priority settings
•
Broken head element check
•
Head open detection
•
Media size check
•
Paper end detection
•
Label near end detection
Self-diagnosis
Functions
764
Item
CL4NX Plus
Adjustment Functions
•
•
Ribbon end detection
•
Ribbon near end detection
•
Test print
•
Cutter open check (If cutter unit is installed)
•
Label detection at dispensing (If dispenser unit is installed)
•
Print darkness
•
Print position
•
Media stop position
•
Buzzer
•
LCD brightness
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
765
Printer Languages
Printer Languages
•
SBPL (Includes XML support)
•
SZPL
•
SDPL
•
SIPL
•
STCL
•
SEPL
766
Usable Media and Ribbon
Media
•
Use only the supply products specified by SATO.
Type
•
Media roll (Face-in wound/face-out wound)
•
Fan-fold media
Size
•
Continuous
Item
CL4NX Plus
Media Length
203 dpi
6 to 2497 mm (0.24" to 98.30")
305 dpi
6 to 1497 mm (0.24" to 58.94")
609 dpi
6 to 397 mm (0.24" to 15.63")
Media Length (With
Liner)
203 dpi
9 to 2500 mm (0.35" to 98.42")
305 dpi
9 to 1500 mm (0.35" to 59.05")
609 dpi
9 to 400 mm (0.35" to 15.75")
Media Width
•
22 to 128 mm (0.87" to 5.04")
Media Width (With
Liner)
•
25 to 131 mm (0.98" to 5.16")
*Above pitch and width are valid for die-cut labels. For media without liner like tags, refer to the
value 'with liner'.
•
Tear-Off/Cutter
767
Media
Item
CL4NX Plus
Media Length
203 dpi
17 to 2497 mm (0.67" to 98.30")
305 dpi
17 to 1497 mm (0.67" to 58.94")
609 dpi
17 to 397 mm (0.67" to 15.63")
Media Length (With
Liner)
203 dpi
20 to 2500 mm (0.79" to 98.42")
305 dpi
20 to 1500 mm (0.79" to 59.05")
609 dpi
20 to 400 mm (0.79" to 15.75")
When Print Mode is set to Cut & Print, the minimum media length for
each print speed is the following value.
2 ips: 40 mm (1.57")
3 ips: 58 mm (2.28")
4 ips: 75 mm (2.95")
5 ips: 93 mm (3.66")
6 ips: 110 mm (4.33")
7 ips: 125 mm (4.92")
8 ips: 140 mm (5.51")
9 ips: 156 mm (6.14")
10 ips: 171 mm (6.73")
11 ips: 184mm (7.24")
12 ips: 193mm (7.60")
13 ips: 198mm (7.80")
14 ips: 200mm (7.87")
Media Width
•
22 to 128 mm (0.87" to 5.04")
Media Width (With
Liner)
•
25 to 131 mm (0.98" to 5.16")
*Above pitch and width are valid for die-cut labels. For media without liner like tags, refer to the
value 'with liner'.
•
Dispenser
768
Item
CL4NX Plus
Media Length
•
10 to 397 mm (0.39" to 15.63")
* 10 to 27 mm are available only for thermal transfer.
Media Length (With
Liner)
•
Media Width
•
22 to 128 mm (0.87" to 5.04")
Media Width (With
Liner)
•
25 to 131 mm (0.98" to 5.16")
Diameter of Liner
Winding
Maximum φ120 mm (4.72")
13 to 400 mm (0.51" to 15.75")
* 13 to 30 mm are available only for thermal transfer.
*Above pitch and width are valid for die-cut labels. For media without liner like tags, refer to the
value 'with liner'.
•
Linerless
Item
CL4NX Plus
Media Length
30 to 120 mm (1.18" to 4.72")
Media Width
60 to 118 mm (2.36" to 4.65")
•
The usable media sizes, the output speed and print quality vary depending on the
media specification, media and ribbon combination, product settings and outputting
environment. It is recommended to perform a test print with the media and ribbon to be
used in advance.
Roll Diameter (Media Roll)
•
Maximum φ265 mm (φ10.43")
•
When using a dispenser unit with liner rewinder
Maximum φ220 mm (φ8.66")
Core Diameter (Media Roll)
•
φ76 mm (φ3"), φ101 mm (φ4")
•
When using a dispenser unit with liner rewinder
φ76 mm (φ3")
•
Recommend to use 4" core for thick paper (more than 150 μm (0.0059")) and nonadhesive media.
Height (Fan-fold Media)
•
Maximum 200 mm (7.87")
769
Media
•
When the product and media are configured to the same height.
Thickness
•
60 to 268 μm (0.060 to 0.268 mm (0.0024" to 0.011"))
770
Ribbon
•
Use only the supply products specified by SATO.
Item
CL4NX Plus
Size
Length
Maximum 600 m (1968.5 feet)
Width
39.5 to 128 mm (1.55" to 5.04")
•
When the width of the ribbon is 39.5 mm (1.55"), the maximum length is
450 m (1476.4 feet).
•
The maximum length of the ribbon varies depending on the ribbon type.
•
Use the ribbon that is wider than the media.
Wind
Direction
Both face-out/face-in
Winding
Method
Coreless
771
Fonts
Usable Fonts and Barcodes
Fonts
Bitmap Fonts
Item
CL4NX Plus
U
9 dots H x 5 dots W
S
15 dots H x 8 dots W
M
20 dots H x 13 dots W
WB
30 dots H x 18 dots W
WL
52 dots H x 28 dots W
XU
9 dots H x 5 dots W
XS
17 dots H x 17 dots W
XM
24 dots H x 24 dots W
XB
48 dots H x 48 dots W
XL
48 dots H x 48 dots W
X20
9 dots H x 5 dots W
X21
17 dots H x 17 dots W
X22
24 dots H x 24 dots W
X23
48 dots H x 48 dots W
X24
48 dots H x 48 dots W
OCR-A
203 dpi
22 dots H x 15 dots W
305 dpi
33 dots H x 22 dots W
609 dpi
66 dots H x 44 dots W
OCR-B
203 dpi
24 dots H x 20 dots W
305 dpi
36 dots H x 30 dots W
772
Item
CL4NX Plus
609 dpi
72 dots H x 60 dots W
JIS208 Kanji Fonts
(Mincho/Gothic)
•
16 dots H x 16 dots W
•
24 dots H x 24 dots W
•
22 dots H x 22 dots W
•
32 dots H x 32 dots W
•
40 dots H x 40 dots W
•
16 dots H x 16 dots W
•
24 dots H x 24 dots W
•
22 dots H x 22 dots W
•
32 dots H x 32 dots W
•
40 dots H x 40 dots W
Compatible Kanji
Fonts (Mincho)
•
16 dots H x 16 dots W
•
24 dots H x 24 dots W
Simplified Chinese
Characters
•
16 dots H x 16 dots W
•
24 dots H x 24 dots W
Traditional Chinese
Characters
•
24 dots H x 24 dots W
Korean Fonts
•
16 dots H x 16 dots W
•
24 dots H x 24 dots W
JIS0213 Kanji Fonts
(Gothic)
Scalable Fonts
Item
CL4NX Plus
Rasterized Font
•
SATO CG Sleek
•
SATO CG Stream
•
SATO 0
•
SATO Alpha Bold Condensed
•
SATO Beta Bold Italic
•
SATO Folio Bold
•
SATO Futura Medium Condensed
•
SATO Gamma
•
SATO OCR-A
•
SATO OCR-B
773
Fonts
Item
CL4NX Plus
Rasterized Font
(Multilingual)
Outline Fonts
•
•
SATO Sans
•
SATO Serif
•
SATO Symbol Set
•
SATO WingBats
•
SATO Vica
•
SATO Hebe Sans
•
SATO Hebe Sans Arabic
•
SATO Hebe Sans Thai
•
SATO Hebe Sans Hebrew
•
SATO Hebe Sans Hindi
•
SATO Gothic Traditional Chinese
•
SATO Gothic Japanese
•
SATO Gothic Simplified Chinese
•
SATO Gothic Korean
•
SATO Silver Serif
•
SATO Mincho Traditional Chinese
•
SATO Mincho Japanese
•
SATO Mincho Simplified Chinese
•
SATO Mincho Korean
•
SATO Roman Arabic
•
Helvetica Outline Font
•
JIS208 Kanji Outline Fonts
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
774
X20 Font
The X20 font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 9 dots H x 5 dots W.
This supports the fixed pitch only.
A font sample is shown in the figure below.
775
X21 Font
The X21 font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 17 dots H x 17 dots W.
You can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch.
A font sample is shown in the figure below.
•
To select proportional pitch, enable [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Proportional] in the
[Applications] menu, or specify with the command.
776
X22 Font
The X22 font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 24 dots H x 24 dots W.
You can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch.
A font sample is shown in the figure below.
•
To select proportional pitch, enable [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Proportional] in the
[Applications] menu, or specify with the command.
777
X23 Font
The X23 font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 48 dots H x 48 dots W.
You can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch.
A font sample is shown in the figure below.
•
To select proportional pitch, enable [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Proportional] in the
[Applications] menu, or specify with the command.
778
X24 Font
The X24 font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 48 dots H x 48 dots W.
You can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch.
A font sample is shown in the figure below.
•
To select proportional pitch, enable [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Proportional] in the
[Applications] menu, or specify with the command.
779
U Font
The U font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 9 dots H x 5 dots W.
This supports the fixed pitch only.
The figure below is a font sample when the code page 858 is used.
•
The character set is changed according to the [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code Page]
settings in the [Applications] menu or the code page specified using commands.
780
S Font
The S font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 15 dots H x 8 dots W.
This supports the fixed pitch only.
The figure below is a font sample when the code page 858 is used.
•
The character set is changed according to the [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code Page]
settings in the [Applications] menu or the code page specified using commands.
781
M Font
The M font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 20 dots H x 13 dots W.
This supports the fixed pitch only.
The figure below is a font sample when the code page 858 is used.
•
The character set is changed according to the [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code Page]
settings in the [Applications] menu or the code page specified using commands.
782
WB Font
The WB font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 30 dots H x 18 dots W.
This supports the fixed pitch only.
The figure below is a font sample when the code page 858 is used.
•
The character set is changed according to the [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code Page]
settings in the [Applications] menu or the code page specified using commands.
783
WL Font
The WL font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 52 dots H x 28 dots W.
This supports the fixed pitch only.
The figure below is a font sample when the code page 858 is used.
•
The character set is changed according to the [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code Page]
settings in the [Applications] menu or the code page specified using commands.
784
XU Font
The XU font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 9 dots H x 5 dots W.
You can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch.
The figure below is a font sample when the code page 858 is used.
•
To select proportional pitch, enable [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Proportional] in the
[Applications] menu, or specify with the command.
•
The character set is changed according to the [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code Page]
settings in the [Applications] menu or the code page specified using commands.
785
XS Font
The XS font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 17 dots H x 17 dots W.
You can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch.
The figure below is a font sample when the code page 858 is used.
•
To select proportional pitch, enable [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Proportional] in the
[Applications] menu, or specify with the command.
•
The character set is changed according to the [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code Page]
settings in the [Applications] menu or the code page specified using commands.
786
XM Font
The XM font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 24 dots H x 24 dots W.
You can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch.
The figure below is a font sample when the code page 858 is used.
•
To select proportional pitch, enable [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Proportional] in the
[Applications] menu, or specify with the command.
•
The character set is changed according to the [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code Page]
settings in the [Applications] menu or the code page specified using commands.
787
XB Font
The XB font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 48 dots H x 48 dots W.
You can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch.
The figure below is a font sample when the code page 858 is used.
•
To select proportional pitch, enable [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Proportional] in the
[Applications] menu, or specify with the command.
•
The character set is changed according to the [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code Page]
settings in the [Applications] menu or the code page specified using commands.
788
XL Font
The XL font is a bitmap font with a basic size of 48 dots H x 48 dots W.
You can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch.
The figure below is a font sample when the code page 858 is used.
•
To select proportional pitch, enable [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Proportional] in the
[Applications] menu, or specify with the command.
•
The character set is changed according to the [SBPL] > [Font Settings] > [Code Page]
settings in the [Applications] menu or the code page specified using commands.
789
OCR-A Font
The OCR-A font is a bitmap font. The basic size varies depending on the print resolutions as follows:
Print Resolution
Basic Font Size
203 dpi (8 dots/mm)
22 dots H x 15 dots W
305 dpi (12 dots/mm)
33 dots H x 22 dots W
609 dpi (24 dots/mm)
66 dots H x 44 dots W
This supports the fixed pitch only.
The figure below is a font sample when the print resolution is 203 dpi (8 dots/mm).
790
OCR-B Font
The OCR-B font is a bitmap font. The basic size varies depending on the print resolutions as follows:
Print Resolution
Basic Font Size
203 dpi (8 dots/mm)
24 dots H x 20 dots W
305 dpi (12 dots/mm)
36 dots H x 30 dots W
609 dpi (24 dots/mm)
72 dots H x 60 dots W
This supports the fixed pitch only.
The figure below is a font sample when the print resolution is 203 dpi (8 dots/mm).
791
Outline Fonts
The font type, font size and font shape can be specified for the outline fonts.
For the font type, you can select fixed pitch or proportional pitch. You can also specify kanji, but kanji
supports fixed pitch only.
The figure below is a sample of some font shapes. Shapes such as normal font, white characters on
black background, grey font, font with shadow, mirrored font and italic font can be specified.
792
The figure below is a font sample with the standard font.
•
The font size can be specified from 1 to 999 dots, but if the font size is too small for the
font shape, it cannot be recognized as a font. Please be careful. Also, if the specified
font size is too small, it may collapse, depending on the font.
793
Multilingual Font
The product contains various multilingual fonts.
The figure below is a sample of some of the multilingual fonts.
794
Scalable Fonts
The product contains various scalable fonts.
The figure below is a sample of some scalable fonts.
795
Barcodes
Barcodes
Code Type
CL4NX Plus
Barcodes
•
UPC-A/UPC-E
•
JAN/EAN-13/8
•
CODE39, CODE93, CODE128
•
GS1-128(UCC/EAN128)
•
CODABAR(NW-7)
•
ITF
•
Industrial 2 of 5
•
Matrix 2 of 5
•
MSI
•
POSTNET
•
UPC add-on code
•
BOOKLAND
•
USPS code
•
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
•
GS1 DataBar Truncated
•
GS1 DataBar Stacked
•
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
•
GS1 DataBar Limited
•
GS1 DataBar Expanded
•
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
•
QR Code
•
Micro QR Code
•
PDF417
•
Micro PDF
•
Maxi Code
•
GS1 Data Matrix
•
Data Matrix (ECC200)
•
Aztec Code
•
GS1QR Code
•
EAN-13 Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
EAN-8 Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
UPC-A Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
UPC-E Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
GS1 DataBar Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
2D Codes
Composite Symbols
796
Code Type
•
CL4NX Plus
•
GS1 DataBar Truncated Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
GS1 DataBar Stacked Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
GS1 DataBar Expanded Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
GS1 DataBar Limited Composite (CC-A/CC-B)
•
GS1-128 Composite (CC-A/CC-B/CC-C)
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
797
SOS (SATO Online Services) (SOS users only)
Support and Warranty
SOS (SATO Online Services) (SOS users only)
The SOS (SATO Online Services) is a remote maintenance service that monitors your product status
for 24 hours and supports its stable operation. To use this service, create an SOS account and add
your product.
For details on the SOS, refer to the SOS Portal Site.
http://www.sato-sos.com/en
798
Maintenance Support
SATO provides maintenance support to ensure reliable operation of your product.
Access the following site and select your country from the list. Check the information on the displayed
page.
http://www.satoworldwide.com/service-and-support.aspx
799
Warranty Period for Consumables
Warranty Period for Consumables
For information on the warranty period for print heads, platen rollers and cutters, refer to the SATO
Global Warranty Program.
http://www.satoworldwide.com/global-warranty-program.aspx
800
Back Cover
August 2019
Version 1
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising